JP2020141718A - Game parlor system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game parlor system that allows a game player to capture the situation of a game in a game machine even if the game player drops in a game parlor light-heartedly and can acquire data captured by the game player.SOLUTION: A game parlor system having image pickup means 69U capable of taking images near a game machine SMA includes: game recording means 1094 for recording images in which a game player M is playing a game by the game machine by the image pickup means; recorded data storage means 1046 for storing recorded data by the game recording means; and recorded data acquisition means (processing of S3849) capable of acquiring recorded data that are recorded by a game player from the recorded data storage means after completion of at least the game recording means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure356

Description

The present invention relates to a system for a game hall in which a player can record a state during a game of a game machine in the game hall.

As shown in Patent Document 1, for example, the surveillance camera installed in the amusement park cannot execute the settlement process or the settlement means cannot execute the settlement process when it is determined by the comparison means that the depositor and the settlement person do not match. In most cases, it is provided to interrupt the execution of the settlement process and to monitor the gaming machines installed in the amusement park and the players playing the game.
Similarly, as shown in Patent Document 2, the surveillance camera installed in the amusement park makes it possible to quickly reproduce the monitor image necessary for checking the state of the amusement park equipment, and also reduces the equipment cost. Most of the inventions have been made to be realized.

Recently, with the spread of the Internet, it is possible to watch high-speed and large-capacity data without any inconvenience while staying at home. Video distribution sites are becoming more and more popular for advertising activities and personal hobbies by these video distribution sites.
For example, in addition to advertising the store on a video site for advertising purposes, the amusement park captures a video of the game machine installed in the amusement park playing, and sends it to other players. With the distribution of videos, the number of video sites containing advertisements that attract customers to stores and promote game machines has increased.
Then, the player brought a device such as a camera for capturing a moving image or a mobile phone to the store to image the state of the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-158504 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 08-010438

However, most of these systems monitor equipment including players and game machines, equipment at the time of prize exchange, etc., and in most cases, the player brings a camera or mobile phone to take an image. There is no invention to image the state of the game of the game machine from the installed device. Therefore, the player has no choice but to take an image with a camera or a mobile phone, and has to worry about batteries or the like depending on the recording time.

In the present invention, in order to solve such a problem, even if a player casually stops at the game hall, the state of the game of the game machine can be imaged, and the player can acquire the imaged data. The purpose is to provide a system for amusement parks in which video editing is easy.

A game field system provided with an imaging means capable of capturing an image in the vicinity of the game machine, the game recording means for recording the image of the player playing with the game machine by the imaging means, and the game recording. The recording data storage means for storing the recorded data by the means, and the recording data acquisition means capable of acquiring the recorded data recorded by the player from the recorded data storage means at least after the end of the game recording means. It is characterized by that.

The effect of the present invention is that the game hall provides a player with an imaging means and a game recording means to image the effect of the game machine, and the player can acquire the recorded data obtained by the new service. It is possible. In addition, the player can record the production of the game machine and the face of the player who is playing the game machine without bringing in a device for imaging or a recording device and without worrying about batteries or the like.

FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing a part of the amusement park. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the amusement park. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a flow of data on the network of the amusement park. FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram of main software. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 6 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 7 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 8 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 9 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 10 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 11 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 12 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 13 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 15 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 16 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 17 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 18 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 19 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 20 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 21 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 22 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 24 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 25 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 26 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 27 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 28 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 29 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 30 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 31 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 32 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram of individual call processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of individual call processing. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram of group call processing. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of group call processing. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram of convened call processing. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a convened call process. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram of the alarm information distribution process. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the alarm information distribution process. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a database of alarm information. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a database of alarm information. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram of alarm information voice distribution processing. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the alarm information voice distribution process. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram when opening and closing the game machine. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the opening / closing process of the game machine. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of door open signal processing. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram of the person requiring attention notification processing. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the person requiring attention notification processing. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the face recognition verification process. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data to be transmitted to the face recognition server. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data showing the collation result from the face authentication server. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of the amusement park system connected to the Internet network. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of a group code creation process of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a group code creation process of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 57 is a schematic view of a captured image of the system that identifies the Goto group. FIG. 58 is a schematic view of a captured image of the system identifying the Gotogroup. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server of the system for identifying the Goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying a Goto group. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data of the face recognition number and the pseudo data. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the extraction process of the system for identifying the Goto group. FIG. 67 is a schematic view of a ball lending machine used in a playground system. FIG. 68 is a configuration diagram of a device connected to the main CPU of the ball lending machine. FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing a liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of a membership card. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a network of face recognition devices in a playground system. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure of the face recognition server and the individual face recognition server. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the main process. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the recorded data capture process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face recognition verification process. FIG. 81 is a time chart of the recorded data captured image. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server verification process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the leaving seat process. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the abnormal processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the password registration process. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member is seated. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member is seated. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a list of captured image instructions. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a personal identification number is input. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view of the state of inputting the personal identification number as viewed from a plane. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face recognition engine mounted on the individual face recognition device. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face recognition server. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of an application end ball registration process for registering end balls by application software installed on a personal mobile terminal. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine registration process for registering the end balls by the ball lending machine. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the end ball server registration process for registering the end balls by the end ball server. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of a process for registering end balls. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram when registering the end ball. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the application end ball payout process when the end ball is paid out by the application software installed on the personal mobile terminal. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the end ball server payout process by the end ball server. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the end ball server payout process by the end ball server. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine payout process by the ball lending machine. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of a process for paying out the end balls. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram when paying out the end balls. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a special code creation process when creating a special code. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in the end ball server. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in the end ball server. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when the end ball server displayed on the personal mobile terminal is accessed. FIG. 109 is a ball output chart showing the difference between the game machines and the transition of the balls held by each individual. FIG. 110 is an individual income and expenditure form of an individual using an individual face recognition device. FIG. 111 is an analysis form for each game machine of the game machine aggregated for each individual using the individual face recognition device. FIG. 112 is a correction value form for each balance using an individual face recognition device. FIG. 113 is an analysis form for each game machine of the game machine, which is aggregated for each individual using the individual face recognition device and analyzed based on the correction value. FIG. 114 is a schematic layout of surveillance cameras in operation in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 115 is a schematic layout diagram of a surveillance camera in which the intrusion monitoring system is operating in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of imaging positions showing positions imaged by a surveillance camera in an intruder monitoring system. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing a state of a monitor connected to a surveillance camera system in an intruder monitoring system. FIG. 118 is a schematic view showing a recording area of a recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and equipment. FIG. 120 shows a transition diagram of a control mode in an intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of playback mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the focal position of each camera in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of night monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and island equipment. FIG. 128 is a schematic view showing a state in which a recorded image is projected on the liquid crystal display screen of the stand information display device in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a configuration diagram of a night monitoring system in an intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the night monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 131 is a time chart relating to the recording of each camera of the night monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power supply abnormality processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged plane of a part of each camera in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 134 is an item-specific explanatory diagram of the blackout detection method. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 137 is a schematic view showing an enlarged plane of a part of the island equipment in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the blackout detection process in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the blindfold countermeasure processing in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 142 is a time chart in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 143 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of each island facility installed in the amusement park on a plane and a side surface. FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility on the side surface. FIG. 145 is a schematic view showing each device installed in the island facility in a perspective view. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game medium stored in the game medium storage tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 149 is a schematic view showing a state in which the game medium is collected by the shelf board from the side surface. FIG. 150 is a perspective view in which a game medium storage tank is partially cut and a part of a modified example of the shelf board is viewed from the back surface. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a part of a modified example of the shelf board for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 152 is a schematic view showing a part of a modified example of the shelf board on the side surface. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing an upper tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter portion. FIG. 155 is a schematic view showing a state in which the shutter portion is opened and closed on the side surface. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing a state in which devices for controlling shutter units installed in a plurality of island facilities are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing a connection of devices that control the shutter unit. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a shutter opening / closing process. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game medium stored in the game medium storage tank installed in each island facility. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a shutter process for ball transport. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the store closing processing mode processing. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the initialization process. FIG. 167 is a schematic view of the movement of the sensor installed on the shelf board as viewed from the bottom. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a ball jam detection process. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the ball clogging abnormality processing. FIG. 170 is a schematic view showing a state in which foreign matter is mixed in the shelf board. FIG. 171 is a schematic view showing a state when the shelf board is operated. FIG. 172 is a schematic view showing a state when the shelf board is operated. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a sensor and a vibration device of a modified example installed on a shelf board. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of the vibration device of the modified example installed on the shelf board. FIG. 175 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility of another modified example on the side surface. FIG. 176 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility of another modified example on the side surface. FIG. 177 is a schematic view showing the end faces of the platform information display device and the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 when the island equipment is cut and viewed from the side surface. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the table information display device of Modification 1 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the table information display device of Modification 1 as viewed from the back surface side. FIG. 180 is a schematic view of a state in which the stand information display device of Modification 1 is displaying information as viewed from the front. FIG. 181 is a schematic view showing from the side surface a state in which the stand information display device of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility is closed. FIG. 182 is a schematic view showing a state in which the stand information display device of Modification 1 attached to the island facility is open from the side surface side. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a state in which the stand information display device of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility is open from above. FIG. 184 is a perspective view showing the call lamp unit mounted on the table information display device of the first modification from the front side. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp portion mounted on the stand information display device of the first modification from the back surface side. FIG. 186 is an explanatory view showing a cut end surface of a calling lamp portion mounted on the table information display device of the first modification. FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the table information display device of the modified example 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of a part of the platform information display device and the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 189 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of stand information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 190 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of stand information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 191 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of stand information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 192 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of stand information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 193 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of stand information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of table information display data used when controlling the table information display device of the first modification. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram for controlling the table information display device of the first modification. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a manual display process when controlling the unit information display device of the first modification. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a manual transmission process when controlling the unit information display device of the first modification. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the stand information display device of the first modification. FIG. 204 is a front view and a rear view showing a modified example 3 of the call lamp portion. FIG. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the first modification is mounted on the ball lending machine. FIG. 206 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 208 is a side view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the second modification is mounted on the ball lending machine. FIG. 212 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 213 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the modified example 2. FIG. 214 is a side view showing the counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the modified example 2. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view showing the counting unit of the modified example 2. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing a locking mechanism of the counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a locking mechanism of the counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 3 is mounted on the pachinko machine. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 3 mounted on the pachinko machine. FIG. 221 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the modified example 3. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 3 is disassembled. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the modified example 3. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the modified example 3. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view and an end view showing the counting unit of the modified example 3. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view showing a housing portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view showing a housing portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing the accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing how the pachinko balls roll in the accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 4 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 232 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of the modified example 4 which is partially cut. FIG. 234 is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 4 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 4 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit of the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 238 is a side view of the counting unit of the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 239 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 240 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 241 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an individual count return process in the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 243 is a schematic view showing a state of switching passages in the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 5 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 245 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the modified example 5. FIG. 246 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the modified example 5. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 250 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 5 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 251 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 5 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 252 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 5 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the counting unit of the modified example 5 in which a part of the pachinko ball is cut off to show how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a return plate return process in the counting unit of the modified example 5. FIG. 255 is a schematic view showing the movement of pachinko balls inside the ball lending machine. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing data transmission / reception between each device in the wireless amusement park. FIG. 257 is a block diagram of a first communication showing data transmission / reception between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a stand information display device of a playground system. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a receiving device of the amusement park system. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing the transmission and reception of data in the island facility of the amusement park system. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of a first communication showing data transmission / reception between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure transmitted and received between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the amusement park system. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram at the time of initial registration between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the game data communication main process of the game field system. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing emergency communication data processing of the amusement park system. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the first communication data transmission process of the amusement park system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the second communication data transmission process of the amusement park system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing emergency data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data to be transmitted / received in a modified example of the amusement park system. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the amusement park system. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission / reception of call data between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the amusement park system. FIG. 277 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the amusement park system. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing call data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing a process of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the main process of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing each camera determination process of the amusement park system. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the amount rewriting process of the amusement park system. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the guest card balance face recognition process of the amusement park system. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout and radio wave intensity of the equipment installed in the amusement park of the amusement park system. FIG. 286 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a part of the layout of the equipment installed in the playground of the playground system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio field strength and the distance of the amusement park system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing the ball box of the amusement park system and the ball box mounting stand having a built-in function of charging the ball box. FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing the ball box of the amusement park system. FIG. 290 is a schematic view showing a state in which pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the amusement park system. FIG. 291 is a schematic view showing the state of the ball box when the pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the amusement park system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box of a playground system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box of a playground system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system of the amusement park system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detecting the state of the ball box of the amusement park system. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing the control of the ball box management system of the amusement park system. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a ball box management control process of the amusement park system. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a ball box monitoring control process of the amusement park system. FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing a configuration related to an information collection system that collects game information to be displayed on the stand information display device. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode list showing an example of the relationship between the display mode displayed on the table information display device and the type of the game machine. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display content list showing the display mode and the display content on the stand information display device. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the information terminal board of the game machine. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing the processing of the game machine information signal in the table information display device. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection speed display control process for controlling the display of information related to the ball ejection speed on the table information display device. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection speed display process for controlling the display of information on the ball ejection speed on the table information display device. FIG. 307 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode for displaying on the table information display device. FIG. 308 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode to be displayed on the table information display device. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the information terminal board of the game machine. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing the processing of the game machine information signal in the table information display device. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing a start count non-display process for controlling the display of the stand information display device. FIG. 312 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode for displaying on the table information display device. FIG. 313 is a list showing an example of the contents to be displayed on the stand information display device. FIG. 314 is a schematic diagram showing the effect of the pachinko machine and the mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol LED display. FIG. 315 is a schematic view showing the symbol arrangement of the reels of the slot machine. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram showing a comparison of the number of payouts in a symbol in which the reel of the slot machine is stopped. FIG. 317 is a comparison table showing the number of slot machines acquired at the time of bonus. FIG. 318 is a comparison table regarding the probabilities and machine percentages at the set values of the slot machines. FIG. 319 is a table showing information on jackpots and the like of slot machines for each person. FIG. 320 is a chart showing the ratio of the number of players for each day of the week and the age group and the correction value for each age group. FIG. 321 is a table showing the technical intervention rank and the success rate. FIG. 322 is a comparison table showing the theoretical value and the measured value for each unit. FIG. 323 is a comparison table showing the set value and the correction value. FIG. 324 is a comparison table regarding the machine allocation in the set value of the slot machine for each machine in a part. FIG. 325 is a schematic view of an operation screen showing input of set values for each unit displayed on the monitor. FIG. 326 is a schematic view of an operation screen showing the layout and set values displayed on the monitor. FIG. 327 is an enlarged schematic view of a part of the operation screen displayed on the monitor. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing a set value control process for controlling the display of the set value and the hall layout of the set value by the hall computer. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing a set value control process for controlling the display of the set value and the hall layout of the set value by the hall computer. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine. FIG. 331 is a perspective view showing each camera unit mounted on the medal lending machine. FIG. 332 is a perspective view showing a state in which each camera unit mounted on the medal lending machine is opened and closed. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the technical intervention support unit. FIG. 334 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the medal lending machine. FIG. 335 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image processing unit. FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing the display of the screen of the liquid crystal operation unit after recognizing the image of the slot machine. FIG. 337 is a schematic view showing the display of the operation screen of the liquid crystal operation unit. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the technical intervention support process. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination process. FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of determination of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing another determination of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing another determination of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 343 is a time chart showing the initial setting of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 344 is a time chart showing a state of technical intervention support processing of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 345 is a perspective view showing each of the other camera units mounted on the smoke separation board of the other embodiment. FIG. 346 is a perspective view showing each camera unit mounted on the smoke separation board of another embodiment. FIG. 347 is a perspective view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine of another embodiment. FIG. 348 is a perspective view showing each camera unit mounted on the medal lending machine of another embodiment. FIG. 349 is an explanatory diagram of an operation screen provided in the medal lending machine of the game recording system. FIG. 350 is a flowchart of the billing system processing of the game recording system. FIG. 351 is a flowchart of the billing time processing of the game recording system. FIG. 352 is a flowchart of the effect recording process of the game recording system. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a recording screen recorded by the game recording system. FIG. 354 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in a file generated by the game recording system. FIG. 355 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in a file generated by the game recording system. FIG. 356 is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration of the game recording system. FIG. 357 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the information stored in the data storage unit in advance from the game machine maker or the like.

An embodiment of the amusement park system according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The embodiments and drawings described below exemplify a part of the embodiments of the present invention, are not used for the purpose of limiting to these configurations, and do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Can be changed as appropriate in. The corresponding components in each figure are designated with the same or similar reference numerals.

(Amusement hall equipment configuration)
The amusement park 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing a part of the amusement park 1. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of the amusement park 1.
The game hall 1 is divided into a management area 2 and a game area 3. The game area 3 is an area in which a pachinko machine P and a slot machine SMA are installed in the island facility HS, and a visitor M plays with these game machines. Here, in addition to the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA, the gaming machine includes a so-called parrot machine in which a game like the slot machine SMA is performed using a pachinko ball as a medium, or an enclosed pachinko machine in which a pachinko ball is enclosed in a machine. It also includes slot machines used in casino facilities.

The pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA are provided with an information terminal board I that provides information to the outside. The information terminal board I is a terminal that outputs a signal or the like as an event code described later to the outside. The signal output from the information terminal board I is, for example, a door open signal or a signal output when the glass door of the pachinko machine P is opened as a signal output when the door of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine SMA is opened. There is a glass open signal. In addition, there are signals such as the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, special prize signals (big hit, probability change, small hit, time saving and AT), sales information, etc. as signals indicating the operation of the game as game machine related information. In addition, as other signals, there are signals of magnetic sensors and radio wave sensors that react to magnetism and radio waves used for goto.

The island facility HS is provided with a facility for transporting, supplying, and cleaning a game medium for playing a game machine. In the island facility HS, a plurality of chairs C are arranged in pairs with the game machine so that the visitor M can sit and play a game. A plurality of island equipment HSs are installed according to the number of gaming machines. A passage is provided between the island facilities HS so that the visitor M can move and a ball box or the like for storing the acquired game medium can be placed in the vicinity of the chair C.

In addition to the game machine, the island facility HS is provided with a ball rental machine PT and a rental machine CT that rent out the game medium to the customer M as a pair with the game machine. Further, above the game machine, a stand information display device K for displaying information on the game machine such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the game machine to customers is provided. The stand information display device K is provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 and a 7-segment display for displaying information on the game machine, and notifies the employee MS by an LED or the like in the event of a trouble with the game machine or replacement of the game medium. A switch is provided. At the end of the island facility HS, a counter JC for counting the game balls and other game media acquired by the visitor M is provided.

The game area 3 is provided with a plurality of wireless routers 5 having a radio wave area of about 40 m, and many wireless routers 5 cover the range of radio waves of the mobile terminal device 40. The wireless router 5 is used for data communication and telephone calls between employee MSs, but may be used for information distribution to the customer M. Further, the wireless router 5 may be installed above the island equipment such as the ceiling of the island equipment HS, a transport gutter, and an upper tank, or may be installed at the same position as the surveillance camera 61. Further, the wireless router 5 may have a structure integrated with the surveillance camera 61. By installing the wireless router 5 and the surveillance camera 61 at the same position, or by installing the wireless router 5 and the surveillance camera 61 integrally, the distance of a person can be measured by image recognition and the wireless router 5 can be carried by the radio wave strength. It can also be used to specify the position and distance of the terminal device 40, and it becomes possible to comprehensively and accurately measure the distance and the like by using both measurement techniques.
Further, a plurality of surveillance cameras 61 are provided in the game area 3, and are attached to the ceiling on the extension line of the aisle so as to catch the visitor M who is playing the game. Further, the surveillance camera 61 is installed near the entrance of the amusement park 1, toward the prize exchange, the money changer, the safe, and the counter JC.

The management area 2 is an area in which the equipment in which the person in charge manages and operates the amusement park 1 is centrally installed. The management area 2 often has a different floor and room from the game area 3, and is a surveillance camera that mainly monitors the behavior of the hall computer 90 that manages the operating status of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA and the behavior of the customer M. A system 60, a face recognition server 80 (face recognition system) for identifying a person's face, and a communication server 10 through which employee MSs communicate with each other are installed.

The hall computer 90 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and a hard disk, stores the above-mentioned various information obtained from each gaming machine on the hard disk, and displays the information as a form on a monitor provided separately or has a printing function. have. Further, when the amount of information is large, the hall computer 90 provides a separate server to store the data.
The surveillance camera system 60 including a plurality of surveillance cameras 61 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and a hard disk, and records the video of each surveillance camera 61 on the recording server 64 of the surveillance camera system 60.

The face recognition server 80 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and hard disk, and has an image or video of a face or appearance of a visitor collected in the amusement park 1 or an image or video of a face or appearance of a goto from another store. Has a function of storing or processing.
The communication server 10 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and a hard disk, and stores main programs for performing communication and a call, which will be described later. The operation terminal 11 for operating the communication server 10 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and a hard disk, and a monitor is attached to the outside. The operation terminal 11 is provided with an interface screen for making a call, operating a communication master unit, setting a communication server 10, and the like.

In addition, an island switchboard DT, which will be described later, is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and power is turned on and off for each game machine, ball lending machine (game media lending means) PT, and lending machine (game media lending means) CT. Is possible. Further, a battery BA for nighttime monitoring, which will be described later, is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and is used in a system for controlling nighttime monitoring.

(Connection configuration of each device in the amusement park)
Next, the connection of each device used in the amusement park 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.
In order to convert the data output as a contact signal or pulse signal as a signal from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine SMA and transmit it to the hall computer 90, one in two or one for the game machine. One stand computer 93 is provided for each stand. In addition, the stand computer 93 also collects sales data of the ball lending machine PT, the lending machine CT, and the data of the individual face recognition device 800. The platform computer 93 converts the signal into a serial signal or the like and sends the signal to the island computer 91 at the end of the island facility HS by the island wiring 92. The stand computer 93 is also connected to the stand information display device K, and transmits data desired by the customer M. In the present embodiment, data is transmitted from each game machine to the table information display device K via the table computer 93, but data is transmitted from each game machine to the table information display device K and the data is transmitted to the island computer 91. You may connect to send.

The island computer 91 of each island facility HS is connected to the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 by the island wiring 95 through the ceiling or the like. Further, in the island computer 91, the counter JC and the hall computer 90 are connected by two-way communication.
The island wiring 92 and the island wiring 95 employ twisted wires, RS232C, RS422, RS485, optical cables, etc. in consideration of noise, propagation distance, etc., and are appropriately modified and used according to the intended use. Further, the island computer 91 and the stand computer 93 are equipped with a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and perform signal conversion and communication processing for collecting data of each device and transmitting the data to the hall computer 90.

The wireless router 5 is connected to the switching hub 7 in the management area 2 by a LAN cable. Further, the wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected by a wireless LAN.
Each surveillance camera 61 is connected to a camera hub 65 by a camera wiring 63 using a LAN cable, a coaxial cable, an optical cable, or the like.
The face recognition server 80, the communication server 10, the surveillance camera system 60, the operation terminal 11, and the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 are connected via a switching hub 7 by a connection wiring 8 that employs a LAN cable.
The surveillance camera system 60 is connected to each surveillance camera 61, a face recognition server 80, an immobilization detection server, and each camera 69 by the above-mentioned communication mode, and operates in cooperation with each other.
The router 9 is connected to the switching hub 7 and is connected to another store or chain store headquarters 500 by the Internet network E through the Internet line 588 to transmit and receive data.

FIG. 54 will be shown to describe the overall configuration of the amusement park system for identifying the Goto group. The case where there are a large number of game halls 1 as chain stores is shown, and the chain store headquarters 500 collects various information including sales information from the game halls 1 and manages these data. The chain store headquarters 500 stores at least face image data (605, 606 in FIG. 57 or 58) of the person requiring attention MB, which will be described later, as one of the information in the face authentication server 580. Then, the chain store headquarters 500 distributes face image data 605 that captures the face necessary for face authentication of the person requiring attention MB to each amusement park 1. These data are distributed from the chain store headquarters 500 using the Internet line 588 or the like, and are stored in the face recognition server 80 of each game hall 1 (game shop).
In addition, the data of the end balls sent from each ball lending machine PT in each store is transmitted / received to / from the end ball server 71 of the chain store headquarters 500 via the Internet network E. Further, the end ball server 71 transmits / receives data to / from the personal mobile terminal SM owned by the player M through the Internet network E.

(Composition of ball lending machine PT)
The ball lending machine PT will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. FIG. 67 is a schematic view of the ball lending machine PT used in the amusement park system. FIG. 68 is a configuration diagram of a device connected to the main CPU 850 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT.

The individual face recognition device 800 is mainly composed of an individual face recognition server 820 equipped with a face recognition engine stored in the storage area of the HDD 855 mounted on the ball lending machine PT, and each camera 69. Both are built in the ball lending machine PT.
The ball lending machine PT reads the programs of the ROM 851, RAM 853, and HDD 855 connected to the main CPU 850, and controls each device.
Each device mainly includes a liquid crystal operation unit 801, an LED display unit 812, a card processing unit 807, a bill processing unit 809, each camera 69, a speaker 831, a ball lending nozzle 803, and a counting unit 805.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with an LED display unit 812 at the top, which indicates the state of the ball lending machine PT. The LED display unit 812 indicates whether or not the ball lending machine P can lend balls, or an error of the device or the like by the display color of the LED.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a bill processing unit 809 in which the player M inserts bills of 10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 1,000 yen, etc., and performs processing for lending a game ball as a game medium from the inserted bills. ing. From the ball lending machine PT, it is possible to lend game media until the balance is exhausted.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a ball lending nozzle 803 extending to the saucer of the pachinko machine P. The ball lending nozzle 803 drives the ball lending driving unit 813, and can pay out the stored balls to the pachinko machine P at predetermined intervals.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with a card processing unit 807 at the bottom. The card processing unit 807 includes a drive motor 814 for operating the insertion and ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 inserted from the card insertion / ejection port 811, and the number of balls held in the card by the card reader / writer 804. And the contents such as the value of the balance are being rewritten. In addition, a guest card card storage unit 816 is provided so that the employee MS does not have to replenish after recording the balance and the balls (acquired balls) on the guest card 5 and moving them.
The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a speaker 831 so that an error state and handling can be announced, and a warning sound, an operation sound, and a guidance sound are generated by a drive circuit 833.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with a counting unit 805 at the bottom, which can receive a game ball acquired by the player M from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P and count the game balls by the counting counter 806. The number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 is counted as a ball possession, and the number of balls currently stored is displayed by the ball possession number display unit 802d described later. Further, the ball lending machine PT is provided with a counter shutter 832 provided with a movable opening / closing member that prevents balls from flowing into the counting counter 806 in order to stop the counting operation in the event of an abnormality or the like. The counter shutter 832 opens and closes by receiving an abnormal signal or the like from the ball lender PT. When the counter shutter 832 is activated, the counter shutter 832 is closed to prohibit the inflow of balls into the counter 806, and the counter unit 805 is in a state where the balls remain. After the abnormality or the like is released, the counter shutter 832 is opened, the ball starts flowing into the counter 806, and counting can be performed again. By providing the counter shutter 832 in this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous counting of the counting balls and to safely hold the counting balls.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with a liquid crystal operation unit 801 capable of operating the ball lending machine PT in the central portion. The liquid crystal operation unit 801 is provided with an operation display unit 802 provided with a screen that can be operated.
The operation display unit 802 includes a menu display unit 802a that serves as an interface screen, a shared display unit 802b that can be operated to share the balls and share them with others, and eject the membership card 550 and operate the ball lending machine PT. The lock display unit 802c that can select whether or not to prohibit the game, the ball number display unit 802d that can display the acquired ball of the game ball, and the menu display unit 802 are displayed on other operation screens. A switching display unit 802e that can be switched, an end display unit 802f that can be terminated by ejecting a card such as a membership card 550, and a replay that can pay out the stored balls from the ball lending nozzle 803. A display unit 802 g and an end ball processing display unit 802 h, which will be described later, are provided. These operation display units 802 are designed with a touch panel and operate by pressing the display portion.

The operation display unit 802 can display the password input display unit 845 that is operated when the password is registered or input by the switching display unit 802e. The personal identification number input display unit 845 displays the personal identification number display unit 847 that displays the input state of the personal identification number and the numerical portion to be input. After inputting the numerical value by operating the touch panel, the operation is determined by the enter button 843.
As shown in the judgment content list 825 of FIG. 91, the ball lending machine PT uses an individual face recognition device 800 equipped with a face recognition engine to perform "age", "gender", "front ratio", "seating state", and "member". Each item such as "ID", "front stand data", "front ratio", and "profile ratio" can be discriminated. Each camera 69 mounted on the individual face recognition device 800 is installed in a state that the player M does not know.

Each camera 69 is set so that the camera is most focused when the player M is seated, and an individual is identified by capturing a front face or a profile. Further, each camera 69 is configured to be able to monitor the movement of the player M by using the pan / tilt / zoom functions. The pan / tilt / zoom function is driven by the drive unit 835, and each camera 69 is controlled by the controller 834 of the ball lending machine PT from the operation terminal 11 connected to the face recognition server 80 or the hall computer 90.
In addition, the mobile terminal device 40 owned by the employee MS can be operated while viewing the image of each camera 69 via the communication server 10, and the employee MS can monitor the player M even from a remote location. Can be done. In particular, it is effective for monitoring people who need attention.

The ball lending machine PT is connected to the pachinko machine P via an IF (interface). The pachinko machine P pays the balance from the balance inserted in the ball lending machine PT, and lends the game medium to the pachinko machine P. The ball lending button 401, and the membership card 550 and guest card 551 described later are lent from the ball lending machine PT. A return button 402 for returning is provided.
Further, the ball lending machine PT is connected to the platform information display device K provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 that displays useful information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the pachinko machine P to the player M via an IF (interface) 808. Has been done.
Further, the ball lending machine PT sends the data of the individual face recognition server 820, the sales data of the ball lending machine PT, and the data of counting the game balls acquired by the counting unit 805 to the table computer 93 to the hall computer 93. Interface) Connected via 808.
In the present invention, the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is described, but the lending machine CT may be provided with each camera 69 to utilize this function. Further, each machine 69 may be provided in the machine information display device K attached to the slot machine SMA to utilize this function.

(Membership card composition)
A membership card will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The membership card 550 is an IC card equipped with an IC chip 553, and the IC chip 553 can rewrite and store data in a non-contact manner. The IC chip 553 of the membership card 550 stores a member ID, a personal identification number, monetary data, a member's face image data 555, etc., which indicate the member's code, in order to ensure security such as theft.
It should be noted that the number and number of balls held and the remaining amount data of the stored game medium may be stored in a member management server, a storage server, or the like and communicated at any time without being stored in the membership card 550. Further, these cards may be magnetic cards as well as IC chips.

(Data network configuration in the amusement park)
The main flow of data obtained from each of the above-mentioned devices will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a main data flow on the network of the amusement park 1. The communication server 10 is a server that mainly transmits and receives data, and processes data from each device to perform communication and a telephone call.

The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone server 22 as a program for making a group call, a simultaneous call, or the like in cooperation with the IP telephone terminal program 45 of the mobile terminal device 40. The IP telephone server 22 employs SIP or the like and uses a general-purpose session control protocol to establish a session with a plurality of clients and perform an operation as a so-called IP telephone that performs real-time communication in both directions.
The wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected by a wireless LAN, standards such as IEEE802.11a, 11b, 11g, 11n, and 11ac are used, and a frequency band of 5 GHz band with less congestion is used. ing. Further, in addition to the frequency band of the 5 GHz band, wireless communication of the 2.4 GHz band may be used, and it is also possible to select according to the situation such as crosstalk. Further, as other wireless communication, for example, wireless communication such as a wireless telephone line or Bluetooth (registered trademark) may be used.
Then, the communication related to the call and the data transfer is performed by the same line, and the security related to eavesdropping and data interception that occur during the call and the communication can be enhanced to the same level. Therefore, the cost for security and the cost for software production can be suppressed at low cost.

Further, the communication server 10 is provided with an intercom server 21 as a program for transmitting data for displaying alarm information on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 in cooperation with the alarm reception display program 46 of the mobile terminal device 40. The intercom server 21 sets each of the IP phones of the communication server 10 main body or the mobile terminal device 40 and the IP phone server 22.
The alarm information, which will be described later, is information that is mainly sent to the mobile terminal device 40 and is notified to alert employees. The alarm information is notified by text display, image display and voice.
The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone master unit program 23 that uses the operation terminal 11 as a master unit to make a call with the mobile terminal device 40 through the IP telephone server 22.

The communication server 10 is provided with a bridge server 20 as a program for bridging data from the surveillance camera system 60, the face recognition server 80, and the hall computer 90 to the intercom server 21. The communication server 10 is provided with a DB server 25 that cooperates with the bridge server 20 and stores various data of the communication server 10. Further, the communication server 10 is provided with an alarm server 27 that stores data transmitted as an event code, which will be described later, among various information obtained from the hall computer 90.

The signal obtained from the game machine or the like is input to the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 distributes the data to the alarm server 27. The data delivered as an event code is saved as code data. The saved data is converted into text data as alarm information by software described later and saved in the database. FIG. 41, which will be described later, shows an example of the contents stored in the database of the DB server 25.
Although the data to be saved is text data, it may be code data, and it is sufficient that the data can be converted into text data by the time it is transmitted to or displayed on the mobile terminal device 40.

The communication server 10 provides a voice synthesis program 24 as a program that converts a text display of alarm information into voice and converts it into voice information.
The communication server 10 issues a command in response to a request from the surveillance camera terminal program 66 that operates the surveillance camera operation terminal 62 provided in the surveillance camera system 60, and transmits a signal from the hall computer 90 to the bridge server 21. A VMC command program 28 is provided.
The communication server 10 is provided with an image server 26 that cooperates with the face recognition server 80 and stores data of the face recognition server 80 in response to a request from the surveillance camera terminal program 66.

As described above, the communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone server 22 as a program for making a call and an income server 21 as a program for transmitting data to be displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. By separating the call and the program for transmitting data in this way, the employee can check the information transmitted on the display screen 43 while making a call and proceed with the work, so that the employee can proceed with the work. You can work quickly and accurately.

(Network configuration of individual face recognition server in the amusement park system)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a network of a playground system. The main flow of data obtained from each device of the individual face recognition device 800 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 72.
The individual face recognition server 820 stored in the HDD 155 of the ball lending machine PT is connected to the island computer 91 at the island end by the island wiring 92 via the stand computer 93 connected via the IF808 of the ball lending machine PT. Ru. Further, the island computer 91 is connected to the switching hub (SHB) 7. Then, the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 connected to the switching hub 7 transmit and receive data by the control described later. Further, the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 820 are also connected to the hall computer 90 by the island wiring 95 via the switching hub (SHB) 7, and it is possible to analyze the game data for each individual.
In addition, the face recognition server 80, which also functions as the parent server of the individual face recognition server 820, uses a large number of surveillance cameras 61 connected to the hubs 65 for each camera to enter the store entrance of the game hall 1 and the inside of the game hall 1. It is connected to the monitoring system 60 to be monitored and monitors the person requiring attention MB and the like.

(Software configuration diagram)
The configuration of software for communicating data such as calls and alarm information using the above-mentioned program will be described with reference to FIG.
The communication server 10 is composed of a SIP server 35, a management tool 32, an alarm information backup tool 34, and an alarm information voice distribution 31 as software for making a call and communicating.

The SIP server 35 controls the mobile terminal devices 40 to be connected to each other by calling the mobile terminal devices 40 from each other or from the master unit of the operation terminal 11. The management server 32 calls the convened call, manages the call state, and notifies the alarm information. The management tool 33 controls the SIP server 35 and edits each setting. The alarm information backup tool 34 imports and exports alarm information. The alarm information voice distribution 31 converts text information into voice data and transmits the converted voice data as a voice packet.
The mobile terminal device 40 and the operation terminal 11 serving as a master unit include SIP clients 36 and 37 as software for communicating, calling, and displaying. The SIP client 36 displays a call between the master unit or the mobile terminal device 40, incoming / outgoing calls, alarm information, and the like.

(Data structure of face recognition server and individual face recognition server)
The data structure of the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 820 is shown with reference to FIG. 73.
FIG. 73A shows the data structure of the face recognition server 80. The face recognition server 80 is divided into a stem area 83 for operating the system of the face recognition server 80 and a data area 85 of the face recognition server 80. The data area 85 of the face authentication server 80 is a member / superior data area 86 in which face image data 555 of a member or a customer is stored, and a person in need of attention data area 87 in which face image data 605 of a person requiring attention is stored. The table analysis data area 88 in which the face image data 556 used for analyzing the data of the game machine for each individual is stored, and the face used for customer analysis such as gender, age, and customer unit price. A customer analysis data area 89 for storing image data 557 and a spare area 84 are provided as free data areas.

FIG. 73B shows the data structure of the individual face recognition server 820. The individual face recognition server 820 is divided into a stem area 861 for operating the system of the individual face recognition server 820 and a data area 862 of the individual face recognition server 820. The data area 862 of the individual face recognition server 820 is provided with a recording data area 863 for continuously recording the image from the camera 69, and the recording data is stored at predetermined intervals, and the recording data area 863 is the upper limit. When becomes, the stored files are overwritten in the oldest order. The data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 stores the face image data 555 or 559 recognized by each camera 69 in the procedure described later. The captured image data area 865 is a data area for controlling the captured image by the procedure described later in each camera 69. Further, the data area 862 of the individual face recognition server 820 is provided with a spare area 964 as a free data area.

(Interface screen used for the amusement park)
The interface screen for operating the above-mentioned software will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 32.

<Management tool interface screen>
First, the interface screen displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 of the management tool 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the management tool 33.
When the application software 100 of the management tool 33 is started on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the login screen 101 appears. Database information such as alarm information can be imported from the import screen 106 on the login screen 101.

When the password is entered on the login screen 101 and the login button is pressed, the screen shifts to the menu screen 102 shown in FIG. The SIP server control button 105 is provided on the menu screen 102, and when the SIP server control button 105 is pressed, the screen shifts to the SIP server control screen 103. The SIP control screen 103 is provided with a screen for controlling the start, stop, restart, and data reloading of the SIP server 35 (not shown). When the setting button 104 on the menu screen 102 is pressed, the screen shifts to the setting screen 110 shown in FIG.

The setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 shows a state in which the terminal tab 111 is selected. At the top of the setting screen 110, tabs for transitioning to other setting screens are provided. In addition to the terminal tab 111, the group tab 112, the convening tab 113, the filter tab 114, the blacklist tab 115, and the access point tab 116 And there is a server tab 117. A startup display 121 is provided as a window that is commonly displayed on other setting screens and indicates the operation of the management server 32.
Further, at the lower part of the setting screen 110, a confirmation button 118 and a cancel button 119 which are commonly displayed on other setting screens are provided. When the confirmation button 118 is pressed, the data is updated in the database, and when the cancel button 119 is pressed, the screen returns to the menu screen 102.

Next, when the group tab 112 is selected, the group conference room edit screen 130 is displayed. On the group conference room editing screen 130 (not shown), the group number and the group name are displayed as a list of the groups set in the SIP server 35 and the management server 32. The group conference room editing screen 130 is a screen for adding and editing groups.

Next, when the convocation tab 113 is selected, the convocation call editing screen 140 is displayed. On the convocation call editing screen 140 (not shown), a convocation number and a convocation name are displayed as a list of convocation calls set in the SIP server 35 and the management server 32. The convened call editing screen 140 is a screen for adding and editing a convened call.

Next, when the filter tab 114 is selected, the alarm information filter screen 150 shown in FIG. 8 is displayed. The alarm information filter screen 150 is a screen for setting the distribution of alarm information. The event code, group number, and device number are displayed in the alarm information filter list 153. The event code is a code transmitted from the hall computer 90 and the surveillance camera system 60.

Here, the event code is output from the hall computer 90 as an event code, which is a signal that is mainly treated as an abnormality of a game machine or other equipment among the signals aggregated in the hall computer or the like.
The types of signals include the door open signal transmitted when the frame of the pachinko machine P or slot machine SMA is released, the glass open signal transmitted when the glass frame of the pachinko machine P is released, and the suspicion of Goto. In some cases, a signal when a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, etc. are activated, a signal related to a call when a visitor M makes a call on the stand information display device K, a ball lending machine PT, a lending machine CT, a counter JC, and an island. Examples thereof include an abnormality signal of a device for transporting and replenishing a game medium stored in the equipment HS, an abnormality signal of an exchange machine, and the like.
In addition, the event code transmitted from the surveillance camera system 60 uses the information from the face recognition server 80 as a trigger to notify that the person requiring attention MB is in the store, and the occurrence of the goto found in the surveillance camera system 60 is left unattended. There is a code etc.
These data are stored in the database of the DB server 25, and other data having the contents shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, which will be described later, are stored.
As the event code, not only the device connected to the hall computer 90 but also the information of each device installed in the game area 3 can be taken in as the event code.

The group number is a group number for making a group call as described above. The device number is a number assigned to each pachinko machine P or slot machine SMA represented by a game machine, a counter JC at the island edge, a ball lending machine PT, a lending machine CT, a money changer, or an island. This is a number assigned to a replenishment device, an out-ball counter, etc. in the HS in the facility. Further, the device number may be the number of each surveillance camera 61 corresponding to the position where the surveillance camera 61 is installed.

At the top of the alarm information filter screen 150, there is a check box 154 for selecting whether or not to perform audio distribution. This is a field for selecting whether or not to perform voice distribution for each event code, and if selected, text data is voice-synthesized and voice data is delivered. If not selected, only text data will be delivered as alarm information.
It's a simple setting just to check, and at the same time, it can be set for each individual event code, so employees can easily make extremely detailed settings.

The alarm information filter screen 150 is provided with an additional button 155 and an edit button 157. By pressing the add button 155, the screen shifts to the add screen 156 of FIG. 9A, and the event code, device number, and group number can be additionally set. Further, by selecting the event code from the alarm information filter list 153 and pressing the edit button 157, the screen shifts to the edit screen 158 of FIG. 9B, and the device number and the group number can be edited and set.
Since the alarm information can be set for each group, for example, it is not necessary to provide information about the pachinko machine P to the group in charge of the slot machine SMA. In this way, it is possible to select and send the necessary information to the necessary groups.

Next, when the blacklist tab 115 is selected, a blacklist editing screen 160 (not shown) is displayed. The blacklist editing screen 160 is a screen for displaying a list of intruders invading the network for the purpose of eavesdropping or falsifying the system, and adding or editing the list.

Next, when the access point tab 116 is selected, the access point editing screen 170 shown in FIG. 10 is displayed. This screen is for adding and editing access points. The access point editing screen 170 uses the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as an access point, and displays a list of access points 171 in the center of the screen.
The access point edit screen 170 is provided with an add button 172 and an edit button 173, and by pressing the add button 172 or the edit button 173, the process shifts to the additional edit screen 175 of FIG. The additional editing screen 175 is a screen for adding and editing the access point name, the network name (SSID) of 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz, and the encryption key.
The communication and telephone networks of this system include an encryption key to provide security measures to prevent eavesdropping and intrusion from the outside. The encryption key may be a fixed encryption key, but security can be further enhanced by using a randomly generated encryption key. Further, the additional editing screen 17 of FIG. 11 has a function of displaying an encryption key, and by displaying the encryption key on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the work of setting the mobile terminal device 40 described later can be expedited. Can be done.
Further, the access point editing screen 170 is provided with an XML file output button 174 that outputs a file to be set in the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 in the XML format.

Next, when the server tab 117 is selected, a server information setting screen 180 (not shown) is displayed, and the connection status to the SIP server 35 and the DB server 25 can be confirmed. The server information setting screen 180 displays the store name, the IP address of the SIP server 35, the user ID, and the password, and can be edited. In addition, the IP address, user ID, database name and password of the DB server 25 that serves as the database are displayed and can be edited.

Next, when the terminal tab 111 is selected, the setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. The setting screen 110 is a screen for setting information on the mobile terminal device 40, and the terminal number and terminal name of the set mobile terminal device 40 are displayed as a terminal information list 127 in the center of the screen. An add button 122 and an edit button 123 are provided at the bottom of the list of the setting screen 110, and when the add button 122 or the edit button 123 is pressed, the screen shifts to the terminal information edit screen 120 (not shown). The terminal information editing screen 120 is a screen for adding and editing a telephone number and a terminal name to the mobile terminal device 40 selected when adding / editing the mobile terminal device 40.
At the bottom of the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110, a delete button 124 for deleting the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and a file for setting the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 from the selected terminal are displayed in XML. An XML file output button 126 that outputs in a format is provided.

Further, an identification number output button 125 is provided at the bottom of the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110, and when the identification number output button 125 is pressed, the screen shifts to the identification number output access point selection screen 190 shown in FIG. ..
The identification number output access point selection screen 190 displays the store name, telephone number, and IP address of the SIP server 35 or management server 32 as information on the mobile terminal device 40. On the identification number output access point selection screen 190, a list of access points 191 is displayed with the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as the access point in the center of the screen. When the access point displayed in the list 191 is selected and the identification number display button 19 is pressed, the screen shifts to the identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG.

The identification number display screen 195 displays the store name, telephone number, IP address of the SIP server 35 and management server 32, access point name, and 5 GHz band and 2.4 GHz band networks (SSID) as access point information of the mobile terminal device 40. ) The name is displayed. Although not shown, information on access points in the 5 GHz band and the 2.4 GHz band is displayed as identification numbers 197a and 197b in a square frame.
The identification numbers 197a and 197b are displayed in a form such as a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode or a color code that is difficult to recognize. The identification numbers 197a and 197b include an encryption key to provide security measures to prevent eavesdropping and intrusion from the outside. The encryption key may be a fixed encryption key, but security can be further enhanced by using a randomly generated encryption key.

Further, by displaying the identification numbers 197a and 197b on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the mobile terminal device 40 incorporates the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the monitor screen 13 into the mobile terminal device 40. It can be captured by the camera 41. In the identification numbers 197a and 197b captured by the camera 41, the store name and telephone number that the mobile terminal device 40 can access the network, the IP address of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32, the access point name, and the 5 GHz band And 2.4GHz band network (SSID) name and encryption key are included. Therefore, the SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, which facilitates the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and informs the employee of the setting of the encryption key and the like. Since the mobile terminal device 40 can be set and the management tool 33 can be set without any need, it is possible to enhance security.
Further, since the same information as the information displayed on the monitor screen 13 is printed on the paper surface of the print button, it is easy to set the access to the network by capturing it with the camera 41 of the mobile terminal device 40 or the like.
Next, on the identification number output access point selection screen 190 and the identification number display screen 195, the currently open screen is closed by pressing the close button on the screen.

<Interface screen of SIP client of operation terminal>
The interface screen of the SIP client 37 of the master unit displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22.
FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the SIP client 37. When the application software 200 of the SIP client 37 is started on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 is displayed. On the call screen 210, the number of the own station is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a state display field 211 indicating the call state is provided below the number. Further, below the status display field 211, an alarm information display field 212 for displaying alarm information in text is provided. A message transmission button 213 is provided below the alarm information display field 212, and when the message transmission button 213 is pressed, the message transmission screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 is displayed.

The message transmission screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 has a function of manually transmitting a message and an image, and when the destination type 221 is pressed, three types of destinations specified as whole, group, and terminal are selected. can do. The destination list 222 displays the destinations of the group selected by the destination type 221.
The message transmission screen 220 is provided with a message field 223 on the right side of the screen on which text can be input. In addition, the surveillance camera system 60, face, so that images of people requiring attention such as Goto masters obtained at other stores or own stores, and manuals, etc. can be transmitted in the event of trouble with equipment including game machines in the game area 3. An image to be transmitted by referring to the image data can be selected from the image file of the authentication server 80, the SIP server 35, or the operation terminal 11.
In this way, since the message can be delivered as a text together with the image, it is possible to accurately and quickly send information to the employee in the game area 3 even if he / she is not in the management area 2 for troubles including goto. And the employee who got the information has the advantage that it can deal with it accurately and quickly.
Then, the message transmission screen 220 is closed by pressing the close button at the bottom.

Further, the call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 has an utterance button 213 that enables utterance to the designated mobile terminal device 40 while the button is pressed during a call, and utterance that always continues to speak until it is released. A button 215 is provided. The call screen 210 can make a call to the mobile terminal device 40 by inputting the numeric keypad or selecting the speed dial field 217 on the right.

Next, by pressing the option button 218 below the call screen 210, the screen shifts to the option screen 230 shown in FIG. The option screen 230 is a screen for selecting each function.
The option screen 230 shown in FIG. 17 includes a group call list button 232, an individual call list button 233, a convened call list button 234, an alarm information list button 235, a setting button 236, and an import button 237.
When the import button 237 is pressed, an import screen 290 (not shown) is displayed. The import screen 290 is a screen for importing a file to be output in XML format by the management tool 33.

Next, when the group call list button 232 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the group call list screen 240 shown in FIG. The group call list screen 240 is a screen for selecting a group call destination, and by selecting one from the list screen 241 of all groups and pressing the call button 242, a group call is started and the call screen 210 is displayed. Return automatically.

Next, when the individual call list button 233 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the individual call list screen 250 shown in FIG. The individual call list screen 250 is a screen for selecting an individual call destination, and by selecting one from the individual call list screen 251 and pressing the call button 252, the call destination is called and called. When the call destination answers, the call is started and the call screen 210 is automatically returned.

Next, when the convocation call list button 234 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the convocation call list screen 260 shown in FIG. The convened call list screen 260 is a screen for selecting a convened call destination, and by selecting one from the list screen 261 of all convened groups and pressing the call button 262, the call destination is called and a call is started. Automatically returns to the call screen 210.

Next, when the alarm information list button 235 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the alarm information list screen 280 shown in FIG. The alarm information list screen 280 is a screen for displaying a list of alarm information. The alarm information list screen 280 is provided with an alarm information list 281 that displays alarm information acquired from the database on the left side of the screen, and displays the contents of the alarm information in text. In the upper right part of the alarm information list screen 280, an alarm information image field 282 capable of displaying an image attached to the alarm information is provided. Further below the alarm information message field 283, which can display a message attached to the alarm information and detailed contents, is provided.

Next, when the setting button 236 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the setting screen 270 shown in FIG. In the screen shown in FIG. 22, the IP addresses and port numbers of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 to which the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40 are connected are set, and the telephone numbers of the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40 are set. This is the screen for setting the password and display name.
Further, the screen displayed on the speed dial tab is a screen for selecting a speed dial number from individual calls, group calls, and convocation calls, and the selected speed dial number is the speed dial field 217 of the call screen 210 shown in FIG. Is displayed in.

<Interface screen of SIP client of mobile terminal device>
The interface screen of the SIP client 36 displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32.
FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the SIP client 36. When the application software 300 of the SIP client 36 is started on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40, the lock screen 310 shown in FIG. 24 is displayed. The lock screen 310 is displayed at startup and is a screen for preventing malfunction. For example, when the mobile terminal device 40 is put into a pocket of clothes or inserted into a holder or the like to be attached to the waist or arm, even if the display screen 43 is touched with some beat, a call or other A function is provided so that the touch operation cannot be performed on the display screen 43 so as not to shift to the screen. Further, even if the operation is not performed for a certain period of time, the lock screen 310 is displayed. Then, when performing an operation such as a call, pressing and holding the unlock button 311 shifts to the call screen 320.
Further, below the unlock button 311 is provided an information display field 312 capable of displaying one unread latest alarm information.

Next, the call screen 320 shown in FIG. 25 is a call screen that functions as an income. While the call button 321 on the screen is pressed, it is possible to speak with the selected terminal, but the utterance button 44 (FIG. 63) provided in the mobile terminal device 40 is pressed or the microphone is provided. You can also speak while pressing these buttons by using the utterance switch.
By pressing the camera button 323 provided on the call screen 320, the camera 41 of the mobile terminal device 40 can take an image. The captured image is registered in the management server 32, and each mobile terminal device 40 and This is a function of delivering to the operation terminal 11. The camera 41 can capture not only images but also moving images, and the captured images and moving images can be used as evidence when a trouble occurs with a goto or a customer. Further, in the case of equipment trouble, it is possible to send an image or a moving image to the management area 2 to investigate the cause of the failure and to deal with the failure remotely.

Below each button, there is an information display field 324 that can display one latest alarm information as an unread message. Further, below the information display field 324, a message confirmation field 325 for displaying the number of unread messages is provided. The message confirmation field 325, which displays read and unread, allows the employee to know that there is information that has not been confirmed, and can also be used to confirm whether the work has not been completed yet.
By pressing the message confirmation field 325, a message can be displayed in the information display field 324. The call screen 320 automatically shifts to the lock screen 310 when it is not operated for a certain period of time.
Next, when the option button 322 shown in FIG. 25 is pressed, the screen shifts to the option screen 330 shown in FIG. The option screen 330 is a screen for selecting each function, and is a group call list button 331, an individual call list button 332, an alarm information list button 333, a connection destination list button 334, an access point list button 335, and an identification number reading button 336. And a terminal name setting button 337 is provided.

Next, when the group call list button 331 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the group call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 27. The group call list screen 340 is a screen for selecting a group call destination, and one call is selected from all the groups as a call destination, and a call is started by pressing the group call display 341. If there is no callee for the group, the alarm information is displayed in text.
Next, when the individual call list button 332 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the individual call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 28. The individual call list screen 350 is a screen for selecting an individual call destination, and one of the displayed individual call destinations is selected as a call destination, and a call is started by pressing the individual call display 351. If there is no individual call destination, the alarm information is displayed in text.

Next, when the access point list button 335 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the access point list screen 360 shown in FIG. 29. The access point list screen 360 is a screen for measuring the radio field strength of each access point and switching the access point. The access point list screen 360 displays the radio field strength that can be detected by the portable terminal device 40, and the radio wave strength is displayed from above in the order of strong radio wave. The displayed access point can be switched by pressing it, but it may be automatically switched to an access point with strong radio waves. The radio wave condition is also sent to the management server 32, and is also used for monitoring a person to be watched, which will be described later.

Next, when the identification number reading button 336 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the identification number reading screen 370 shown in FIG. The identification number reading screen 370 automatically reads the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG. 13 by the camera 41 built in the mobile terminal device 40 on the network. Can be set. Store name, telephone number, IP address of SIP server 35 and management server 32, access point name, network (SSID) name of 5 GHz band and 2.4 GHz band, encryption key that the mobile terminal device 40 can access the network The SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, which facilitates the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and allows the employee to set the encryption key and the like. Since the mobile terminal device 40 and the management tool 33 can be set without being known, it is possible to enhance the security. Then, when the reading and setting of the mobile terminal device 40 are completed, the screen shifts to the option screen 330.

Next, when the alarm information list button 333 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the alarm information list screen 380 shown in FIG. 31. The alarm information list screen 380 displays a list of transmitted alarm information. By pressing the displayed alarm information, the screen shifts to the alarm information detail screen 390 shown in FIG. 32.
The alarm information detail screen 390 displays the details of a text message or an image. The alarm information detail screen 390 also displays information such as the date and time when the alarm information was generated and the photographer of the image.
Further, the alarm information detail screen 390 is provided with an unlock request button 393 that requests the hall computer 90 to release the closed state of the door when opening and closing the door of the game machine. In addition, a machine number input frame 395 for inputting the machine number of the game machine that releases the closed state of the door is also provided.

Next, when the connection destination list button 334 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the SIP server list screen 317 shown in FIG. 23. This is a screen for switching the SIP server 35 of the connection destination. If the mobile terminal device 40 is set to another store in advance, it can be used in another store simply by switching the SIP server 35.
As described above, the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 is convenient because it is only necessary to read the identification number with the camera 41, and if there is one mobile terminal device 40, it can be quickly used in other stores. Therefore, even if the number of mobile terminal devices 40 is not prepared for each store, the number of mobile terminal devices 40 can be reduced in a group store because the mobile terminal devices 40 can be carried around.

Next, when the terminal name setting button 337 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the name setting screen 315 shown in FIG. The name setting screen 315 is a screen for setting the terminal name of the own mobile terminal device 40.

(Control of the amusement park system)
Each control in the amusement park system will be described with reference to the sequence diagram, the flowchart, and the like shown in FIGS. 33 to 66. These controls are realized by using the above-mentioned software and programs, but the modification is not particularly limited to the above-mentioned software and programs, as long as the configuration of the software and programs can realize the contents of this control. It doesn't matter what you do.

<Control of individual calls, group calls, and convened calls>
The control related to the call will be described with reference to the sequence diagram and the flowchart shown in FIGS. 33 to 38.
The control when making an individual call will be described. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram when making an individual call, and FIG. 34 is a flowchart relating to processing when making an individual call. The individual call is a function capable of making a one-to-one call in a call between the master unit and the mobile terminal device 40 and a call between the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11.

First, the caller selects a call destination from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 19) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 28) of the mobile terminal device 40 (S101). The calling side SIP clients 36 and 37 end the call currently in progress (S102) and make a call to the selected call destination (S103). The SIP server 35 that receives the outgoing call calls the call destination (S104). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party side display an incoming call dialog. When the called party is the SIP client 36 of the mobile terminal device 40 (YES in S106), the notification is given by the ringtone and vibration (S107), and when the called party is the SIP client 37 of the operation terminal 11 (S106). YES), the notification is given only by the ringtone (S108).

When the called party selects a response (YES in S109), the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party end the current call (S110) and transmit the response to the SIP server 35 (S111). The SIP server 35 transmits a response to the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the calling side, and the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the calling side receive the response (S112). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S113). Further, the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party side notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S113). Then, they are ready to start talking to each other.
When the called party rejects the response (NO in S109), the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called side send a rejection to the SIP server 35 (S115), and the SIP server 35 indicates that the response is rejected. Receive. The SIP server 35 transmits a rejection to the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the calling side, and the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the calling side receive the rejection (S116). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side make a call to the previous call group toward the SIP server 35 (S117). Further, the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S118).

Next, the control when talking in a group will be described. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram when making a group call, and FIG. 36 is a flowchart relating to processing when making a group call.
The group call is a call between the master unit and the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and a call within the telephone number registered in advance in the group conference room in the call between the mobile terminal device 40. It is a function that allows you to make multiple-to-multiple calls.

When switching to a group call, when a group call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 18) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 27) of the mobile terminal device 40 (S210), the SIP clients 36 and 37 first Ends the current call (S202) and makes a call to the selected group meeting room (S203). When the SIP clients 36 and 37 are registered in the selected group (YES in S204), the destination is notified to the management server 32 (S207), and the call can be started.

If the SIP clients 36 and 37 are not registered in the selected group (NO in S204), the SIP server 35 notifies the SIP clients 36 and 37 of the end of the call (S205), and the SIP clients 36 and 37 notify the SIP clients 36 and 37. Make a call to the previous call group toward the SIP server 35 (S206). Further, the SIP clients 36 and 37 notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S207), and return to the state before switching to the group call.
In group calls, by classifying groups according to the level of engagement, the installation location of the pachinko machine P or slot machine SMA in charge, the group of island equipment HS in charge, etc., only the desired information can be sent and received for each group.

Next, the control at the time of the convened call will be described. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram when making a convened call, and FIG. 38 is a flowchart relating to processing when making a convened call.
The convocation call is a call mainly made between the mobile terminal device 40 and the master unit displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11. The convocation call is a function in which the master unit calls a specific SIP client 36, and the SIP client 36 called to the convening conference room and the master unit make a call, and one-to-many calls can be made. When a convened call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 20) of the operation terminal 11 (S301), the SIP client 37 terminates the currently busy call (S302) and makes a call to the selected convened conference room (S302). S303).
The SIP client 37 notifies the management server 32 of the destination (S304) and transmits the convened call (S305). The management server 32 notifies the SIP client 36 of the convened call (S306). The SIP client 36 displays an incoming call dialog on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 (S307). If the terminal to be summoned is a mobile phone (YES in S308), the notification is notified by a ringtone and vibration (S310), and if the called party is a SIP client 36 without a vibration function (NO in S308), Notify the notification only by the ringtone (S309).

When the SIP client 36 that has been notified of the convocation makes a call (YES in S311), the SIP client 36 terminates the currently in-call call (S312) and makes a call to the convened conference room. (S313), the management server 32 is notified of the response (S314). Then, the convocation call is started.
When the SIP client 36 that has received the convocation notification refuses (NO in S311), the SIP client 36 notifies the management server 32 of the refusal (S315).
Then, the SIP client 37 of the master unit receives the result of the response or rejection of the summoned SIP client 36 (S316).
The convocation call is used by the person in charge of the amusement park 1 to convene a specific person in an emergency such as a goto, and can quickly and accurately convey information to the employee. In addition, since there is a reply such as a response or refusal (S316), the person in charge can grasp the state of the client and issue a command promptly, and the employee who receives the response can quickly respond to the trouble. ..

<Distribution control of alarm information>
The control related to the alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagram, the flowchart, and the explanatory diagram of the contents of the database shown in FIGS. 39 to 44.

The control related to the distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram when delivering alarm information, and FIG. 40 is a flowchart relating to processing when delivering alarm information.
The trigger for the distribution of the alarm information is triggered by the signal transmitted from the bridge server 20. The signal to the bridge server 20 can be transmitted via the bridge server 20 with the hall computer 90 as the source and alarm information delivered via the bridge server 20 with the surveillance camera system 60 as the source. There are two cases where the alarm information is delivered.

First, when the event code from the surveillance camera system 60 is transmitted to the management server 32 (YES in S401), the management server 32 distributes to the specified one or all SIP clients 36 and 37 logged in. Decide whether to deliver to.
When the management server 32 distributes the information to the designated one (YES in S404), the management server 32 acquires the information of the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S405). When delivering to all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (NO in S404), information on all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 is acquired.
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is transmitted to the management server 32 (NO in S401), the management server 32 acquires the information of the distribution target group (S402), and the SIP clients 36 and 37 talking to the target group. (S403).
Then, the management server 32 converts the content of the alarm information corresponding to the event code and transmits it to the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S407).

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the data 2501 stored in the database (DB server 25). As the data commonly held by the management server 32 and the mobile terminal device 40, the ID of the alarm information, the content of the alarm information, the message of the surveillance camera system 60, the store name of the amusement park 1, and the names of the generated SIP clients 36 and 37. , Event code, code of the device subject to the alarm information, device number such as the machine number of the gaming machine subject to the alarm information, and the date and time when the alarm information was generated. In addition to the above, the management server 32 holds the type of alarm information, the name of the terminal of the surveillance camera system 60, and the name of the image file.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the alarm information data 2502 held in the database (DB server 25). In the text display of the alarm information, for example, an event code (“005”) is output from the hall computer 90 when the call button of the table information display device K is pressed. As for the alarm information at this time, texts such as "Please turn to the 3rd course", "Please turn around the XX series", and "Call" are displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. In addition, if the event code (“010”) when the game machine is opened / closed is output, “123 series door open” or the like is displayed. When a suspicious person appears, an event code (“105”) is output from the surveillance camera system 60 or the face recognition server 80, and “suspicious person information” or the like is displayed. When the rental machine CT attached to the slot machine SMA is not replenished, an event code (“798”) is output from the hall computer 90, and “suspicious person information” and the like are displayed. The text display may include characters, figures, symbols, etc., and may be in a form that can be recognized by employees, etc.

Further, the mobile terminal device 40 does not directly hold the image file but holds the information of the path to the file so that the data capacity can be small. Further, the mobile terminal device 40 also holds information that can determine whether the alarm information has been read or unread so that the content of the alarm information can be confirmed later even if the confirmation cannot be performed immediately in the work.
The image attached to the alarm information, the path to the image file, or the like may be a moving image. Further, the moving image may be a live moving image delivered directly from the surveillance camera system 60.

Next, control related to voice distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram when voice distribution of alarm information is performed, and FIG. 44 is a flowchart relating to processing when distribution of alarm information is performed.
The voice distribution of the alarm information is a process of converting the text information into voice information and transmitting the voice to the conference room of the corresponding group when the alarm information is generated. It operates with the transmission of data from the bridge server 20 as a trigger, and processing is performed when voice distribution is selected for each event code on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33.

First, when the alarm information is generated, when the event code from the surveillance camera system 60 is transmitted to the management server 32 (YES in S501), the management server 32 distributes to one designated group or all. Determine whether to deliver to SIP clients 36 and 37. When the management server 32 distributes the information to one designated group (YES in S502), the management server 32 acquires the information of the busy group of all the SIP clients 36 and 37 (S504). When delivering to all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (NO in S502), the information of the group of simultaneous calls is acquired (S505).
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is transmitted to the management server 32 (NO in S501), the management server 32 acquires the information of the distribution target group (S503).
The management server 32 makes a request to the alarm information voice distribution 31 in order to distribute the voice data to the distribution target group (S506). The alarm information voice distribution 31 attempts voice synthesis of text data (S507), and if the voice synthesis is successful (YES in S508), transmits the voice data to the SIP server 35 (S509), and SIPs the voice data. Deliver to clients 36 and 37 (S510). If the voice synthesis fails (NO in S508), the alarm information voice distribution 31 outputs a log and ends without transmitting the voice data to the SIP server (S511).

<< Control when opening and closing the game machine >>
Although the distribution control of the alarm information has been described, a mode in which the process of distributing the alarm information for the event occurring in the amusement park 1 is controlled will be described in more detail.
The control related to the alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagram and the flowchart shown in FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram when a trouble occurs in the game machine and the game machine is opened and closed, and FIG. 46 is a flowchart relating to processing when the game machine is opened and closed. FIG. 47 is a flowchart for distributing alarm information and the like after the game machine is opened and closed.

First, the visitor M who is playing the game has a call button of the machine information display device K when the pachinko machine P is jammed or when the slot machine SMA has an error in the hopper and cannot play the game. Press to call the employee MS. The hall computer 90 transmits the “call” of the event code (“005”) as the information that the call button is pressed to the management server 32 via the bridge server 20 (S601). When the event code of "call" is selected for voice distribution (YES in S602) on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33, the management server 32 performs the above-mentioned alarm information voice distribution process. (S500), when the event code (“005”) of the “call” is not selected for voice distribution (NO in S602), the alarm information distribution process described above is performed (S400). The alarm information delivered as text data is displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 by characters or the like, such as "call" or "please go to the 3rd course". Since it is delivered as text data, it is not necessary to have a database for converting the event code in the mobile terminal device 40, and the capacity of the program can be reduced. Further, by displaying characters or the like on the display screen 43, it becomes easy to confirm the contents of the alarm information.

The employee MS who owns the mobile terminal device 40 to which the notification has been made rushes to the game machine and sets the machine in the machine number input frame 395 of FIG. 32 so as to unlock the lock mechanism of the game machine in order to handle the trouble. By inputting the number and pressing the unlock request button 393, the SIP client 36 requests the management server 32 to unlock the lock mechanism of the game machine (S603). The management server 32 holds the unlock data (S604) and requests the hall computer 90 to unlock the gaming machine (S605). The hall computer 90 releases the lock mechanism for the target game machine (S606).

In this control, even if the alarm information is not delivered, the employee MS may rush to the island facility HS by the indicator lamp to request the release of the lock mechanism.
The lock mechanism is a lock mechanism that closes the game machine with a contracting wire attached to the frame of the game machine provided on the island equipment HS side, or a lock mechanism that fixes the key cylinder when opening and closing the game machine. Is also good and is not particularly limited. Further, although the description is given in the release of the lock mechanism for each game machine, when the lock mechanism is released, the lock mechanism may be released for each unit of a plurality of units.
Although the unlocking of the lock mechanism of the game machine has been described via the hall computer 90, the mobile terminal device 40 via infrared communication or wireless communication via the stand information display device K, or directly to the game machine or to the lock mechanism. The lock mechanism of the game machine may be released by directly transmitting a signal. If the information on which SIP clients 36 and 37 requested to release the lock mechanism is stored and collation is possible in the process described later, there is no particular limitation.

Next, in order to deal with the trouble of the game machine whose lock mechanism is released, the employee MS opens and closes the game machine with the key. When the game machine is opened and closed, a door open signal is issued from the game machine to the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 that receives the door open signal sends the event code (“010”) “door open” to the bridge server. It is transmitted to the management server 32 via 20 (S701).
The management server 32 verifies whether the game machine has requested unlocking (S702), and if there is a SIP client 36/37 requesting unlocking (YES in S702), delivers the SIP client 36/37. Exclude from the target (S703). By excluding the SIP clients 36 and 37 that have requested unlocking in this way, it is not necessary to notify the employee MS who requested unlocking again, so that unnecessary distribution can be avoided. In addition, it may be misleading information for the employee MS who requested unlocking, and those who do not have extra information can rather concentrate on the work and process it quickly.

If the management server 32 does not have a game machine that has requested unlocking and the game machine is opened / closed (NO in S702), the door of the game machine is illegally opened or the lock mechanism of the game machine is abnormal. The event code (for example, "099") is rewritten as "illegal door open" (S704).
When the event code is selected for voice distribution (YES in S705) on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33, the management server 32 performs the alarm information voice distribution process described above (S500). When the event code is not selected for voice distribution (NO in S705), the alarm information distribution process described above is performed (S400).
Even when voice distribution is being performed (S500), the alarm information distribution process (S400) may be performed at the same time, or the alarm information may be displayed on the display screen 43. Not only one of them may be delivered, but both (S400, S500) may be delivered.
In this way, by collating the game machine that requested the unlocking with the game machine that opened the door (S702), it is possible to quickly and easily detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the game machine. In addition, the employee MS can be confirmed by characters (“123 series door open”, “door open”, “123 series illegal door open”, “illegal door open”, etc.) and images on the display screen 43 ( (S704 to S400), it becomes possible to notify by voice (S704 to S500).

Further, the event code "door open" transmits an abnormal signal from the hall computer 90 to the surveillance camera system 60, and the surveillance camera system 60 zooms the surveillance camera 61 with respect to the gaming machine and is playing a game. It is also conceivable to use it as an opportunity to take an image of M. In this way, it is also possible to attach the face image or video of the customer M who is playing the game to the alarm information and distribute it. In addition, by being notified of the alarm information "illegal door open", the employee MS can rush to the site while checking the status with the delivered face image and video, and can respond accurately and promptly. Is.
It should be noted that the alarm information distribution process when an "illegal door open" occurs may be distributed to a specific employee, for example, only to the leader of the group call or the person in charge of the hall, even in the group call. well. A group call may be set in advance to identify an employee who can respond illegally even in a group call and deliver alarm information.

In this way, by setting the employees to deliver the alarm information in advance according to the type of error, the division of roles becomes clear and it becomes possible to respond promptly. At that time, the employee registers the work that he / she can perform from the mobile terminal device 40 to the management server 32, approves it by the leader of the group call, etc. It may be a system that selects the employees who can do it and distributes the alarm information.

<< Control when a person requiring attention comes to the store >>
Further, a mode in which the process of distributing the alarm information when the person requiring attention MB visits the game hall 1 is controlled will be described in detail.
Control related to alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams, flowcharts, and the like shown in FIGS. 48 to 53 and 57. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when the person requiring attention MB visits the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart relating to the control process when the person requiring attention MB visits the store. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a control in which the face recognition server 80 collates a person in order to identify a person requiring attention MB. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data to be transmitted to the face authentication server 80. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data showing the collation result from the face authentication server 80. FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed on the mobile terminal device 40. FIG. 57 is a schematic view of a captured image of the system that identifies the Goto group.

First, the process of notifying the visit of the person requiring attention MB by the alarm information begins with the process of collating with the face authentication server 80 in order to identify the person requiring attention MB (S900).
The face recognition server 80 detects images from other stores stored in the database of the face recognition server 80 or images accumulated in its own store so far by a surveillance camera 61 installed at the entrance of the amusement park 1. It is judged whether or not they match with the face image (S901). In this process, if the face image data stored in the database and the customer M do not have a matching rate of a certain ratio, it is determined that they do not match, and the next customer M is repeatedly matched (S901). NO). Then, the face image detected by the surveillance camera 61 (for example, the captured image 600 in FIG. 57) and the face image data of the face image stored in the database of the face recognition server 80 (face represented by the face recognition number 583 described later). The image data 605 (for example, the image of FID001) is compared, and if it is determined to match (YES in S901), the surveillance camera system 60 is notified that the suspected person requiring attention MB has visited (S902). Upon receiving the notification, the surveillance camera system 60 extracts an image from the video recorded in the surveillance camera system 60 (S903), and transmits the extracted image together with the command data 67 shown in FIG. 51 to the face recognition server 80 (S904).

Here, the command data 67 includes a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "version" indicating the version of the application software, and a "device" indicating the position where the surveillance camera 61 recording the extracted image is installed. "Code", "device number" indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image, "year / month / day" / "hour / minute / second" indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded, and the amount of data of the extracted image. The "image data size" shown and the "image data" showing the extracted image as an encrypted file name are stored as data to be transmitted to the face recognition server 80.
By using the "year / month / day" / "hour / minute / second" indicating the recording date and time as the command data 67, the image can be taken out from the video recorded by the surveillance camera system 60 and used again for collation work and confirmation work. can do. Further, by using the "year / month / day" / "hour / minute / second" indicating the recording date and time as the command data 67, if there is the recorded data of the surveillance camera system 60, it is not always necessary to save the image in the face recognition server 80. Instead, only the data recorded by the surveillance camera system 60 needs to be saved, and the amount of data in the face recognition server 80 can be reduced.
Further, by encrypting the face image data 605, even if the image leaks, the image cannot be easily viewed, so that it becomes a deterrent effect against information leakage and a preventive measure against data interception.

Next, the face recognition server 80 recognizes a plurality of faces shown in the image based on the image and the command data 67 sent from the surveillance camera system 60, and determines the number of faces. The face recognition server 80 collates the image data for the number of the determined faces (S905), and transmits the results for the number of collated faces to the surveillance camera system 60 together with the images (S906). FIG. 52 shows an example of the collation result data 84 showing the collation result from the face authentication server 80.

The collation result data 84 includes a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "data size" indicating the amount of data in the collation result data 84, a "certification number" indicating the number of faces authenticated in the image, and an image. "Authentication No." indicating the value obtained by encoding the faces authenticated in order, "Authentication type" indicating the type of face authentication, and the coordinates of the face and the authenticated position shown in the image as shown in FIG. 57. The "face recognition area" indicating, the "verification rate" indicating the collation rate with the face image registered in the database of the face recognition server 80, and the date and time when the face image registered in the database of the face recognition server 80 was registered. The indicated "year / month / day" and "hour / minute / second" are stored as data to be transmitted to the surveillance camera system 60.

Then, the face recognition server 80 repeatedly collates the items from "authentication No." to "hour, minute, second" shown in FIG. 52 for the number of "authentication number", and the collation result is included in the image. The data 84 is transmitted to the surveillance camera system 60. By authenticating a plurality of faces from one image data in this way, even if Mr. Goto, who will be described later, visits the store in a group, it becomes possible to recognize it as a group from one of the people requiring attention MB. You can instantly recognize the group of Goto teachers. Therefore, it is possible to promptly notify the employee of the existence of the Goto group.
In addition, by providing an "authentication type" that indicates the type of face authentication, it is possible to classify people requiring attention MB, good customers, new customers, etc., reducing the time required for collation and sales data for individual players. It will be useful for the analysis of.

Further, by analyzing the collation rate with the face image data 605 registered in the database of the face authentication server 80, the "collation rate" can be used as an index of whether or not the person needs attention MB. .. The person in charge or the like operating the surveillance camera system 60 can perform the registration work in the database while being convinced that the person needs attention MB. Therefore, by determining a predetermined "collation rate" as a threshold value and registering the threshold value, it is possible to prevent mistaken registration as a person requiring attention MB. In addition, a method of collating faces by individually analyzing and comparing the feature points of "eyes", "nose", "mouth", and "ears", which are facial features, and the outline of the entire face and each A method of collating faces by comparing the positions of "eyes", "nose", "mouth", "ears", etc. can be considered. In this way, it is conceivable to make the collation rate more accurate.
The work of registering the person requiring attention MB in the database shows the case where a person judges, but if the "verification rate" is obtained at a predetermined value or more, the probability of being a person requiring attention MB is high. The work of registering the person requiring attention MB in the database may be automatically registered, and the work of the operator is reduced by performing the automation.

Next, if the person in charge or the like operating the surveillance camera system 60 judges from the result sent from the face recognition server 80 and confirms that the person needs attention MB (YES in S907), the face recognition An instruction for registration is given to the server 80 (S908), and data having the same contents as the command data 67 is registered in the face recognition server 80 (S909).
The data registered in the face recognition server 80 includes a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "version" indicating the software version, and a "position" indicating the position where the surveillance camera 61 recording the extracted image is installed. "Device code", "Device number" indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image, "Date" / "hour, minute, second" indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded, and the amount of data of the extracted image There is an "image data size" indicating "image data size" and face image data 605 in which the extracted image is encrypted.
Further, the person in charge or the like operating the surveillance camera system 60 is in a standby state until the notification of the visit of the person requiring attention MB is received without registering as the person requiring attention MB unless it is the person requiring attention MB (S907). NO).

Next, when the attention-requiring person MB is registered in the face recognition server 80, the surveillance camera system 60 acquires the position information of the surveillance camera 61 that last captured the attention-requiring person MB (S802). The surveillance camera system 60 selects the event code (“105”) and “suspicious person information” (S803), and sends the event code (“105”) to the management server 32, an image or video such as a face or appearance, and the surveillance camera 61. The position information is transmitted and the notification is performed (S804).
The management server 32 acquires the information of all the logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (S805), and acquires the position information of the SIP clients 36 and 37 from all the SIP clients 36 and 37. Request data (S806). Each of the SIP clients 36 and 37 measures the radio field strength (S807) and transmits the number of the access point connected to the radio field strength to the management server 32 (S808). The management server 32 calculates the positions and distances of the SIP clients 36 and 37 and the person requiring attention MB from the position information of the surveillance camera 61, the position of the person requiring attention MB, and the position information of the SIP client (S809). The management server 32 stores these information in the database of the DB server 25 (S810), displays them as alarm information in characters such as "suspicious person information" on all SIP clients 36 and 37, and transmits an image or a moving image (S811). ).

FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed by the SIP client 36 on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40.
The alarm information detail screens 3901 and 3910 represent a diagram showing a transition from the alarm information list screen 380 (FIG. 31) to the detail screen. Then, the alarm information detail screen 3901 (FIG. 53 (A)) that has transitioned to the detail screen is displayed first, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the alarm information detail screen 3910 (FIG. 53 (B)) is automatically switched to.
The alarm information detail screen 3901 is provided with a delivery date / time display 3902 indicating the time when the suspicious person information is delivered. In the center of the alarm information detail screen 3901, a face image display unit 3903 for displaying a face image or appearance captured by the face recognition server 80 or the surveillance camera system 60 is provided. Further, a switching button 3904 is provided so that it can be switched not only to an image but also to a moving image. The position number 3905 of the camera that captured the image is displayed on the upper part of the face image display unit 3903. Below the alarm information detail screen 3901, a SIP client 36 and a distance display unit 3906 for displaying the position where the surveillance camera system 60 last captured the person requiring attention MB or the distance from the camera position are provided.
The distance display unit 3906 expresses the distance by figures, characters, and colors. For example, if the color of the distance display unit 3906 is red, it represents a near state, and if it is blue, it represents a distant state. Also, if the diagonal line of the figure between the perspective and the display is close to either one, the perspective is expressed. The perspective distance may be expressed by the color of the square figure surrounded by the face image display unit 3903 described above. Further, the distance may be expressed numerically.

The alarm information detail screen 3910 expresses the layout of the game hall 1 and displays the position of the person requiring attention MB. The person requiring attention MB is displayed to be in the passage of 3 courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is expressed by MS. In addition, the position (CH3) of the camera that captured the person requiring attention MB is also expressed. The alarm information detail screen 3910 can recognize the state in which the sent image was captured by displaying the captured camera position (CH3), so that the employee MS can accurately grasp the situation. be able to.
With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while checking the image information such as the face and appearance of the person requiring attention MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Because it can be done, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person requiring attention MB. In addition, it is possible to call attention to an employee MS close to the person requiring attention MB by information such as the position and distance from the person requiring attention MB. In addition, since it is possible to notify by moving images, the trouble situation can be grasped more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
The layout may be displayed by performing two-way communication in real time to represent not only the stopped image but also the movement of the person requiring attention MB and the employee MS (client 36) in real time.

<Control to analyze and identify groups that cause fraud and human trouble>
A mode in which processing for analyzing and identifying a group that causes fraudulent acts or human troubles to be processed at the amusement park 1 and the chain store headquarters 500 is controlled will be described in detail.
49 to 50 and 54 to 66 show a control for identifying a Goto group by using a sequence diagram, a flowchart, a schematic diagram, an explanatory diagram, and the like. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when a person requiring attention visits the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart relating to a control process when the person requiring attention visits the store. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a control in which the face recognition server 80 collates a person in order to identify a person requiring attention. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of a playground system that identifies a Goto group. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of a group code creation process of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a group code creation process of a system for identifying a goto group. 57 and 58 are schematic views of captured images of the system identifying the Gotogroup. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server of the system for identifying the Goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying a Goto group. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data of the face authentication number 583 and the pseudo data. 63, 64, and 65 are explanatory views showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device 40. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the extraction process of the system for identifying the Goto group.

First, the control for identifying the Goto group will be described using a sequence diagram, a flowchart, a schematic diagram, an explanatory diagram, and the like for controlling the system for the amusement park to identify the Goto group.
In the game hall 1, it is determined whether the player M captured by the surveillance camera 61 is the person requiring attention MB, and when the player M visits the store (S1010), the above-mentioned person requiring attention notification processing (S1010) In S800) of FIGS. 48 and 49, the face image data 605 stored in the face recognition server 80 is collated to determine whether or not the person needs attention MB (S901 of FIGS. 48 and 50). When it is determined that the person requiring attention MB has visited the game hall 1 of store A (YES in S901 of FIGS. 48 and 50), the captured image shown in FIG. 57 used when the above-mentioned person requiring attention MB has visited the store. Suspicious data 584 is created as a number for managing the file of the face image data 606 of the person (MG2 to MG5) other than the face image data 605 of the person requiring attention MB from 600, and is saved for the number of people (S1012). In addition, this system waits until the person requiring attention MB visits the store (NO in S901 in FIGS. 48 and 50).

For example, in the amusement park 1 of store A, the file name of the face image data 606 of the suspected person (MG2 to MG5) caught mainly in the person requiring attention MB is the number "GID001 to GID004" of the suspected data 584. As shown in FIG. 58, in the amusement park 1 of the B store of another store, the suspicious data 584 is used as the file name of the face image data 606 of the suspected person (MG2, MG6 to MG8) mainly captured by the person requiring attention MB. Numbers (GID10001 to GID10004) are assigned. By creating the suspicious data 584, a person (MG, etc.) photographed together with the person requiring attention MB can be marked by assuming that he / she is a member of the Goto group. However, at this stage, it is recorded as a suspicious person rather than a person requiring attention.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 62, the store data 582 that distinguishes the stores, the face recognition number 583 as the file number for managing the face image data 605, the suspicious data 584 as the file number for managing the face image data 606, and Shooting date / time data 585 indicating the date and time when the face image data 605 was shot is created, and these data are transmitted to the face recognition server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 (S1013). In addition, it is preferable to accompany the transmitted data with data indicating the rental unit price of the game medium depending on the shooting location.
The date and time of the shooting date and time data 585 can be used for verification when an incident occurs, and can also be used to increase the credibility when collating the face image data 606. These prevent the customer M who accidentally appears as the person requiring attention MB from being mistakenly identified as the person requiring attention MB.
The data transmitted from many stores is stored in the face recognition server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 as shown in FIG. 62. In this way, by collecting the face image data 606 from many stores in a wide range, it becomes possible to collate in a wide range and with good accuracy.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the data collected from many stores is extracted by an extraction process (S1100) described later, and the data is extracted so as not to be misunderstood by the general public.
Using the face recognition number 583 as a key, the same face recognition number 583 is extracted, and it is collated whether or not the same person exists in the face image data 605 of the extracted suspicious data 584 (S1015). As shown in FIG. 60, the same FID001 is extracted from the transmitted FID001, and among the suspicious data 584 in the transmitted FID001, it is determined that the GID001 transmitted from the A store and the GID10001 person transmitted from the B store are the same. If so (YES in S1015), the group code 586 is created as G001 as the Goto group of FID001 as shown in FIGS. 59, 60 and 61 (S1016). At the same time, the suspicious data 584 is rewritten and a face recognition number 583, for example, FID002 is newly assigned as a person requiring attention MB (S1017). By rewriting the suspicious data 584 as the person requiring attention MB, it is possible not only to quickly grasp the person requiring attention MB but also to identify many MBs requiring attention.

Then, the group code 586 created as shown in FIG. 61 is numbered and stored in the face recognition server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 for each Goto group (S1018). As for the group code 586, for example, in G001, FID001, FID002, and FID056 are indicated as the face authentication number 583 as the file name recognized as the Goto group. Further, the face recognition server 580 stores not only the face recognition number 583 but also the face image data 605 and the shooting date / time data 585, which are the suspicious data 584 in FIG. 62, even when it is determined that they are not the same person (No in S1015). To do. This storage process makes it possible to store and analyze a large amount of data thereafter. The group code 586 not only makes it possible to recognize that the person requiring attention MB is forming a group and facilitates the management of the Goto group, but also when some kind of incident occurs or is likely to occur, etc. It is used for analysis such as search / extraction of face image data 605 and 606.

After that, the face recognition server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 distributes the face image data (605 or 606) indicated by the group code 586 and the face recognition number 583 to all the stores via the Internet line 588 (S1019). By collecting suspicious data 584, collating it, and distributing face image data 605 and 606 to other stores with face recognition number 583 as a management file, it is possible to quickly grasp the Goto group, which is insufficient in advance. It is possible to prepare for the situation.
The distributed group code 586 and face image data (605 or 606) having the file name as the face recognition number 583 are stored in the face recognition server 80 of each amusement park 1.

Then, as the above control of the amusement park system is repeatedly performed and the face image data (605 or 606) is accumulated, the accuracy of the analysis of the Goto group is improved, and many MBs of people requiring attention can be grasped. Become. Until now, people have comprehensively judged from individual images and images to determine the Goto group, but a large number of people are extracted from one image and determined from a large number of face image data (605 or 606). Therefore, it is possible to make a determination that the accuracy is improved as the number of mistakes is small and the amount of face image data (605 or 606) is large.
In addition, in this system, it is managed for each group code 584, but if the same person is found by periodically collating whether the same person exists beyond the group code 584, It is possible to unify the group code 584 into a large population. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp the Goto group in a chained manner, and it is possible to quickly grasp the visit of the Goto group from one MB who needs attention.
Furthermore, since the group code 584, face recognition number 583, and face image data 605 are distributed not only to the own store but also to other stores from the chain store headquarters 500, information between other stores can be quickly distributed over a wide range, and many Can call attention to the store.

Next, the extraction process (S1100) will be described with reference to FIGS. 59, 62 and 66. The extraction process (S1100) determines whether or not the same face recognition number 583 exists in the different data numbers as shown in FIG. 62. Then, this process is constantly repeated until the same face recognition number 583 is found (NO in S1101). When the same face recognition number 583 is found (YES in S1101), the suspicious data 584 in the data numbers shown in FIGS. 59 and 62 is extracted (S1103). For example, GID001, GID002, GID003, GID10001, GID10002, and GID1003 are extracted from the extracted suspicious data 584.

Next, among the data (S1103) extracted from the face recognition server 580 provided in the chain store headquarters 500, priority is given to the face recognition number 583 shown in the area where the game machine with a high rental unit price of the game medium is installed. This is a process of registering as data for discrimination (S1104).
For example, in the area where the pachinko machine P is installed, if the unit price of the rental ball is 4 yen, 1 yen and 0.5 yen, the pachinko machine P with a high rental unit price of the game medium is installed. Priority is given to extracting from the data captured by the camera that captures the area of 4 circles (YES in S1104). In the amusement park 1 of each store, data for distinguishing between high rate and low rate along with face recognition number 583, suspicious data 584 and shooting date and time data 585 from the face recognition server 80 in advance (for example, rental ball unit price 4 yen, 1 yen, rental medal The unit price is 20 yen and 5 yen), and the data is sent to the face recognition server 581 of the chain store headquarters 500.
With the above configuration, the Goto group often performs the Goto act aiming at a high-rate game machine, and it is possible to verify from the event that the damage amount due to the Goto act is large, and the Goto group can be quickly identified from a large amount of data. Not only will it be easier, but it will also be possible to deliver quickly to each store.

Next, it is determined by the store data 582 whether or not the extracted data (S1103) is the data taken at the same store (S1105). Here, if it is determined that the data was not taken at the same store (NO in S1105), it is unlikely that a general customer who was accidentally photographed is mistaken as a member of a person requiring attention, so the data is used for discrimination. Registration (S1113) ends. In the case of data from another store, it is less likely that a general person is mistaken as a member of a person requiring attention, as compared with the case of the same store, so the judgment is highly accurate.

Next, when it is determined that the data was taken at the same store (YES in S1105), it is determined from the shooting date / time data 585 whether the data was taken on the same day (S1107). Here, if it is determined that the data was not taken on the same day (NO in S1107), it is unlikely that a general customer who was accidentally photographed is mistaken as a member of a person requiring attention, so it is registered in the data for discrimination. (S1113) to finish. In the case of data taken on another day, it is less likely that a general person is mistaken for a member of a person requiring attention as compared with the case of the same day, so that the judgment is highly accurate.

Next, when it is determined that the data was taken on the same day (YES in S1107), it is determined whether the data has passed a predetermined time from the shooting date / time data 585 (S1109). Here, the predetermined time may be freely set from about 10 minutes to about 1 hour.
If it is determined that the data does not have passed the predetermined time (NO in S1109), the face image data 606 captured continuously may be mistakenly transmitted. Therefore, the face authentication is deleted from the discrimination data. Return to the collation of number 583 (S1115). By this processing, it is possible to eliminate the misidentification of a general person as a member of a person requiring attention by continuous shooting, and it is possible to accumulate highly accurate data.
Next, if it is determined that the data has passed the predetermined time (YES in S1109), there is a high possibility that the data requires the person requiring attention MB after the predetermined time has passed after entering the store. Since there is a high possibility that it is a member, it is registered as data for discrimination and terminated (S1113). With such control, it is possible to identify a member of the Goto group at the same store from the data obtained in a short period of time, so that processing can be performed quickly and determination can be made with high accuracy.

In addition, at the same store, the person requiring attention MB approaches the person MG other than the face image data 605 of the person requiring attention MB a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) after a predetermined time, for example, 10 minutes, and the face image data. When it is stored in 606, it may be managed by rewriting the suspicious data 584 to the person requiring attention M as the most suspicious person and attaching the group code 584 as the person requiring attention MB. By doing so, even if an ordinary person accidentally appears in the image of the person requiring attention MB, it can be quickly grasped at the same store without being mistaken as a Goto group on that day.

Next, FIGS. 63 to 65 show an example of notifying the employee MS of the Goto group when the above-mentioned person requiring attention MB visits the store.
63 or 64 shows a person requiring attention by the face image display unit 3903 in which the face image or appearance captured by the surveillance camera system 60 is displayed on the alarm information detail screen 3901 of the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 described above. It shows the Goto group of MB. The group code 584 and the face recognition number 583 are used to notify the employee MS of the Goto group and the person requiring attention MB.

FIG. 65 shows the alarm information detail screen 3910. The alarm information detail screen 3910 expresses the layout of the game hall 1 and displays the position of the person requiring attention MB. The person requiring attention MB is displayed to be in the passage of 3 courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is expressed by MS. In addition, the position (CH3) of the camera that captured the person requiring attention MB is also expressed. The alarm information detail screen 3910 can recognize the state in which the sent image was captured by displaying the captured camera position (CH3), so that the employee MS can accurately grasp the situation. be able to.

With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while checking the image information such as the face and appearance of the person requiring attention MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Because it can be done, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person requiring attention MB. In addition, it is possible to call attention to an employee MS close to the person requiring attention MB by information such as the position and distance from the person requiring attention MB. In addition, since it is possible to notify by moving images, the trouble situation can be grasped more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
In addition, since it is displayed that a group of people requiring attention MB gather at a specific place in the game hall 1, it is possible to predict in advance the danger that the Goto group will gather and cause some fraud. Furthermore, it is also possible to notify the employees MS that the Goto group is gathering by group call.

In particular, a person requiring attention MB with a group code 586 in an area where a gaming machine with a high rental unit price such as a pachinko machine P with a rental ball unit price of 4 yen or a slot machine SMA rental medal unit price of 20 yen is installed When another person MB with the same group code 586 stays and invades the same area with a high rental unit price, it is displayed on the monitor of the mobile terminal device 40, the hall computer 90, or the surveillance camera system 60. The employee MS may be notified. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent damage caused by the Goto group's goto action to the game machine installed in the area where the rental unit price is high. In particular, there is a high probability that goto acts will be performed in areas where game machines with high rental unit prices are installed, and the amount of damage will also be large, so notifications with this system will be cost-effective to prevent goto acts. The effect is high.
The display of the alarm information detail screen 3910 may represent the movement of the person requiring attention MB and the employee MS in real time as well as the still image by performing two-way communication in real time.

In addition, when the above-mentioned "illegal door open" occurs, the surveillance camera 61 mainly focuses on the person with the group code 586, and the above-mentioned processing of S800 / S1000 is used to visit the person requiring attention MB. The location and behavior of the door may be monitored, and employees may be alerted.

In this system, the game hall 1 of the chain store and the chain store headquarters 500 are separated from each other, but the system is not particularly limited, and the system is completed in one game hall 1 or the face recognition server 80. It may be a system that has been used.
In addition, this system may be used as a system for grasping the Goto Group nationwide in cooperation with a third party organization.

<Control of individual face recognition device in amusement park system>
A mode in which the individual face recognition device 800 used for fraud monitoring and sales in the amusement park 1 is controlled will be described in detail using the sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams and the like shown in FIGS. 74 to 93. To do.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the main process. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the recorded data capture process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face recognition verification process. FIG. 81 is a time chart of the recorded data captured image. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server verification process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the leaving seat process. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the abnormal processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the password registration process. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member is seated. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member is seated. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of the captured image instruction list 823. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a personal identification number is input. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view of the state of inputting the personal identification number as viewed from a plane. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face recognition engine mounted on the individual face recognition device 800. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer 90. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face authentication server 80.

<< Main processing >>
FIG. 74 shows a flowchart of the main process (S2000) of the individual face recognition device 800. When the player sits in front of the pachinko machine P, each camera 69 of the individual face recognition device 800 equipped with the face recognition engine captures the face of the person and determines whether or not the person is seated ( S2101), when it is detected that a person is seated (YES in S2101), the standby state is set and recording of video recording is started (S2102). Then, it is determined whether or not the membership card 550 has been inserted, and the process proceeds to membership processing (S2200). If it is determined that the membership card 550 is not inserted (NO in S2103), the process proceeds to non-membership processing (S2300). After that, the process shifts to the common process (S2400) regardless of which process has passed, and these processes (S2103 to S2104) are repeated until the person leaves the seat (shift from NO in S2104 to S2103). When leaving the seat by ejecting the membership card 550 or guest card 551 or when leaving the seat normally without having any balls, the seat leaving process described later is performed (S2500). The main process ends.

<< Membership processing >>
FIG. 75 shows a flowchart of the member process (S2200) of the individual face recognition device 800.
A password is stored in the IC chip 553 of the membership card 550 in order to ensure security such as theft, and the process starts when the password is entered and matched (YES in S2201). Further, this process waits until the password is input (NO in S2201).
Next, the process is started by inputting the password and matching (YES in S2201), and the process proceeds to the recorded data capture process described later (S2800). After the recorded data capture process (S2800) is performed, the individual face recognition device 800 generates face image data 559 from the captured captured image 600 (S2203), and the face image data 559 shown in FIG. 73 is captured data of the HDD 855. Store in region 865 (S2205). At the same time, the individual face recognition device 800 reads out the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and collates it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). If the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 match (YES in S2209), the individual face recognition device 800 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). , The face image data 559 is stored in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). In addition, the individual face recognition device 800 transmits the unit number to the face recognition server 80 (S2213) when the face recognition is successful, and ends the membership process.

In this way, by using the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550, it is possible to collate with the highly reliable and clear face image data 555 without accessing the face recognition server 80. , The processing speed can be increased, and the processing load of the face recognition server 80 can be lightened. In addition, for members who have less trouble in the game hall 1 and can confirm their contact information, etc., the monitoring level is set to 1, and by suppressing the monitoring by equipment and employees as much as possible, the burden on employees and the MB of important persons It becomes possible to focus on the monitoring of.
Further, in the individual face recognition device 800, when the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 do not match (NO in S2209), the stolen membership card 550 Since there is a suspicion of the above, or there is a possibility that the device is abnormal, the process shifts to the abnormal process (S3000), and the member process is terminated.

<< Recorded data capture processing >>
FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the recorded data capture process (S2800) of the individual face recognition device 800.
As shown in FIG. 88, the individual face recognition device 800 is provided with a monitoring level in consideration of security, and the timing of capturing the captured image 600 from the recorded data is different depending on the monitoring level. There is a capture image instruction list 823 as a list showing the instruction signal of this capture. The low surveillance level is set for highly reliable people such as members and good customers. On the contrary, the higher the monitoring level, the more the person requiring attention MB. By setting the monitoring level in this way, unnecessary storage is not required, and a large amount of data storage area is not required. Further, since the processing does not become complicated, the access to the face recognition server 80 is small, and the processing of the individual face recognition device 800 becomes quick. In terms of security, this system will be able to focus on and monitor the person requiring attention MB.

As shown in FIG. 81, the individual face authentication device 800 will receive the individual face authentication device 800 if a capture signal for capturing a face image is sent from the ball lending machine PT, the stand information display device K, or the hall computer 90 (S2801). The recorded data for a total of 3 seconds, 2 seconds after receiving the capture signal from the recorded data 1 second before stored in the recorded data area 863 of the HDD 855, is stored in the captured image extraction area 824, and the captured image extraction area 824. Still image data is extracted from the frame stored in (S2802). The individual face recognition device 800 extracts the captured image 600 in the best state for authentication from the still image (S2803). In particular, by retroactively collating one second ago, it is possible to capture the moment when one wants to reliably capture the face in a situation such as an abnormality of a game machine or an operation of a password. It is also possible to capture and select the clearest image in this frame. These are processed by incorporating software that instantly determines the front visibility and the degree of sharpness.
The individual face recognition device 800 determines whether the captured image 600 is a face facing the front (S2804), and if the captured image 600 is a face facing the front (YES in S2804), extracts the front view image. (S2805), if it is a profile (NO in S2804), the profile image is extracted (S2806), and the recorded data capture process (S2800) is terminated.

<< Face recognition verification processing >>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face recognition verification process. The face recognition verification process (S2600) first shifts to the above-mentioned recorded data capture process (S2800), extracts an image from the recorded data, and generates face image data 559 (S2601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is face image data 559 already stored by the individual face recognition device 800 (S2603). When the face image data 559 is not stored (NO in S2603), the individual face recognition device 800 is in the initial state of being seated in front of the game machine, so that the individual face recognition device 800 is collated with the face recognition server 80 and the person requiring attention MB. In order to determine whether or not this is the case and the monitoring level, the process shifts to the face recognition server verification process described later (S2900). Further, when the face image data 559 is stored (YES in S2603), the individual face recognition device 800 extracts the face image data 559 from the stored data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2605).

Then, it is determined whether or not the face image data 559 stored at each timing when the capture signal is output and the seated person are the same (S2606). If they are not the same person (NO in S2606), the process proceeds to the abnormal processing described later and ends (S3000). In this way, the monitoring can be performed in detail.
If they are the same person (YES in S2606), the individual face recognition device 800 outputs a discharge enable command to the ball lender PT (S2607) to enable the card to be ejected, and the card can be ejected. The state is displayed on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT and the LED display unit 812 (S2608). Further, the individual face recognition device 800 cancels the function of stopping various functions (supply operation, number of balls held, etc.) of the other ball lending machine PT (S2609), and transmits the collation result and the machine number to the face recognition server 80. It transmits and ends (S2613).

<< Face recognition server verification process >>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server verification process. The face authentication server verification process (S2900) is a process mainly for selecting the monitoring level of non-members by the face authentication server 80.
First, the individual face recognition device 800 stores the face image data 559 of the player M who is seated for the first time in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2901). The saved face image data 559 is transmitted to the face authentication server 80 together with the unit number (S2903). The face recognition server 80 first determines whether or not the person needs attention MB, which may interfere with sales, so that the face image data 605 of the person requiring attention MB is stored in the person requiring attention data area 87. The face image data 605 is collated with the transmitted face image data 559 (S2905). If the face authentication server 80 determines that the person needs attention MB (YES in S2905), the face ID (FID) is extracted (S2915) and set to the monitoring level 4 having the highest monitoring level (S2917).

Next, when the face recognition server 80 is not the person requiring attention MB (NO in S2905), the face recognition server 80 determines whether or not the customer is a good customer (S2907). If the customer is a good customer (YES in S2907), the face authentication number 583 (FID) is extracted (S2911) and set to the monitoring level 2 having a low monitoring level like the member (S2913). Next, the face recognition server 80 determines whether or not it is a new customer in the case of a general player M who is not good at it (NO in S2907) (S2909). If the customer is a new customer (YES in S2909), the face authentication number 583 is newly registered in the unit analysis data area 88 or the customer analysis data area 89 of the face authentication server 80 (S2910), and the monitoring level is moderately monitored. Set to level 3 (S2923). Further, the face recognition server 80 sets the monitoring level to a medium monitoring level 3 (S2923) when it is a general player M who is not a new customer (NO in S2909).
Then, the face recognition server 80 stores the extracted face recognition number 583 (FID) and the face image data 559 sent from the individual face recognition device 800 (S2925), and monitors the extracted face recognition number 583 (FID). The level is transmitted to the individual face recognition device 800 (S2927).

<< Non-member processing >>
76 and 77 show a flowchart of the non-member processing S2300.
In the non-member process, it is determined whether or not there is a monitoring level setting (S2301). In the first process, all the non-member player Ms who are seated do not have the monitoring level set (NO in S2301), so that the process shifts to the face recognition verification process described above (S2600).
Here, if the monitoring level is set (YES in S2301), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to each process according to the monitoring level (S2303).

The monitoring level 4 (4 of S2303) is a monitoring level for monitoring the person requiring attention MB. As one of the monitoring targets, the number of starts of the game machine is monitored. This shifts to the face authentication verification process (S2600) when the number of starts of the game machine reaches a predetermined number or more (YES in S2305), and confirms whether the person is the same person. By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 is effective for the goto that causes the magnetic sensor to malfunction due to the radio wave goto or the like, and the switch for determining the big hit to malfunction in a short time to induce the big hit. Therefore, by determining whether or not the people playing the game are the same by a predetermined number of times, even if the people are replaced by the group, it is possible to deal with the abnormal processing described later. It is intimidating to the person who does it.

Monitoring level 3 (3 of S2303), or when the number of starts of the game machine has not reached the predetermined number or more (NO of S2305), it is a monitoring level for monitoring the person requiring attention MB or the general player M. .. The number of difference balls is monitored as one of the monitoring targets. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number or more (YES in S2307), the process proceeds to the face recognition verification process (S2600), and it is confirmed whether the person is the same person. By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can determine how much the game machine in which the same person is playing is different, and acquires the game medium in a short period of time. It is also possible to monitor the goto behavior that would occur, and it can also be used as sales information for analysis of new units.
Next, when there are a predetermined number of balls (YES in S2309), the process proceeds to the face recognition verification process (S2600), and it is confirmed whether the person is the same person. By such a process, it is possible to determine how much ball the game machine in which the same person is playing has, and it is possible to acquire the game medium in a short period of time. It is also possible to monitor the behavior. It can also be used as sales information for analysis of new units. In particular, if the ball you have is the ball you got today, you can also analyze which game machine you are going through before you are currently playing.

Next, when the player M makes a big hit (YES in S2311), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can monitor the state in which the same person makes a big hit. Since the above-mentioned captured image 600 captures the recorded data from 1 second before receiving the jackpot signal, the image from before the jackpot state is stored together with the determination of whether or not the person is the same person, so that a goto action or the like occurs. In some cases, it can be confirmed later. It can also be used as sales information for analysis of new units.

Next, the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) when the player M is accompanied by the player M and the companion is allowed to play the game (YES in S2313), and is the same. Check if you are a person. By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the stolen guest card 551 from being used and can be prevented from being mischievous while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, when the player M inserts the guest card 551 into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2314), the process shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600), and it is determined whether the person is the same person or the first process. Confirm and store the face image data 559. By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and also registers a password, which will be described later, to prevent mischief during breaks, meals, and the like. be able to.

Next, when the player M puts money into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2315), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. .. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much money the same person has spent, and uses it for restricting the use of money and calling attention. At the same time, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.
Next, the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process when the player M throws the ball acquired in the counting unit 805 of the pachinko machine P to operate the counting unit 805 (YES in S2316). (S2600), and confirm that they are the same person. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much the same person has acquired, and uses it as business information for analysis of new units and the like. be able to. In addition, even if the counting unit 805 malfunctions and the ball is increased at one time, the criminal act or the person is caught, the face image data 559 is generated and saved, and the face image data 559 is used for later verification. Is possible.

Next, when the player M registers the password in the guest card 551 in the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2319), the process shifts to the face authentication verification process (S2600), and the same person is present. It is confirmed whether this is the first processing, and the face image data 559 is stored. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and also prevents mischief during breaks, meals, etc. by registering the password number described later. can do.
When the face recognition process is completed (S2600), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the password registration process (S2700), and the non-member processing is completed.

<< PIN registration process >>
FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of the password registration process (S2700).
The ball lending machine PT uses the individual face recognition device 800 to prevent theft and mischief while leaving the seat for breaks, meals, etc., so that not only the membership card 550 but also the guest card 551 has a PIN code. It has a lock function as a function that can register and stop the operation of the ball lending machine PT. In order to use the lock function, it is necessary to enter the password (S2701) and register the password in the ball lending machine PT (S2703). In addition, in order to prevent mischief that the password is forgotten or that the password is intentionally registered and notified, the unit number and the password are transmitted to the face recognition server 80 or the hall computer 90 and stored (S2705). ). By these processes, the individual face recognition device 800 can prepare for troubles later.
FIG. 93 shows an example of the password registration form 81 output when managing the password stored in the face authentication server 80 when the password is registered. The items saved by face recognition are face recognition number 583, membership card ID, password, and communication history. By outputting the PIN registration form 81, it is possible to quickly respond to a mischief that the PIN is forgotten or that the PIN is intentionally registered and notified.

<< Common processing >>
FIG. 78 shows a flowchart of a common process (S2400) common to members and non-members.
The individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) when an abnormality occurs in the game machine (YES in S2401), confirms whether the person is the same person, and if the person is not the same person, the abnormality process Can also be done. Further, even if the same person is used, the face image data 559 can be updated and recorded. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 can deal with troubles such as a game machine such as a goto, and can be confirmed later by an image.
Next, when the player M inputs the password (YES in S2403), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the stolen membership card 550 and guest card 551 from being used, and can prevent mischief during breaks, meals, and the like. ..
In particular, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the camera 69 is used until the password is input by the password input display unit 845 shown on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT and the enter button 843 is pressed. Since there are many scenes in which the face is viewed from the front and the time when the camera 69 is facing the front for a long time, capturing an image during this period is an opportunity to reliably capture the front view. In addition, by extracting the face image during this period, there is a high possibility that a clear image can be obtained, and there is also an effect of threatening theft. In particular, the capture process (S2800) can capture the image from 1 second before the password is input, so that the front view can be reliably captured.
Next, when the player M ejects the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 (YES in S2405), the individual face recognition device 800 shifts to the face recognition verification process (S2600) and confirms that they are the same person. To do. By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 from being stolen and can be prevented from being mischievous during breaks, meals, and the like.

<< Abandonment processing >>
FIG. 83 shows a flowchart of the leaving seat processing (S2500) when the player M leaves the seat.
First, it is determined whether or not the membership card 550 is being inserted into the membership card 550 (S2501). If the membership card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2501), the individual face recognition device 800 is away from the desk, so until the password is entered (NO in S2502), the membership card 550 is used for the ball lending machine PT. (S2513) and stop the ball lending function (S2515). By such processing, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 from being stolen and can be prevented from being mischievous during breaks, meals, and the like.
When the membership card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2501) and the password is input (YES in S2502), the individual face recognition device 800 discharges the membership card 550 (S2504), and the unit number and face recognition number 583. And the end signal is transmitted to the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is stored in the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face recognition device 800 can confirm the image or the like later for the trouble. In addition, since it is possible to confirm the change of people, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

Next, when there is a guest card 551 or the like and the lock function described above is activated (YES in S2503), prohibition of ejection of the membership card 550 to the ball lending machine PT (S2513) and the ball lending function Stop (S2515). By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and can be prevented from being mischievous while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, if the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a balance while leaving the seat (YES in S2505), the membership card 550 is prohibited from being discharged to the ball lending machine PT (S2513) and the ball lending function is used. Stop (S2515). By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and can be prevented from being mischievous while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, if the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a ball held while away from the seat (YES in S2507), the ball lending machine PT is prohibited from discharging the membership card 550 (S2513) and the ball lending function. Is stopped (S2515). By such a process, the individual face recognition device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and can be prevented from being mischievous while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.

In the case of non-members leaving their seats other than the above, the individual face recognition device 800 is in a state where there is no balance, balls, etc. in the ball lending machine PT. The number and the end signal are transmitted to the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is stored in the face recognition server 80 and the individual face recognition server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face recognition device 800 can confirm the image or the like later for the trouble. In addition, since it is possible to confirm the change of people, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

<< Abnormal handling >>
FIG. 84 shows a flowchart of an abnormality process (S3000), which is a process when an abnormality occurs in the control of the individual face recognition device 800.
The individual face recognition device 800 determines the type of abnormality described above (S3001), and when prohibiting the ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3003), the ball lending machine PT On the other hand, a card ejection prohibition command is output (S3005), and the ball lending machine PT cancels a card ejection signal such as a return button from the game machine (S3007). Further, in order to indicate that the ball lending machine PT prohibits the ejection of the card, the LED display unit 812 and the operation display unit 802 are displayed to prohibit the ejection of the card (S3009). An abnormality code for determining the unit number and the type of abnormality is transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S3011). The individual face recognition device 800 prohibits card ejection until the generated abnormality is processed and the card ejection prohibition is lifted (NO in S3013). The individual face recognition device 800 outputs a card ejection enable command to the ball lending machine PT (S3015) when the generated abnormality is processed and the prohibition of card ejection is lifted (YES in S3013), and the ball lending machine 800. The PT displays that the card can be ejected on the LED display unit 812 and the operation display unit 802 in order to indicate that the card can be ejected (S3017).

<Processing from sitting on the game machine to leaving the seat>
In the control of the individual face recognition device 800, the processing of data from sitting to leaving the seat on the gaming machine by the member will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 86.
When the individual face recognition device 800 detects that a person is seated by each camera 69 by motion detection, a human body sensor, or the like, the individual face recognition server 820 enters the standby state and starts recording. Then, if the password is input (YES in S2201), the process proceeds to the recorded data capture process (S2800), and the captured image 600 is saved. The individual face recognition server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured captured image 600 (S2203). The individual face recognition server 820 reads the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and collates it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). If the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 match (YES in S2209), the individual face recognition server 820 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). , The face image data 559 is stored in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the unit number, the member ID, and the start signal to the face authentication server 80 together with the success of the face authentication (S2213). The face authentication server 80 stores the transmitted member ID, unit number, collation result, and start time.

Next, the individual face recognition server 820 starts the termination process by pressing the return button 402 of the game machine or the end button of the ball lending machine, and the exit process (S2500) by inputting the password (S2502). Begins. If the leave processing is normally completed, the individual face recognition server 820 transmits the member ID, the unit number, and the end signal to the face recognition server 80 (S2213). The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, unit number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Processing from seating to leaving by non-members on a game machine>
In the control of the individual face recognition server 820, the non-member processes the data from sitting to leaving the game machine, and the processing of the individual face recognition server 820 and the face recognition server 80 will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 87. To do.
When the individual face recognition device 800 detects that a person is seated by the camera 69 with a motion detection, a human body sensor, or the like, the individual face recognition server 820 enters the standby state and starts recording. Then, since the monitoring level is not set at first, the face recognition verification process is performed to set the monitoring level (S2600), then the process shifts to the recorded data capture process (S2800), and the captured image 600 is saved. To do. The individual face recognition server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured captured image 600 (S2601), and stores the face image data 559 in the captured data area 865 (S2901). The individual face recognition server 820 transmits the machine number, the face image data 559, and the start signal to the face recognition server 80 (S2903).

The face recognition device server 80 collates the transmitted face image data 559 with a person requiring attention, a good customer, a new customer, or a general customer (S2905, S2097, S2909), and sets the monitoring level of the player M. (S2913, S2921, S2915). The face recognition device server 80 stores the machine number, face image data 559, and start time (S2925). The face recognition device server 80 transmits the face recognition number 583 and the monitoring level to the individual face recognition server 820.

Next, the individual face recognition server 820 starts the termination process by pressing the return button 402 of the game machine or the end button of the ball lending machine, and if it can be completed normally, the seat leaving process is started (S2500). The individual face recognition server 820 transmits the face recognition number, the unit number, and the end signal to the face recognition server 80. The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, unit number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Data saved in the hall computer by the above process>
FIG. 92 shows an example of the data stored in the hall computer 90 output as a form 99.
Shows member ID, face recognition number 583, machine number, game start time and end time, game data "big hit count, start count (S), number of balls, number of difference balls", used for new stand analysis and sales analysis can do.

Although the guest card 551 has been described in the present invention, it may be a coin type equipped with an IC chip or a mobile phone equipped with an IC chip as well as a card type.

<Control of end ball processing device in amusement park system>
A mode in which the end ball processing device 70 is controlled when performing end ball processing in the game hall 1 will be described in detail with reference to the sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams and the like shown in FIGS. 94 to 108. .. The end ball processing device 70 includes an end ball server 71 mainly installed in the chain store headquarters 500, a ball lending machine PT installed for each pachinko machine P in the amusement park 1, and a personal mobile terminal SM. It is composed of.

<< Registration processing of end balls by the end ball processing device in the amusement park system >>
The sequence diagram, flowchart, schematic diagram, explanatory diagram and the like shown in FIGS. 94 to 98 and 105 to 107 show the control of the end ball processing device 70 when the player M registers the end balls in the game hall 1. It will be described in detail with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 97.
FIG. 94 is a flowchart of an application end ball registration process for registering end balls by application software installed on the personal mobile terminal SM. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine registration process for registering the end balls by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the end ball server registration process for registering the end balls by the end ball server 71. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of a process for registering end balls. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram when registering the end ball. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the special code creation process when the special code 75 is created. 106 and 107 are explanatory views showing an example of data stored in the end ball server 71.

First, after the game is completed, the player M operates the end ball processing display unit 802h of the ball lending machine PT in order to register the remaining end balls (YES in S3221). At that time, the ball lending machine PT shifts to the special code creation process (S3350) and creates the special code 75. Next, the ball lending machine PT displays the address of the end ball server 71, the special code 75, the number of balls, the number, and the store code on the end ball processing display unit 802h, such as a QR code (registered trademark), which is difficult to identify at a glance. Display is performed on the information display unit 815 according to the embodiment (S3223). At the same time, the ball lending machine PT transmits data of the special code 75, the number of balls to be registered, the machine number, the store code, and the ball lending unit price to the end ball server 71 and the hall computer 90 (S3225).

Further, the player M who has started the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM selects the end ball registration process, and the ball lender PT reads the information displayed on the information display unit 815 of the end ball processing display unit 802h. When read from the camera 872 (S3203), the end ball server 71 is automatically accessed (S3205), and the personal mobile terminal SM transmits the application code 76, the special code 75, the store code, the unit number, and the number of balls (S3203). S3207).

When the personal mobile terminal SM or the ball lending machine PT gives a registration instruction, the end ball server 71 starts processing (YES in S3241), and the special code 75, the unit number, and the store from the ball lending machine PT. Data is received and stored for the code, the ball lending unit price, and the number of balls (S3243).
The end ball server 71 waits until data for collation is transmitted from the personal mobile terminal SM (NO in S3245). If the data for collation is transmitted from the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3245), the end ball server 71 has the special code 75, the unit number, the store code, and the number of balls sent from the ball lending machine PT. Is collated (S3247).

If the collation result is normal (YES in S3249), the end ball server 71 gives an instruction (S3251) for displaying (S3209) the number of balls to be registered in the personal mobile terminal SM and whether or not to register (S3211). ). The personal mobile terminal SM displays whether or not to register (S3211) (S3209), and when registering (YES in S3211), instructs the end ball server 71 to register (S3213). If there is a registration instruction from the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3257), the end ball server 71 stores the application code 76, the special code 75, the unit number, the store code, the ball lending unit price, and the number of balls (S3259). ). Then, the end ball server 71 normally notifies the personal mobile terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT (S3261).
On the other hand, if the collation result is abnormal (NO in S3249), the end ball server 71 notifies the personal mobile terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT of the abnormality (S3253), and a communication abnormality may be considered. Temporary registration is performed just in case, and the transmitted data is stored for a certain period of time (S3255).
In this way, since the number of balls to be registered is collated by the ball lending machine PT and the end ball server 71, even if the player M falsifies the data, the number of balls of the registered game medium does not match. No registration is made, and the game hall 1 can use the system with increased security.

The ball lending machine PT waits until a normal signal or an abnormal signal is notified from the end ball server 71 (NO in S3229 and NO in S3231), and if the end ball server 71 notifies the normal signal (YES in S3229). , End the process. Further, when the ball lending machine PT is notified of the abnormal signal from the end ball server 71 (YES in S3231), the ball lending machine PT saves the data in the hall computer 90 and ends the process (S3233). By storing the data in the hall computer 90 in this way, it is possible to prevent the data from being erased due to an abnormality in communication and to be effective for later collation, so that trouble with the player M can be avoided.
The personal mobile terminal SM ends this process (YES in S3215) when a normal notification is given from the end ball server 71 (YES in S3215), and returns to the process from the beginning when an abnormal notification is given (NO in S3215). ..
The player M accesses the end ball server 71 in advance and downloads the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM. At that time, when downloading or initial registration, the application code 76 that changes to the ID and the password required for accessing the end ball server 71 are registered. In particular, since the app code 76 can be used as a substitute for the ID without registering personal information such as the address, it is possible to register anonymously by registering a PIN to enhance security, and no troublesome operations are required. For the user, even a mobile phone without an IC chip can be easily registered.

Here, the above-mentioned special code creation process (S3350) will be described with reference to FIG. 150. The special code creation process (S3350) is equipped with a program to be created in the end ball server 71 or the ball lender PT, and when a special code creation instruction is given (S3351), the end ball server 71 or the ball lender PT Is a hexadecimal code created with random numbers (S3353). In addition, the end ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT also encodes the date (S3355). Further, a code that encodes a hexadecimal number created by a random number and a date is added and encoded (S3357). Then, the end ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT creates a special code 75 by these processes, stores it, and ends (S3359).
The special code 75 created in this way can be encrypted by using random numbers, and even if it is generated at the same time, the same code does not exist, and it is a highly secure code. The security is high by collating with 75 as a key. Further, by mixing the date data with the special code 75, it is not necessary to send the date data separately, and the processing becomes quick.

<< Processing to pay out end balls by the end ball processing device in the amusement park system >>
The control of the end ball processing device 70 when the player M pays out the end balls at the game hall 1 is controlled by using the sequence diagram, the flowchart, the schematic diagram, the explanatory view and the like shown in FIGS. The sequence diagram shown in FIG. 103 will be mainly described in detail. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the application end ball payout process when the end ball is paid out by the application software installed on the personal mobile terminal SM. 100 and 101 are flowcharts of the end ball server payout process by the end ball server 71. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine payout process by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of a process for paying out the end balls. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram when paying out the end balls. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when the end ball server 71 displayed on the personal mobile terminal SM is accessed.

First, the player M activates the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3271), and the personal mobile terminal SM inquires the end ball server 71 of the application code 76 and the password (S3273). If the end ball server 71 inquires about the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3291), it inquires the application code 76 and the password (S3293), and if the verification is successful (YES in S3295), the personal mobile terminal The SM successfully accesses the end ball server 71.
The end ball server 71 reads the data held from the application code 76 (S3297), and displays the number of stored balls held by the player M on the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM of the personal mobile terminal SM (S3299). ..
The player M operates the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM, selects a store, inputs the unit number, the ball unit price to be paid out, and the number of balls to be paid out, and the personal mobile terminal SM is the store code. , The unit number, the unit price of balls, and the number of balls to be paid out are transmitted to the end ball server 71 (S3277). The end ball server 71 waits until there is a payout instruction (NO in S3301), and if there is a payout instruction from the personal mobile terminal SM as described above (YES in S3301), the end ball server 71 has a store code and a stand. The number, the unit price of balls and the number of balls to be paid out are received (S3305), the number of balls to be paid out is compared with the number of stored balls in the terminal ball server 71 (S3307), and it is confirmed whether the number of balls can be paid out (S3309). If the number of balls that can be paid out is not available (NO in S3309), a confirmation instruction is given to the personal mobile terminal SM to confirm the number of balls to be paid out (S3311), and the player M is to be paid out. It is urged that there is an error in the setting of the ball unit price or the number of payout balls. In this way, by encouraging the player M to make a mistake, the game hall 1 can reduce troubles with the player M.

When the number of balls that can be paid out is the number of balls that can be paid out (YES in S3309), the end ball server 71 shifts to the special code creation process and creates a special code (S3350). The end ball server 71 transmits an access code, a special code 75, a ball unit price and the number of payout balls to the personal mobile terminal SM, and accesses the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price and the payout to the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM. An instruction is given to display information such as the number of balls on the information display unit 875 (S3315).
The personal mobile terminal SM receives the data of the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price and the number of payout balls from the end ball server 71 (S3281), and the information display unit 875 receives the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price, and the application. Information on the code 76 and the number of balls to be paid out is displayed in a display mode such as a QR code (registered trademark) that is difficult to identify at a glance (S2383). In this way, by using a display mode that is difficult to identify at a glance, it is possible to prevent the surrounding players from stealing and pretending to spoof and paying out the stored end balls.

The player M operates the end ball processing display unit 802h of the ball lending machine PT, and obtains information such as an access code, a special code 75, a ball unit price, an application code 76, and the number of payout balls displayed on the information display unit 875. As shown in 104, each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT is instructed to read (YES in S3331).
The ball lending machine PT prepares to read information from each camera 69 (S3333), reads (S3335), and waits until each camera 69 is successfully read (NO in S3337). If the reading of the stand camera 69 is successful (YES in S3337), the end ball server 71 is automatically accessed by the access code.
The ball lending machine PT transmits information on the special code 75, the ball unit price, the application code 76, and the number of payout balls read by each camera 69 to the end ball server 71. If the personal mobile terminal SM succeeds in reading the information of the information display unit 875 from each camera 69, the personal mobile terminal SM ends the process (YES in S3285).
In this way, by using the reading of each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT to send and receive information to and from the end ball server 71, the security of communication with other devices is enhanced, and the player M is the game machine. It is very convenient because you can process while sitting in front of. Further, since the personal mobile terminal SM can be used as long as it is a mobile phone having a camera for capturing information and a function for displaying information, it can be used even for a mobile phone without an IC chip.

The end ball server 71 waits until it receives information from the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3317), and when it receives the information (YES in S3317), the information of the ball lending machine PT is set from the personal mobile terminal SM. It is compared and collated with the provided information (S3319). As a result of collation, if the information matches (YES in S3321), the end ball server 71 approves the payout to the ball lending machine PT (S3323). The ball lending machine PT, which has been waiting until the payout approval is received (NO in S3341), pays out the balls (S3343) when the payout approval is received (YES in S3341), and notifies the end ball server 71 of the completion when the payout is completed. Is transmitted (S3345). The ball lending machine PT displays the number of balls paid out on the edge ball processing display unit 802h (S3347).
As a result of collation, if the information does not match (NO in S3321), the end ball server 71 notifies the ball lender PT of an abnormality (S3323), and the ball lender PT pays the player M. Prompt that there is an error in the setting of the ball unit price or the number of balls to be paid out, and end the process. In this way, by encouraging the player M to make a mistake, troubles with the player M can be reduced.
Further, by performing such collation (S3319), the number of balls to be paid out is collated by the ball lending machine PT and the end ball server 71, so that even if the player M falsifies the data, the data is paid out. Since the number of balls in the game medium does not match, the payout is not performed, and the game hall 1 can use the system with enhanced security.

After approving the payout to the ball lending machine PT (S3323), the end ball server 71 subtracts the number of balls paid out from the data of the end ball server 71 to update the data (S3325), and performs all processing. The completion is notified to the personal mobile terminal SM by e-mail (S3327).
The e-mail sent to the personal mobile terminal SM not only transmits information on the amount of storage, but also information on registration from the amusement park 1 and institutions that manage the stored balls, and information on various changes such as operations. May be announced.

The information from the ball lending machine PT is stored in the hall computer 90, and the ball lending machine PT processing (processing of S3225 to S3233 and S3339 to S3347) is performed by the hall computer 90 instead, and the end ball server 71. It is also possible to send and receive with and to process (S3225 to S3233, S3339 to S3347) and give an instruction to each ball lending machine PT.
By processing the hall computer 90 instead of the ball lending machine PT in this way, not only the transmission / reception to / from the end ball server 71 becomes faster, but also the security can be enhanced because it becomes independent from the operation of the player M.
In addition, as with the face image data 559 from the ball lending machine PT and the sales data of money, information such as the access code, special code 75, ball unit price, application code 76 and the number of balls to be paid out can be obtained from the stand computer 93 and the island computer 91. Is transmitted to the hall computer 90 via. By using the same data communication line in this way, there is no need to attach it later.

Next, an example of the data stored in the end ball server 71 of the end ball processing device 70 described above is shown in FIGS. 106 and 107.
FIG. 106 shows the end ball server list 72 as the data stored in the end ball server 71. The “application code” 76 indicates a unique number of the application software to be installed on the personal mobile terminal SM. The "PIN" is a number for approval when accessing the end ball server 71, and after accessing, inquires about the number of game media owned by the player M and the number of payouts to be paid out from the ball lending machine PT. Can be set. The "e-mail address" indicates the address of the personal mobile terminal SM of the player M, and is used to send a notification that the registration process and the withdrawal process have been completed, a notification that the expiration date or the arrival is imminent, and business information. To.
The "number of coins stored (1 yen)" is the number of coins converted at the loan unit price of 1 yen stored in the end ball server 71. The "update date and time" stores the last update date and time, and is the calculation of the expiration date. The "special code" stores the special code 75 at the time of the last processing. The "store code" stores the store number at the time of the last processing.

FIG. 106 shows an individual end ball server list 72 showing data for each application code 76 stored in the end ball server 71.
In the individual end ball server list 72, "date of birth" and "store visit history" are described in addition to the data displayed in the end ball server list 72. The store visit history stores the "year / month", "date / time", "number of balls deposited", "corner" indicating the rental unit price of the game medium, and "deadline" indicating the state of the deadline.
In this way, by setting the expiration date, the end ball server 71 can keep the accumulated amount of data constant. In addition, it can be used for management to notify the player M that the expiration date is near by e-mail or the like. A predetermined period can be set as the expiration date.

The end ball server 71 was provided outside the game hall 1 and connected to the ball lending machine PT using the Internet network E. However, the end ball server 71 was provided inside the game hall 1 and connected by the switching hub 7. It may be a small one to use.
Although the case of storing the end balls has been described in this embodiment, the system can also be applied to a ball storage system in which the amount of storage is increased and the balls acquired by the player M are stored.
In addition, installation of the application software itself of the personal mobile terminal SM, registration to the end ball server 71, registration of the number of end balls, and the above-mentioned series of operations on the personal mobile terminal SM are performed by the ball lending machine PT on each unit. , The display with the QR code (registered trademark) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the ball lending machine or the stand information display device K installed in the game hall 1 is read and photographed by the camera 872, and the personal mobile terminal SM The registration of the application software and the above-mentioned payout operation may be automatically performed. With the above configuration, even when the operation of the personal mobile terminal SM is complicated, anyone can easily perform the operation of registering and paying out the stored balls. Further, a sticker or the like with a QR code (registered trademark) may be read and photographed by the camera 872, and the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM may automatically operate the registration and payout operations.

<Sales analysis system using individual face recognition device>
The contents of the analysis of the data obtained under the control of the individual face recognition device 800 and the hall computer 90 at the amusement park 1 will be described in detail using the cheats and forms shown in FIGS. 109 to 113.
FIG. 109 is a ball output chart 650 showing the transition of the difference balls of the game machine P and the balls held by each individual. FIG. 110 is an individual income and expenditure form 655 of an individual using the individual face recognition device 800. FIG. 111 is a game machine-specific analysis form 660 of the game machine P aggregated for each individual using the individual face recognition device 800. FIG. 112 is a correction value form 680 for each balance using the individual face recognition device 800. FIG. 113 is an analysis form 670 for each game machine of the game machine, which is aggregated for each individual using the individual face recognition device 800 and analyzed based on the correction value.

First, the ball ejection chart 650 shown in FIG. 109 shows the difference ball of the pachinko machine P in the 503 series by the ball ejection slump graph 651 represented by the line graph. The difference ball shows the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of out balls, and when it is released to the player M, it shows the value obtained by subtracting the number of out balls from the number of safe balls (difference ball = safe). Number of balls-Number of out balls). Therefore, for the player M, if the number of balls acquired is larger than the number of balls used, it is represented as a plus. The payout chart 650 shows the figure displayed on the stand information display device K, but it may be displayed on the monitor or the form of the hall computer 90, and in that case, the plus or minus of the difference ball display is reversed. It may be displayed in.

In addition, the broken line on the vertical axis shown in the drawing indicates the boundary where people are replaced. In consideration of the protection of personal information, it is represented by a face recognition number 583 (FID006, FID007, FID005, FID004, FID003) and an individual mascot (654a to e). The individual mascot 654 may be arbitrarily determined, and may be automatically determined by the stand information display device K or the individual face recognition device 80 and displayed in consideration of personal information. The individual mascot 654 may represent gender and age by changing the background color, mascot, etc., and by displaying whether it is popular with men or women, it will be possible to replace the table in the future. It can also be used as an index.

A positive balance chart 652 derived from the horizontal dotted line of points A to D is shown. The positive balance chart 652 starts from the state of 0 from point A, enters the negative range until there is a big hit, etc., point B represents the minimum number of balls held, and point C is The maximum number of balls held is shown, and the point D shows the state of the balls held at the end. The positive balance chart 652 shows that the individual of FID006, FID005 and FID004 is represented by a white bar graph and the balance is positive.
Further, a negative balance chart 653 derived from the horizontal dotted line of points E to H is shown. The negative balance chart 653 starts from the state of points E to 0, and shows the maximum number of big hit balls at point F. In addition, although the number of balls used is large and the number of balls used is in the minus range due to a big hit, etc., the point G represents the minimum number of balls held, and the point H is the number of balls held at the end. Although it shows the state, the number of balls used is more negative. The negative balance chart 653 shows that the individual of FID007 and FID003 is represented by a hatched black bar graph and the balance is negative.

With the above configuration, it is possible to confirm at a glance whether the balance is negative or positive as a result of each game, so that the player M and the game hall 1 can immediately determine the state of the game machine. In addition, since individual results can be confirmed while considering the protection of personal information, it can be used as an index for the player M to play with peace of mind.
Further, FIG. 110 shows an example of an individual income and expenditure form 655 in which the hall computer 90 aggregates individual information. The personal balance form 655 shows the time zone in which the player M played, the machine number of the game machine, and the balance.

Next, FIG. 111 shows an analysis form 660 for each gaming machine. The analysis form 660 for each game machine is provided with a daily column in the vertical column of the upper column, and the horizontal column is arranged for each player M represented by the face authentication number 583. In addition, information is displayed in each column for each player M and for each day.
As for the information, for example, the player M whose face recognition number 583 is represented by FID004 shows a positive balance "+" in the balance result column 662 in the 503 series on May 6, and the correction value column 661. Since there is no previous data in, "1" is shown. On May 7, the balance result column 662 shows a negative balance "Δ", and the correction value column 661 shows "0.8" because the previous day was a positive balance. Player M of FID004 enjoyed the game, but since the previous time was a positive balance, the influence of the balance is large, so the points are reduced by 0.2 points and given. On the contrary, since the balance result column 662 on May 7 has a negative balance "Δ", the correction value column 661 on May 8 shows "1.2". In this way, the previous time was a negative balance, and by playing while having an impression that it is not good as a balance, this pachinko machine P is considered to be an interesting game machine, so add 0.2 points to the points. It is possible to confirm the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the balance of payments. Therefore, it is possible to evaluate the game machine by these indexes, and it can be used as an index of the timing of replacing the new machine or disposing of the existing game machine to the used machine.

In particular, the player M of FID007 is playing the pachinko machine P in the 503 series even if the negative balance continues, and recognizes that it is more interesting than the other players M, so the point is "5.8". It is expensive. In this way, not only the player M but also the game hall 1 can grasp that the game machine is interesting, so that the player M can play as an interesting game machine while obtaining sufficient profit. Therefore, it can be used as an index of how much profit can be returned to the player.

Next, as another example of the analysis method, the analysis form 670 for each game machine is shown in FIG. 113, and the correction value form 680, which is a list of correction values when calculating the analysis form 670 for each game machine, is shown in FIG. 112.
The correction value form 680 has different points to be given according to the balance of the number of balls acquired or used. In the case of a positive balance, the points to be given are described in the positive balance correction value column 681, "0.97" is given from 0 to +2500, and "0.94" is given from +250 to +5000. , +5001 to +7500 are given "0.91", +7501 to +10000 are given "0.88", and +15000 or more are given "0.80" and points subtracted from 1.
In the case of a negative balance, the points to be given are described in the negative balance correction value column 682, "1.03" is given from 0 to -2500, and "1.06" is given from -2501 to -5000. Is given, "1.09" is given to -5001 to -7500, "1.12" is given to -7501 to -10000, and "1.12" is given to -10001 to -15000. However, points of -15000 or less are given by adding "1.20" to 1.
By setting correction values in a plurality of stages and giving points in this way, detailed analysis becomes possible, and individual tastes can be analyzed in more detail. In addition, by adding the above-mentioned trends by gender and age to this information, it can be used as an index for the timing of replacing new machines and disposing of existing game machines to used machines, as well as the area of the store. Sexual tendencies can also be analyzed.

Next, FIG. 113 shows an analysis form 670 for each game machine using this correction value form 680. The analysis form 670 for each game machine is provided with a daily column in the vertical column of the upper column, and the horizontal column is arranged for each player M represented by the face authentication number 583. In addition, information is displayed in each column for each player M and for each day.
As for the information, for example, the player M whose face recognition number 583 is represented by FID004 shows the number of balls of "+3300" which is a plus balance in the balance result column 671 in the 503 series on May 6, and is corrected. Since there is no previous data in the value column 662, "1" is shown. On May 7, the balance result column 671 shows the number of balls of "-6110" which is a minus balance, and the correction value column 672 shows "0" because the day before the previous time was a plus balance of "+3300". .94 "is shown. Player M of FID004 enjoyed the game, but the previous time was a positive balance. Since the balance shows a large influence, the player M reduced by 0.06 points from 1 to give "0.94" points. On the contrary, since the balance result column 662 on May 7 has a negative balance "-6110", the correction value column 672 on May 8 adds 0.09 points to 1 and "1". .09 ”is shown.

In this way, by playing while having the impression that the previous time was a negative balance and the balance is not very good, this pachinko machine P is considered to be an interesting game machine, so 0.09 points are added and given. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the balance. Therefore, it is possible to evaluate the game machine by these indexes, and it can be used as an index of the timing of replacing the new machine or disposing of the existing game machine to the used machine. In addition, as for the correction value, if the positive balance is large, the influence of the balance becomes large. Therefore, by reducing the points, the influence of the balance can be taken into consideration to evaluate the interest of the pachinko machine itself. On the contrary, if the negative balance is large, the game machine is being played even if it is affected by the negative balance, and it can be understood that the game machine is an interesting game machine. Therefore, by adding the number of points according to the number of balls in the negative balance or the positive balance and giving points, the tendency of the interest of the game machine becomes clearer.

Further, as shown in the analysis form 670 for each gaming machine in FIG. 113, it is possible to grasp the total number of players M who have played the 503-series pachinko machine P for a certain period and the total number of times per person per day. You can also grasp the total number of players and the number of games played. Although these are described on a daily basis, it is possible to analyze how many times an individual has played in a day from the individual income and expenditure form shown in FIG. 110. Therefore, it is possible to analyze the gaming machine by using such a correction value even in a short period or a long period.
Although the correction value is given as a point, it may be expressed as the number of times. Further, the correction value represents reduction or addition in the range of "0.2", but this range is not limited and may be a correction value in a range in which the interest of the game machine can be analyzed. In addition, points may be given by using other game machine related information, not limited to the number of times, and the correction value may be not limited to the balance, but other game machine related information such as the number of starts may be used. good.

<Control of intruder monitoring system>
The mode in which control is performed when detecting and notifying an intruder in the game hall 1 will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams and the like shown in FIGS. 114 to 132.
The intruder monitoring system is a system that monitors intruders at times other than business hours, and is often used especially at night. It consists of a system that selects and controls. Further, the night monitoring system 860, which will be described later, is a system that monitors the opening and closing of the game machine by the battery BA at a time other than business hours, especially at night, in consideration of energy saving. The typical systems will be described below.

<< Control of intruder monitoring system by surveillance camera >>
First, the mode in which the surveillance camera system 60 controls when detecting an intruder in the amusement park 1 will be described in detail with reference to the schematic views or explanatory views shown in FIGS. 114 to 118.
FIG. 114 is a schematic layout diagram of the surveillance cameras 61 in operation in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 1115 is an arrangement schematic view of the surveillance camera 61 in which the intrusion monitoring system is operating in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of imaging positions 881 showing positions imaged by the surveillance camera 61 in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 117 is a schematic view showing a state of the monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 118 is a schematic view showing a recording area 883 of the recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system.
The surveillance camera system 60 is provided with surveillance cameras 61 (A to Q) above the position of the passage in the game area 3 of the game hall 1, and each of them is as shown in FIG. 114 during business hours when there are players. The surveillance cameras 61 (A to Q) constantly capture images of equipment such as the player M playing the game or the counter JC, and record the images. The employee checks the images captured by the surveillance cameras 61 (A to Q) on the monitor 882 shown in FIG. 117 (A) connected to the camera surveillance system 60 in the management area 2 (FIG. 1). It monitors whether there are any human troubles or troubles in equipment such as safes (GB1 and GB2) including gaming machines.

Next, control for monitoring an intruder at night, especially after the player M disappears except during business hours, will be described.
After the player M disappears, the surveillance camera system 60 is an entrance / exit (EX1 to EX5) or a safe (GB1 and) which is an entrance / exit to the game hall 1 which is considered to be an intrusion passage for photographing the intruder MF. The setting position of the surveillance camera 61 (A to J and P and Q) is switched to image the place where the hardware of GB2) and the reception counter UK is stored. In addition, the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) in the game area 3 are in the power saving mode, stop imaging and recording, and are working to save energy.

FIG. 116 shows a list of imaging positions 881 showing changes in the positions of the surveillance cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q) to periodically image images so that the intrusion points are not overlooked and there are no blind spots. There is. The positions imaged by the surveillance cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q) are different from those a and b in FIG. 116. For example, the surveillance cameras 61A and P first image the store entrance / exit EX2, and after a predetermined time of about 10 minutes, image the store entrance / exit EX3. Then, in a and b of FIG. 116, all the imaging positions are designated so that there is no leakage at the position to be captured. By switching the surveillance cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q), the surveillance camera system 60 can change the imaging angle of the designated imaging position to capture and record, so that the surveillance camera system 60 can capture images without blind spots. Can be recorded. In addition, since it can be changed according to the object to be imaged during business and non-business, it is possible to change the position to be imaged by one surveillance camera 61 in various ways.
The surveillance camera 61 may have a structure provided with a drive mechanism for driving a lens such as pan / tilt or zoom, or may be a system in which a wide-angle lens captures a wide image and the surveillance camera 61 is monitored by image processing.

117 and 118 show processing when the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) are set to the power saving mode.
FIG. 117 shows a monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60. FIG. 117 (A) shows the display of the monitor 882 shown during business hours, and the images captured by the nine surveillance cameras 61 (A to C, F to H and K to L) are displayed in nine divisions. (A1 to A9). In FIG. 117 (B), when the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) are in the power saving mode, the images captured by the six surveillance cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) are displayed in six divisions. (A1 to A3 and A7 to A9). In FIG. 117 (B), since the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) are in the power saving mode, the monitor 882 is monitoring the display area (A4 to A6) of the surveillance cameras 61 (KO). It seems that the cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) were assigned (A1 to A3 and A7 to A9). Therefore, the display area of the monitor 882 is enlarged and displayed, making it easy to see the details. Further, in another example, the display area (A1 to A9) can be divided into 9 as it is, and other surveillance cameras 61 (CE) can be interrupted and displayed, and can be displayed at once. The number of surveillance cameras 61 can be increased.

FIG. 118 (A) shows the recording area 883 of the recording device provided in the surveillance camera system 60, and the recording area 884 records the image captured by the surveillance camera 61A. The recording area 885 records an image captured by the surveillance camera 61K. The recording area 886 records an image captured by the surveillance camera 61F.
In FIG. 118 (B), when the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) are in the power saving mode, the recording area 883 is allocated to the other operating surveillance cameras 61 (A to C and F to H). It is a state. The recording areas 887 and 889 are areas in which the images captured by the surveillance cameras 61A and 61F are recorded, but the recording capacity is expanded. Therefore, by allocating the capacity of the surveillance cameras 61 (KO) in the standby state, the recording capacity can be expanded and a sufficiently corresponding recording capacity can be secured in preparation for an intruder. Further, in another example, by allocating the recording area 883 to the other surveillance cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) as they are, the recording capacity per surveillance camera 61 is expanded and the recording capacity is insufficient. It can be resolved and monitored by the surveillance camera 61 even when there are no employees. Further, even if the recording is to be confirmed later, the recording capacity is not wasted, so that the recorded data can be stored for a long period of time by making the best use of the recording capacity.
It is also possible to appropriately select and use not only the surveillance camera 61 but also each camera 69.

<< Control of intruder monitoring system by each camera >>
Next, the flowcharts, schematic views, explanatory views, etc. shown in FIGS. 119 to 125 and 128 show how the surveillance camera system 60 and each camera 69 control when detecting an intruder in the amusement park 1. Will be described in detail using.
FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and equipment. FIG. 120 shows a transition diagram of a control mode in an intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of playback mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic view showing the transition of the focal position of each camera 69 in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 128 is a schematic view showing a state in which a recorded image is projected on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system.

FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and equipment. The power line 863 for the pachinko machine P and the stand information display device K and the power line 865 for the ball lending machine PT are provided separately. At the end of the island facility HS, a power distribution facility DT for switching ON / OFF of each power line (863, 865) is provided. The power distribution equipment DT is provided with a switchboard DL1 and a switchboard DL2 for each supply target, and supplies AC100V to each device. The AC100V supplied from the power supply line 863 connected to the switchboard DL1 is transformed by the transformer TR, and the transformed AC24V is supplied to the pachinko machine P and the stand information display device K. Further, AC100V supplied from the power supply line 865 connected to the switchboard DL1 is supplied to the ball lending machine PT provided with each camera 69.

By separately providing the switchboard DL1 and the switchboard DL2, power can be supplied only to the ball lending machine PT used as a surveillance camera in the night monitoring mode, and a power line that is not necessary for the night monitoring mode such as the pachinko machine P can be provided. Energy saving can be realized by setting the OFF line.
In addition, the switchboard DL1 provided on the island edge is provided with one on / off switch for each gaming machine such as the pachinko machine P, so that the switch can be switched independently when a new machine is replaced, when a failure occurs, during an inspection, or at an event. It is more convenient because it can be turned on and off.

As shown in the flow chart of the state of FIG. 120, the surveillance camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT equipped with each camera 69 has the above-mentioned normal business mode S2000 (processing of the individual face recognition device 800) and the night monitoring mode. The processing is switched between S3370 and the reproduction mode S3380, and it is possible to select or automatically switch according to the target to be monitored as appropriate and according to the reproduction processing.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 and 128, when the process shifts to the night monitoring mode, the night monitoring mode process S3370 is executed. First, the standby state is set, and as shown in FIG. 124, the cameras 69 at both ends of the island equipment HS are operated among the surveillance cameras 69, and the other cameras 69 are put into the standby state (S3371). By operating only the cameras 69 at both ends of the island facility HS, it is possible to detect the intruder MF while accurately and energy saving the invasion passage to the game area 3.
As shown in FIG. 123 (A), in the open mode (S2000), the focal position 892 of each camera 69 images the vicinity of the center of the chair C on which the player is sitting, that is, the face of the player M. ing. However, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), when shifting to the night monitoring mode processing, at least each camera 69 at both ends of the island facility HS is switched to the focal position 893 of each camera 69 to the center side of the passage (S3372). .. At that time, the focus is switched, which is not in business, such as changing the lens to a wide angle or switching the viewpoint to a wide angle in order to capture a wide range of objects to be captured, and the intruder MF shifts to a state where it can be imaged as much as possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124, each camera 69 of the ball lending machines (PT1, PT2, PT3 and PT4) installed at both ends of the island facility HS does not image or record until the intruder MF appears. The motion detection mode is set to (S3373). In the motion detection mode, this state is maintained until a moving object such as an intruder MF is imaged by each camera (NO in S3374).
If a moving object such as an intruder MF is imaged by each camera (YES in S3374), the mode shifts to the recording mode (S3375). In the recording mode, not only the cameras 69 of the ball lenders PT1 and PT2 in the passage that detected the moving object, but also the cameras 69 of all the units and the cameras 69 of all the units in the passage that detected the moving object. You may shift to the state of imaging and recording. Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT5 installed in the pachinko machine P opened and closed, and a ball installed on the opposite side of the opened and closed pachinko machine P. Several rental machines PT6, PT7, and PT8 are imaged and recorded. This is to make it possible to accurately capture the intruder MF while minimizing the number of each camera 69.

Then, if there is a motion detection such as an intruder MF, the night flag is set (S3376) and the process ends. After the end, if the mode is switched, the mode shifts to the reproduction mode and the reproduction mode processing is executed (S3380).
The reproduction mode process S3380 determines whether or not the surveillance camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT has a night flag (S3381). If there is no night flag (NO in S3381), the reproduction mode process S3380 ends. When there is a night flag (YES in S3381), the surveillance camera system 60 including the ball lender PT transmits the recorded information captured to the table information display device K as shown in FIG. 128 described later (S3383). As shown in FIG. 128, on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device K, the appearance of the intruder MF invading the passage between the island facilities HS and approaching the pachinko machine is reproduced based on the received recorded information ( S3384).
In this way, the state captured by each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT is reproduced by the table information display device K provided in the vicinity of each camera 69 installed in the passage where the intruder MF has entered. Therefore, the image to be reproduced differs depending on the position of each of the captured cameras 69, and it is possible to analyze what happened at night while reproducing it as if it were being viewed on the spot. Further, by using a large liquid crystal monitor or the like on the liquid crystal display screen 891, the state can be confirmed at a glance. Further, in the reproduction between these stand information display devices K, the state of the site can be reproduced as it is by reproducing in the same synchronization, and the state can be confirmed at a glance.

<< Control of the system that detects the opening and closing of the game machine at night using the battery >>
Next, a mode in which control is performed when the opening / closing of the game machine is detected by the night monitoring system 860 using the battery BA will be described in detail using the flowcharts, schematic views, explanatory views, etc. shown in FIGS. 126 to 132. To do.
FIG. 126 is a flowchart of night monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and an island facility HS. FIG. 128 is a schematic view showing a state in which a recorded image is projected on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a configuration diagram of the night monitoring system 860 in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the night monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 126 is a time chart relating to the recording of each camera 69 of the night monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power supply abnormality processing in the intrusion monitoring system.
First, the configuration of the night monitoring system 860 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 129. The night monitoring system 860 uses the battery BA as an energy saving system to detect whether or not a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P has been illegally opened or closed, especially at night when not in business.
The ball lending machine PT on which each camera 69 is installed is supplied with AC100V and operates as described above during normal business hours, but each camera 69 is DC5V from the power supply unit built in the ball lending machine PT. Alternatively, DC12V is supplied and driven.

When the night monitoring system 860 is in operation, the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko machine P are stopped from supplying AC100V from the above-mentioned power distribution facility DT (FIG. 119). Therefore, power is not supplied to each camera 69 due to energy saving.
However, in the night monitoring system 860, DC12V or DC5V is supplied from the battery BA in order to detect whether or not the gaming machine such as the pachinko machine P has been opened and closed illegally. In particular, as shown in FIG. 127, two night monitoring devices 868 equipped with a battery BA are provided in the island facility HS. This is because, as described above, in order to monitor the passage between the island facilities HS, one battery BA powers each monitoring camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT facing the island power supply wiring 877 through the ceiling. Is being supplied. The night monitoring device 868 is configured by using a group of cameras 69 facing each other as one system.

As shown in FIG. 129, the night monitoring system 860 includes a night monitoring device 868, a pachinko machine P which is a game machine, a ball lending machine PT equipped with each camera 69, and a night opening / closing sensor 864.
As described above, during normal business hours, AC100V is supplied from the switchboard DL1 and transformed to AC24V by the transformer TR, and power is supplied to the pachinko machine P, which is a gaming machine. Further, the power of AC100V is supplied from the switchboard DL2 to the ball lending machine PT.

In the night monitoring device 868, AC100V is supplied from the switchboard DL1 during normal business hours, AC100V is converted to DC12V or 5V by the AC-DC converter 870, and the battery BA is charged by the charging circuit 871. The charging circuit 871 has a diode for preventing backflow and a circuit for preventing overcharging and overdischarging, and always charges and discharges according to the capacity and voltage of the battery BA. The nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 connected to the battery BA is stopped during normal business hours, that is, during the detection of the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870, and if the supply of AC100V is stopped at nighttime or the like, It is operated by the power supply supplied from the battery BA.

While the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is in operation, the nighttime open / close sensor 864 detects whether or not the pachinko machine P is open / closed. The nighttime open / close sensor 864 uses a switching contact, and the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 energizes the DC power supply of the battery BA from the sensor terminal board 879. When the nighttime open / close sensor 864 is activated, the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is connected to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P provided with the energized nighttime open / close sensor 864. The DC power supply of the battery BA is directly supplied from the terminal board 875 via the battery wiring 877. Further, each camera 69 records the data captured on the SD card or HDD (855 in FIG. 68).

Next, the control of the night monitoring system 860 will be described. It will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132 based on the night monitoring mode 2 process (S3390) shown in FIG. 126.
The night monitoring system 860 does not operate while detecting the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 that converts the power supplied from the switchboard DL2 as described above (NO in S3391). When the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 drops, for example, it is determined whether it is less than DC5V, and when the night monitoring control circuit 873 determines that the power supply line is OFF ((YES in S3391)). The program of the night monitoring control circuit 873 starts the night monitoring control (S3392). The night monitoring control circuit 873 detects the opening / closing of the pachinko machine P until the signal from the above-mentioned night opening / closing sensor 864 is sent. Wait until it is done (NO in S3393).

The night monitoring control circuit 873 is provided at night when the signal from the above-mentioned night opening / closing sensor 864 is sent, that is, when the intruder MF illegally opens the door of the pachinko machine P and is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko machine P. When the opening / closing sensor 864 detects (YES in S3393), the night monitoring control circuit 873 stores the machine number and the first flag of the pachinko machine P in which the opening / closing sensor 864 detects the door opening (S3394). .. Then, the night monitoring control circuit 873 is connected to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P provided with the energized night opening / closing sensor 864 from the camera terminal board 875 to the DC of the battery BA. Power is supplied directly via the battery wiring 877 (S3395). Each camera 69 records the captured data. By using the battery BA, the electricity stored in the daytime can be effectively used, so that energy saving can be achieved. As described above, each camera 69 switches the focal position 893 to the center of the passage to take an image. In addition, each camera 69 may switch the position and take an image so as to automatically track the intruder MF.

After that, the timer of the night monitoring control circuit 873 is activated (SS3396), and after a predetermined time, for example, about 5 seconds (YES in S3397), the night monitoring control circuit 873 is used for all the units facing the passage as shown in FIG. The DC power supply of the battery BA is directly supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to each camera 69 via the battery wiring 877 (S3398). This is to secure the time for recording the first flag without malfunction by operating the timer. By ensuring that the first flag is set in this way, it is possible to distinguish and recognize which game machine was opened / closed at night during an inspection such as in the morning, as will be described later.
Then, the controller 834 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69 records the captured day, and at the same time, determines that the power supply line is different from the normal time and stores the night flag as ON (S3399).

FIG. 131 shows a time chart regarding recording of each camera 69 of the night monitoring system 860.
When the AC100V power line 865 supplied from the switchboard DL2 is turned off, the control of the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is started. Then, when the door open is detected as described above, the night monitoring control circuit 873 supplies power to each camera 69 detected by the power supply A of the battery BA via the battery wiring 877. After a lapse of a predetermined time, DC power is supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to all the cameras 69 to which the power B of the battery BA is connected. Each camera 69 starts recording at the same time when DC power is supplied.
Here, the battery BA may be designed so that all the connected cameras 69 do not have the capacity to operate until the morning, and the charged capacity of the battery BA is used up, so that the DC power supply is not naturally supplied. When the rated voltage of each camera 69 and the recording function falls below 80%, recording is stopped and stored in the HDD or SD card. Then, the power is turned off with the overwrite control turned on. Then, when the AC100V power line 865 is turned on in the morning or the like, it is detected that the overwrite control is turned on at the initial startup, and the recorded data stored in the HDD or SD card is prohibited from being overwritten. The recorded data is saved next to it. Therefore, there is no concern that the recorded content will be erased, and the event that occurred at the site can be confirmed later by playing back the recording.

Next, processing when the AC100V power line 865 is turned on in the morning or the like will be described with reference to FIG. 132. The night monitoring control circuit 873 cannot operate if the battery BA has no capacity (N0 of SS3401) until the employee turns on the power of the switchboard DL2 in the morning or the like. Then, when AC100V is supplied to the power supply line 865, when the night monitoring control circuit 873 detects the energization of the power supply from the AC-DC converter 870 (YES in S3401), until the battery BA is sufficiently charged. Uses the power supply from the AC-DC converter 870 to check if the first flag is present, and blinks the call lamp of the unit information display device K in which the first flag is set (S3403). In addition to notifying the employee that an abnormality has occurred by blinking the call lamp, if the recorded data of each camera 69 has a night flag, the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the table information display device K is displayed as shown in FIG. 128. , The appearance of the intruder MF invading the passage between the island facilities HS and approaching the pachinko machine P is reproduced based on the received recorded information (S3380).
Further, the call lamp of the stand information display device K is blinked (S3403) until the employee confirms, and the recorded information is reproduced on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device K (S3380), and the process is repeated (S3405). NO). If the employee cancels the notification of the power supply abnormality by the battery BA of the night monitoring device 868, the power supply abnormality processing (S3400) is completed.

As described above, in the present invention, the battery BA charged in the daytime is used for nighttime monitoring, which leads to energy saving. In addition, especially in the case of night monitoring, if there is a P game machine such as a pachinko machine that has been opened and closed, 69 power is supplied to each camera, and in order to start recording, the state of the intruder is accurately captured and the pachinko machine is used. Imaging and recording are performed only in the abnormal state of opening and closing the machine P, which is useful for energy saving. Further, it is possible to detect an abnormality at night by causing an abnormality not only in opening and closing the door but also in the power supply of the battery BA which is not normally used.
Although all the cameras 69 facing the aisle were operated, as shown in FIG. 125, only a few cameras 69 facing the pachinko machine P whose opening and closing were detected were operated to perform imaging. It is possible to secure a long time or recording time and contribute to energy saving.

The surveillance camera 61 and each camera 69 are provided with an infrared camera so that they can recognize a person or the like and take an image and reproduce the image even at night by performing image processing during playback or recording. Has been done.

<Configuration and control of immobilization detection system>
Refer to the flowcharts, sequence diagrams, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 133 to 142 for the configuration and control of the immobilization detection system 920 that detects when each camera 69 in the amusement park 1 becomes immobilized. Will be explained in detail. The parts having the same configuration as the above-described configuration are designated by the same reference numerals.

<< Configuration of immobilization detection system >>
FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing a part of each camera 69 in the immobilization detection system 920 as an enlarged plan view.
The incapacity detection system 920 as an incapacity detection means for each camera 69 in the amusement park system is mainly a surveillance camera 61, each camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, a surveillance camera system 60, and an individual face. It is composed of a face recognition server 820 provided in the authentication device 800. The disabling detection server 66 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 includes a surveillance camera 61, each camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, a surveillance camera system 60, and a face recognition server 820 provided in the individual face recognition device 800. I'm in control.

Although each camera 69 is provided in the ball lending machine PT in this embodiment (FIG. 67), the position where each camera 69 is installed may be the table information display device K without limitation. As shown in FIG. 133, the front surface of each camera 69 is made of a dark smoke resin of a half mirror as a first semi-transmissive means so that the player M is not aware that each camera 69 is installed. It is covered with the formed first front cover 837. Further, the left side surface of the camera housing 839 is also covered with a second front cover 838 formed of a dark smoke resin of a half mirror as a second semitransparent means. The second front cover 838 is a perspective window for photographing the player M on the left side with each camera 69. The second front cover 838 takes an image in place of each camera 69 on the left when the front of each camera 69 is blocked due to a failure of each camera 69 on the left or mischief described later. It becomes a transparent window for.

In this way, even if the position of the lens 836 is switched by covering with the two front covers 837 and 838 of each camera 69, the position of the lens 836 of each camera 69 can be switched without being known to the player M. Since it is possible, it becomes easy for the player M to collect data. Further, by using the first and second semi-transparent means, it becomes difficult for the player M to know that each camera 69 is installed.

Further, although the first and second front covers 837 and 838 have been described with a half mirror, there is no particular need to limit the first and second front covers 837 and 838, and they may be formed of mesh-like metal or resin, and the state in which the camera is installed is It may be difficult to recognize.
Further, by using the present invention, it is possible to detect that the front surface of the camera is covered by mischief or the like. Therefore, the first and second front covers 837 and 838 are formed of transparent resin or the like, and the camera is installed. You may install it in a state where you can see that it is installed.

Further, since each camera 69 can perform operations such as pan / tilt / zoom by a drive unit 835 accompanied by a lens 836, it is possible to change the subject or the focus.
FIG. 133 (A) shows the camera position A of each camera 69, and images the player M who is playing the game machine having the same camera number with the camera number. Further, the camera position A is set as an initial value. FIG. 133 (B) shows the camera position B of each camera 69, and images the player M as the subject MH playing the game machine on the left side. When the blackout signal 921 is sent from the left side of the camera position B, each camera 69 can switch the imaging position if it is possible to image. The camera position B may be directed to the left or further to the right, and can be changed depending on the position of the subject MH.
Each camera 69 of the present invention uses a type of camera that switches the imaging position to the left or right, but is not particularly limited, and may be a wide-angle lens or a camera having a 360-degree field of view. In addition, it is possible to control judgment and detection by image processing without switching the camera position.

<< Blackout detection method >>
Blackout detection will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136.
FIG. 134 is a selection field 844 represented by an item when the blackout detection means 932 of the immobilization detection system 920 selects a method for detecting a blackout. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method.

The blackout detection means 932 of the deactivation detection system 920 is built in the ROM 851 (FIG. 68) by the CPU 850 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69, and includes an application according to the detection method.
As shown in FIG. 135 (A), the detection method A detects the distance to the subject MH or the obstacle 842. Normally, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the subject MH is L3 (range of 50 cm to 100 cm), but if there is an obstacle 842a slightly away from the first front cover 837, the obstacle 842a from the lens 836 The detection distance to is L2 (range of 5 cm to 10 cm), and when the obstacle 842b is attached to the first front cover 837, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the obstacle 842 is L1 (3 cm). The detection distance is in the range of ~ 5 cm).

Each camera 69 detects blackout according to the distance to the obstacles 842a and 842b. For distance measurement, the phase difference of the focal point of the camera, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, or the like can be used. As described above, it is possible to detect not only the case where the obstacle 842 is in close contact with the obstacle 842a, but also the case where the obstacle 842a is arranged a little away from each other, such as when the obstacle 842 is placed floating without being close to each other.
The detection distance can be changed and is not particularly limited, but the conditions for detecting obstacles 842a and 842b within a range of 3 cm to 10 cm are optimal for the blackout detecting means 932.

As shown in FIGS. 135 (B-1) and (B-2), the detection method B determines that each camera 69 is blacked out by detecting the difference in the amount of light between the normal time and the obstacle 842.
As shown in FIG. 135 (B-1), the normal amount of light is X1, but the front surface of the lens 836 is blocked by the obstacle 842c, and the amount of light is as small as X2 as shown in FIG. 135 (B-1). Become. Therefore, each camera 69 determines when the difference between X1 and X2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. The amount of light is expressed in lumens (lm · s), and may be measured by the illuminance expressed in lux (lux). As a method of measuring the amount of light and illuminance, there are a method of detecting with each camera 69 using a CCD camera, a method of detecting with a luminance meter or an illuminance meter, and the like.
As described above, when detecting by the amount of light, it is effective regardless of the shape because it can be determined regardless of the shape and size of the obstacle 842c.

As shown in FIG. 136A, the detection method C-1 detects an image 841 accompanied by face image data 605 in which each camera 69 identifies a face by a face recognition engine when the subject MH is imaged in a normal state. To do. However, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), each camera 69 detects the image 841a covered with the obstacle 842, and 70% or more of the image is processed by the image processing of the face recognition engine of the individual face recognition device 800. When the area of the area is covered with a monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842d, it is judged as a blackout.
Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), each camera 69 detects the image 841b covered with the obstacle 842e, and even when the subject MH is partially covered and the subject MH is hidden. When the area of 70% or more of the area of the image is covered with the monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842 by the image processing of the face recognition engine, it is determined as blackout.

Further, the detection method C-2 determines when the motion detection of each camera 69 does not function for a certain period of time. The detection method C-1 is adopted as the detection process, and the trigger for determination is the case where the motion detection of each camera 69 does not function for a certain period of time. When a person is imaged, the movement of the person is captured, and the state where there is no movement for a certain period of time during business is when the person does not exist, the person does not pass through the aisle, or an obstacle. This is the case where the camera is blocked by an object 842 or the camera 69 is out of order. Therefore, the blackout detection means 932 determines when the motion detection is not functioning for a certain period of time, so that the front surface of each camera 69 is blocked by an obstacle 842 or the camera 69 is out of order. It can be detected quickly.

In the detection method D, each camera 69 uses the face recognition engine of each camera 69 to identify the face of the player M, but the face data 605 is performed despite the operation of the game machine. If is not specified, it is judged as a blackout.
To detect whether the game machine is operating, use whether or not there is an out ball signal count as described above, the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT, the number of starts, and the number of safe balls of the game machine. There is also a way to detect if there is a payout.
The detection method D is effective as a detection method because it can be determined regardless of the shape and state of the obstacle 842, and it is possible to detect even if each camera 69 is out of order.
As described above, the blackout detection means 932 has been described up to the detection methods A to D, but it may be used selectively, or the methods of the detection methods A to D may be used in combination at the same time.

<< Control of immobilization detection system >>
The control of the immobilization detection system 920 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and sequence diagrams of FIGS. 137 to 142.
FIG. 137 is a schematic view showing an enlarged plane of a part of the island facility HS in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the blackout detection process in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the blindfold countermeasure processing in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram of the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera 69 in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 142 is a time chart of the immobilization detection system 920.

First, the blackout detection process (S3410) shown in FIGS. 138 and 140 will be described. During the predetermined time (TB), each camera 69H detects whether the front surface of each camera 69H is covered (S3411). It is considered that the optimum predetermined time (TB) is about 1 to 2 minutes in consideration of malfunction, the case where the front surface of each camera 69 is simply touched, and the preparation for the goto action. If even the act of touching with the hand is judged for a moment, it will cause a malfunction and a decrease in service to the player, so by judging after a predetermined time has passed, while being wary of the act of goto. It is also possible to prevent malfunction.

Blackout detection is constantly detected by the blackout detection means 932 provided in each camera 69 (NO in S3411), and when blackout is detected (YES in S3411), the blackout signal 921 is set. It is output to the immobilization detection server 66 together with the number (S3412).
Here, the blackout detection means 932 described above has been described up to the detection methods A to D, but it may be selectively used, or a plurality of methods may be used in combination at the same time.
In this way, it is possible to prevent malfunctions while causing a decrease in service to the player and being wary of goto acts.

Next, the blindfold countermeasure processing (S3413) shown in FIGS. 137, 139 and 140 will be described. When the deactivation detection server 66 receives the blackout flag ON from each camera 69H that has detected the blackout (YES in S3415), the deactivation detection server 66 turns the blackout flag ON (S3416). The deactivation detection server 66 identifies the area of each camera 69H that has detected the blackout (S3417). For example, as shown in FIG. 137, from each camera 69H (301 series) that detected the blackout installed in the island equipment HS1, to the adjacent 302 series and 303 series, and to the island equipment HS2 behind the 301 series. Each of the six adjacent cameras 69 in the 206 series, 207 series, and 208 series installed is specified as the area ARI1. For this area (ARI1, ARI2, ARI3), the closest distance that each camera 69 can capture is selected, but the number is not limited to six, and a larger number may be set. By defining this area (ARI1, ARI2, ARI3), the control process becomes quick and easy.

Next, the immobilization detection server 66 identifies each non-immobilized nearby camera 69 (YES in S3418), switches the camera of each identified camera 69 to the subject HM (S3419), and each The stand camera 69 captures the subject MH (S3421), and determines whether face data 605 can be created by the face recognition engine of the individual face recognition device 800 built in each stand camera 69 (YES in S3418).
Further, the immobilization detection server 66 moves an object to be imaged by the surveillance camera 61 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 to the subject MH when all the cameras 69 in the area cannot perform imaging. (S3420). The surveillance camera 61 captures the subject MH (S3421) and determines whether or not the face data 605 can be created by the face recognition engine built in the surveillance camera 61 or the face recognition server 80 (YES in S3418).

Next, each of the camera 69 and the surveillance camera 61 extracts the face image data 605 from the image captured by the subject MH by the face recognition engine mounted on each camera and transmits the data (S3423). The data to be transmitted are recorded data, face image data 605 created by the face recognition engine, and time data indicating the time when the image was taken. If there is at least time data that captures the characteristics of the player M, recorded data, and a camera number (CH) as an identification number for each camera 69 or surveillance camera 61, it is not necessary to save the face image data 605 in particular. Since it is possible to check the recorded data later, it is possible to store the face image data with peace of mind from the viewpoint of protecting personal information such as information leakage, rather than directly storing the face image data.
The recorded data, face image data 605 and time data stored in the hard disk HDD of the face recognition server 80 or the ball lending machine PT stored in the face recognition server 80 or each camera 69 are obtained from each camera 69 or surveillance camera 61. The data is stored by replacing the obtained data (S3424).

The deactivation detection server 66 transmits an abnormal signal to the surveillance camera system 60 and the hall computer 90, displays it on the monitor connected to the surveillance camera system 60 and the hall computer 90 in the management area 2, and displays it to the employee. (S3425). By notifying employees, it is possible to quickly detect and deal with mischief and mischief. Further, by notifying only the management area 2, it is possible to respond without being known to the player, and it is possible to prevent trouble with the player M in advance.

Next, the operation of the system by the control described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram and the timing chart shown in FIGS. 137, 141 and 142.
FIG. 137 shows the pachinko machine P installed in the island facility HS and the chair C on which the player M sits, and the machine number indicating the number of the pachinko machine P managed in the game hall 1 is attached to the machine information display device K. .. Then, the pachinko machine P16 with the 206-310 series, which is a part of the island facility HS, is shown as an example.

For example, when the front surface of each camera 69H in the 307 series is covered with paper or the like, the blackout detection means 932 by the above method detects it, and after a predetermined time (TB) elapses, each camera 69H is black. The out signal 921 is output to the immobilization detection server 66. The deactivation detection server 66 turns on the blackout flag. When each camera 69 in the area (ARI3) receives the camera position switching signal 925, the camera position is switched from the camera position A to the camera position B toward the subject MH, and in some cases, the zoom signal 928 changes to the subject MH. Zoom in.
When all the cameras 69 in the area (ARI3) cannot take an image, the surveillance camera 61 is used. Since the surveillance camera 61 is away from the player M (subject MH), it is possible to take an image without being known to the player M (subject MH).

Then, the subject MH is imaged and the above-mentioned recorded data, the face image data 605 created by the face recognition engine, the time data indicating the time when the image was taken, and the like are collected. The surveillance camera 61 and each camera 69H operate until the blackout signal 921 is turned off or until the data collection is completed.
Here, since the immobilization detection system 920 gives priority to the monitoring of its own pachinko machine P, when the pachinko machine P is operating as in the 306 series, it gives priority to its own monitoring and does not switch cameras. , When it is determined that the pachinko machine P is not in operation, the cameras 69 of each machine are switched. In this way, it is possible to effectively use each camera 69 that is not monitored while reliably monitoring the player M.
The method of capturing the operation of the pachinko machine P is determined by detecting the out-ball signal 931, but it is not particularly limited and is determined by the start signal from the pachinko machine P or the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT. May be good. Further, the face recognition engine of each camera 69 may detect and determine that the player M is seated.

When the 301s and 302s occur at the same time, the 303s out of the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 monitor the player M because there is a player M, and if the player M disappears, each The stand camera 69 is switched to the 301 series or the 302 series. Further, even when the player M is present, the cameras 69 may be switched to the 301 series or the 302 series as long as the face data 605 can be saved.
Further, if the face data 605 can be captured by switching the cameras 69 of the 206 series to the 208 series behind the 301 series and the 302 series, the face data 605 is collected. If all the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used, the surveillance camera 61 is switched to take an image. The surveillance camera 61 is switched to be used when all the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used in order to prioritize the opening / closing of the game machine and the monitoring of the counter JC.
Further, if each camera 69 outside the area ARI1 cannot be used, each camera 69 in the 305 series or 210 series may be used.

Next, when a blackout is detected, the counter shutter 832 is operated to prohibit the counting of the balls held in order to prevent the goto action. By the operation prohibited in this way, it is possible to prevent damage caused by the act of goto. Similarly, in order to prevent damage caused by the act of goto, it is possible to take measures by prohibiting the operation of paying out the balls and the operation of sharing the balls. Further, it is conceivable not only to prohibit the operation of the ball lending machine PT, but also to stop the display screen of the stand information display device K and stop providing information such as the number of big hits and the number of starts to the player M. Stopping the provision of information from the machine information display device K or the like does not directly affect the game, and is therefore effective in terms of stopping the service to the player M.

If the discharge of even the game media such as the balls purchased by the player M is prohibited in this way, a trouble may occur with the player M. Therefore, the rental of the purchased balls is not prohibited, and the game is played. By prohibiting operations that do not affect the game, troubles between the player M and the game hall 1 side are prevented from occurring.
Although the present invention shows a case where the front surface of each camera 69 is blocked by paper, tape or the like, it can also be used in the case of a failure of each camera 69.

(Island facilities installed in the amusement park)
The island facility HS installed in the amusement park 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 154. FIG. 143 (A) shows a schematic view of the arrangement of each island facility (HS1 to HS6) installed in the amusement park 1 as viewed from a plane, and FIG. 143 (B) shows each island facility installed in the amusement park 1 (B). A schematic view of the arrangement of HS1 to HS6) viewed from the side is shown. FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility HS3 on the side surface. FIG. 145 is a schematic view showing each device installed in the island facility HS3 in a perspective view. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game medium stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board 407 for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board 407 for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 149 is a schematic view showing a state in which the game medium is collected by the shelf board 407 from the side surface. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of a modified example of the shelf board 407 viewed from the back surface by partially cutting the game medium storage tank TA. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a part of a modified example of the shelf board 407a for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 152 is a schematic view showing a part of a modified example of the shelf board 407a on the side surface. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing the upper tank B3 installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter unit 440. FIG. 155 is a schematic view showing a state in which the shutter portion 440 is opened and closed on the side surface. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing a state in which devices for controlling the shutter unit 440 installed in the plurality of island facilities HS are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing a connection of devices that control the shutter unit 440.

FIG. 143 shows an example of the layout of each island facility (HS1 to HS6) in the amusement park 1. This layout changes depending on the shape and size of the site of the amusement park 1, and the present invention is not limited to this layout and may be appropriately changed and applied. KC is displayed on the island facilities HS3 to HS6 provided with the counting unit 805 described above. The counting unit 805 is used to reduce the work of exchanging the ball box, etc. of the employee even when a game machine having a low rental unit price of the game medium is installed or even if the rental unit price of the game medium is high. It is often installed.

The island facilities HS1 to HS3 represent the island facilities HS on which the FP is displayed and the counting unit 805 is not provided. The island facilities HS1 to HS3 on which the FP is displayed are placed in a state in which a ball box for storing the game medium acquired by the player M is stacked on the aisle near the player M, and the ball is sent to the player M. In some cases, the counting unit 805 may not be provided when the game hall 1 is made to look lively or when the motivation for playing is increased.
Upper tanks B1 to B6 for supplying or collecting pachinko balls Q are provided above the island facilities HS1 to HS6. Further, between the island facilities HS1 to HS6, transport gutters BR1 to BR10 for transporting pachinko balls Q to or recovering from other islands are installed in the upper tanks B1 to B6.

Next, the internal structure of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 149. Since the internal structures of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are all the same, the island facilities HS3 will be described as an example.
Near the center of the island facility HS3, a ball polishing device 401 is installed to lift the pachinko balls Q to the upper tank B3 while polishing the pachinko balls Q. Above the upper tank B3, a transport gutter BR4 for transporting the pachinko ball Q is provided on the adjacent island facility HS2, and the transport gutter BR4 is hung with a gradient. In addition, the pachinko ball Q sent from the adjacent island facility HS2 is collected by the transport gutter BR3.
The recovered pachinko balls Q are provided in a vertically hung metal, wooden or resin tubular shape, pass through an overflow duct 402 having a hollow inside, and have a gradient in the center of the game medium storage tank TA3. The overflow shelf 408 that has been hung is rolled and stored in the game medium storage tank TA3.

The island facility HS3 rolls and conveys the pachinko ball Q by providing a gradient or a step due to gravity. Therefore, the discharge port of the ball polishing device 401 is provided at the highest position.
The gradient for rolling and transporting the pachinko ball Q is about 5% (angle of about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle of about 5.71 degrees), and if you try to convey a long distance, The gradient should be gentle. In this embodiment, the shelf board 407, the recovery gutter 403, the transport gutter BR, and the replenishment gutter 417 are illustrated with a 5% gradient in order to transport the pachinko ball Q for a long time.

The pachinko ball Q transported to the upper tank B3 by the ball polishing device 401 is a metal cross-section U-shaped replenishment gutter 417 provided with a gradient for supplying to the pachinko machine P or the ball lending machine PT. Is being transported by. The pachinko ball Q transported by the replenishment gutter 417 is distributed to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT by the separator 410, and the metal flexible hollow replenishment bellows (411, 411, provided in the separator 410). It is replenished to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT via 412).

Below the pachinko machine P, an outbox BO for collecting out balls discharged from the pachinko machine P is provided for each pachinko machine P. The outbox BO forms a resin box shape, collects pachinko balls Q, counts the collected pachinko balls Q, and outputs the counted information to an external information terminal such as a hall computer 90. The counted pachinko balls Q are collected by a recovery gutter 403 or a shelf board 407 provided with a gradient via a metal flexible hollow recovery bellows 413.

Further, a metal bendable hollow recovery bellows 413 is provided below the ball lending machine PT, and the pachinko ball Q counted by the counting unit 805 described above has a gradient via the recovery bellows 413. It is collected by the provided collection gutter 403 and the shelf board 407.
Since the surface of the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf board 407 made of metal or resin is not damaged by the fall of the pachinko ball Q, the recovery bellows 413 has a length that can be installed close to the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf board 407. It is stretched and the length of each recovery bellows 413 is adjusted according to the gradient of the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf board 407.

The upper tank B3 has a structure in which the pachinko ball Q is supplied to the supply gutter 417 with the highest priority in order to prioritize the supply of the pachinko ball Q to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and then the overflow duct. It is stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 via the 402 and the overflow shelf 408. The collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 are conveyed to the upper tank B3 by the ball polishing and feeding device 401 via the confluence portion 404. The pachinko ball Q transported to the upper tank B3 is transported to the supply gutter 417 or to the adjacent island facility HS2 by the transport gutter BR4.

Next, the game medium storage tank TA3 will be described. The game medium storage tank TA3 is made of wood or metal and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The upper part of the game medium storage tank TA3 communicates with the overflow duct 402, and the overflow shelf 408 and the shelf board 407 whose surfaces are made of resin or metal are installed with a slope. Inside the game medium storage tank TA3, a space for storing pachinko balls Q is provided. The bottom 406 of the game medium storage tank TA3 includes a bottom recovery gutter 405 that communicates with the recovery gutter 403 and has a gradient for taking in the collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3. ..
The confluence portion 404 communicates with the bottom collection gutter 406 and the collection gutter 403 on the opposite side of the game medium storage tank TA3, and the collected pachinko ball Q and the pachinko ball Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 are balled. It is flowing into the lifting device 401.

The game medium storage tank TA3 has a structure capable of storing pachinko balls Q having a capacity larger than that of the upper tank B3. While the upper tank B3 can store about 30,000 pachinko balls Q, the game medium storage tank The TA3 has a capacity to store about 150,000 to about 250,000 pachinko balls Q in one tank. The storage amount of the pachinko balls Q can be increased or decreased by installing a plurality of the game medium storage tanks TA3 in the island facility HS according to the number of pachinko machines P installed and the business form.
When a plurality of game media storage tanks TA are provided in the island facility HS, the transport distance becomes long and the transport may not be possible only by the gradient. In that case, a conveyor-type transport lift or the like, which will be described later, is installed to form a system for lifting or horizontally transporting the pachinko balls Q.

FIG. 146 shows the order of storage of the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 by numbers “1” to “5”. The pachinko ball Q that has rolled the shelf board 407 rolls to the lowermost end of the shelf board 407 and is stored from the end of the game medium storage tank TA3. When the "1" portion of the lowermost storage tank is filled, the pachinko ball Q stays on the shelf board 407 and gradually changes the position where the pachinko ball Q is dropped onto the game medium storage tank TA3 upstream while moving the game medium storage tank TA3 " Fill in order from 1 ”. In the game medium storage tank TA3, the initial value SS is set with a margin in the storage capacity in anticipation that the pachinko balls Q will be returned at once after the store is closed, instead of filling all the capacities with the pachinko balls Q. The initial value SS is a set value in which the pachinko ball Q is evenly contained in the island facility HS of the amusement park 1.
A spare ball detection sensor S7 is attached at the position of the initial value SS, and the ball detection sensor S7 is used as a spare sensor for S4 and S5. The ball detection sensor S7 can respond quickly in an emergency, and at the same time, can be used to detect when a foreign object BD causes the sensor to fly. The setting change to the ball detection sensor S7 can be handled by a simple operation by replacing the wiring or changing the control setting.

Next, the shelf board 407 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 149. The shelf board 407 is formed in the shape of a long flat plate made of hard metal or resin so that the surface thereof is prevented from being worn, and is attached to the side wall of the game medium storage tank TA3 with a gradient.
The shelf board 407 is attached to the game medium storage tank TA3 by an L-shaped support piece 425, and the support piece 425 rotatably supports the rotary rod 424. The rotary rod 424 is fixed to the shelf plate 407 by the rotary rod fixing piece 422.
A space 427 is provided between the side wall 429 side of the game medium storage tank TA3 and the shelf board 407, which is smaller than the diameter of the pachinko ball Q (the diameter of the pachinko ball Q is 11 mm) so that the pachinko ball Q does not fall but the foreign matter BD or the like can fall. ing.

The shelf board 407 can adjust the angle of the shelf board 407 in the width direction by rotating around the rotary rod 424. By adjusting the angle in the width direction, the rate at which the pachinko ball Q falls toward the game medium storage tank TA3 can be changed. By slightly inclining this angle adjustment toward the side wall side 429 of the game medium storage tank TA3 as shown in FIG. 149, the pachinko balls Q do not fall from the middle of the shelf board 407 and are ordered to the game medium storage tank TA3 (1 to 5). It has a structure that can be stored in. Since the structure is such that the pachinko balls can be stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 in order (1 to 5), the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q can be accurately measured by the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). In this way, by accurately detecting the stored amount, it is possible to equalize the stored amount of the game medium storage tank TA in the entire game field 1 by controlling the pachinko ball Q to be conveyed.
The optimum inclination of the shelf board 407 in the width direction is about 1 to 2 degrees. In this embodiment, the angle adjusting unit 421 is provided at the end of the shelf plate 407, and the angle adjusting unit 421 as the angle adjusting means is automatically and steplessly provided by providing the angle adjusting motor 423 and the gear (428, 426). Although the angle can be adjusted, the angle may be adjusted in stages using a solenoid or the like.

On the back surface of the shelf board 407, ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) for detecting the accumulated amount of pachinko balls Q are installed. As the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection, or the like is adopted. By using a photo sensor or an ultrasonic sensor, the distance to the pachinko ball Q can be measured, so that the capacity stored in the game medium storage tank TA can be measured extremely finely. Further, by installing the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) that detect the accumulated amount of the pachinko balls Q on the back surface of the shelf board 407, the pachinko balls Q can be dropped directly onto the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). I'm preventing it. Therefore, unlike the conventional case, the coil of the sensor, the electronic component, and the like are not destroyed by the impact caused by the dropping of the pachinko ball Q. Further, since the position of the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) is the uppermost part of the game medium storage tank TA3, the head is small and the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) is less likely to be damaged by the impact of the fall of the pachinko ball Q. .. The above-mentioned effect is the same for the mobile sensor described later.

Next, modifications of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are shown in FIGS. 150 to 152. Since the angle adjusting mechanism (421a, 422a, 425a) is the same as the above-described structure, the description thereof is omitted, and a is added to the same reference numerals in the same structure. The ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are used for control to detect the amount of balls described later. As the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection, or the like is adopted for the sensor unit 433.
Unlike the structure described above, the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move on the rail portion 431, so that the two sensors can measure the amount of pachinko ball Q stored in an extremely fine manner. The rail portion 431 is provided with a rail 436 having a U-shaped cross section and a pulley 435 in the rail 436. The movable portion 438 moves as the pulley 435 moves on the rail 436. The movable portion 438 has a built-in sensor portion 433 and detects the pachinko ball Q.

The mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can accurately measure the amount of pachinko balls Q stored, unlike the fixed type described above. In the case of the fixed type, if the pachinko ball Q reaches the detection distance of the ball detection sensor, the amount of balls at a preset position can be grasped, but the amount of pachinko ball Q stored between the sensors can be detected. Can not. However, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can measure the amount of pachinko ball Q stored steplessly by moving, and can be stored by a sensor that can measure the distance such as ultrasonic waves. Since it is possible to measure even the distance of the pachinko ball Q, it is possible to grasp the stored amount of the pachinko ball Q more finely. Further, in the case of the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), the setting can be freely changed depending on the position where the level is moved when controlling, so that the control of the pachinko ball Q transport is also controlled extremely finely. It becomes possible. Therefore, when it is desired to change the holding amount of pachinko balls Q in the entire amusement park 1 depending on the business form, it is effective because it can be freely set.

A linear system is adopted as the drive system for movement, and a plurality of permanent magnets 437 provided with north and south poles provided inside the pulley 435 are arranged, and a movable part 438 with a built-in coil carries an electric current. By controlling the movement, the movable portion 438 non-contactly propels the shelf plate 407a in the longitudinal direction by electromagnetic force. Termination sensors 439 that detect the termination of the rail portion 431 are provided at both ends of the rail portion 431. By adopting the linear method, it is possible to control the straight motion with high accuracy. In addition, as another straight-moving method, there is also a moving mechanism that moves a ball-screw nut to move the ball-screw nut by driving a motor connected to the ball screw.

Next, a structure for transporting the pachinko balls Q between the island facilities HS will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. As shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko balls Q are transported between the island facilities (HS2, HS3, HS4) by the transport gutters (BR3 to BR6) hung with a gradient.
Above the upper tank B3, transport gutters BR3 and BR5 for transporting the pachinko balls Q stored in the adjacent island facilities HS2 and HS4 are provided. Further, below the upper tank B3, transport gutters BR4 and BR6 for receiving the pachinko balls Q stored in the adjacent island facilities HS2 and HS4 are provided in the upper tank B3.

Below the transport gutters BR3 and BR5, a shutter portion 440 provided on the side wall of the upper tank B3 is provided.
The shutter portion 440 is fixed to the side wall of the upper tank B3 with screws or the like in the shutter mounting hole 447 provided in the shutter mounting portion 443. As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the shutter portion 440, the shutter movable portion 442 connecting the shutter motor 441 with a gear or the like moves up and down to block or open the transport passage 451 of the upper tank B3, thereby pachinko. The transport of the ball Q is controlled. The shutter motor 441 detects the position of the shutter movable portion 442 by the detection piece 448 provided on the upper limit switch 446, the lower limit limit switch 445, and the shutter movable portion 442, and determines whether the shutter movable portion 442 is in an appropriate position. Judging, the shutter movable portion 442 is moved up and down to close or open the transport passage 451.

Next, the connection configuration and control of the shutter unit 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157 with reference to the block diagram for controlling the shutter unit 440 and the control flow.
First, the connection configuration of the device that controls the shutter unit 440 will be described by exemplifying the Yamaha HS5 in which the counter JC2 shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 is installed. The shutter unit 440 is composed of a shutter control board 485, a shutter unit 440L of the own island, a shutter unit 440R of the neighboring island, a own island sensor group 483L, and a neighboring island sensor group 483R. Then, when the controls shown in FIG. 157 are connected as one unit in a string of beads, the configuration shown in FIG. 156 is obtained. In FIG. 156, one constituent unit is shown by a solid line centering on the island facility HS5, and the broken line is shown as another constituent unit.

The shutter control board 485 provided on the island facility HS5 is connected to the shutter portion 440L of the own island provided on the right side surface of the upper tank B5 by wiring, and the shutter control provided on the island facility HS6 is also provided. It is connected to the shutter portion 440R of the adjacent island provided on the left side surface of the upper tank B6 via the substrate 485 by wiring.
Further, the shutter control board 485 is connected to the own island sensor group 483L installed in the game medium storage tank TA5 by wiring, and is also connected to the island facility HS6 via the shutter control board 485 provided in the island facility HS6. It is connected to the adjacent island sensor group 483R installed in the game medium storage tank TA6 provided in the above by wiring. For the own island sensor group 483L and the adjacent island sensor group 483R, either the fixed ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) or the mobile ball detection sensor (Sa1 and Sa2) described above may be adopted.

Next, the control of the shutter unit 440 of the shutter control board 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 158. The control of the shutter unit 440 used for the control of equalizing the stored amount of the pachinko balls Q, which will be described later, will be described.

The shutter unit opening / closing process (S3501) is a control when controlling one shutter unit 440. If a shutter control signal is transmitted from the shutter control board 485 (YES in S3503) when equalizing the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q, the shutter motor 441 is driven to operate the shutter movable portion 442 up and down (YES in S3503). S3504). The shutter motor 441 is driven until the detection piece 448 of the shutter movable portion 442 comes into contact with the upper limit or lower limit limit switch (445, 446) and the sensor of the upper limit or lower limit switch detects it (NO in S3505). When the upper limit or lower limit switch (445, 446) is turned ON (YES in S3505), the drive of the shutter motor 441 is stopped, and the operation of the shutter movable portion 442 is stopped (S3506). After that, the timer is activated (S3507), and the operation of the shutter movable portion 442 is stopped until the timer elapses for a predetermined time (YES in S3508) (NO to S3506 in S3508). The set value of the timer depends on the specifications of the shutter motor 441, but is optimally about 1 to 3 minutes. The timer prevents the shutter motor 441 from burning due to the sensitive reaction of the ball detection sensor S / Sa.

<Control of averaging the amount of pachinko balls stored in the game medium storage tank of the island facility>
Next, by controlling the shutter unit 440 described above, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1 is determined by the game hall 1. The control of averaging as a whole will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 167.
FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game medium stored in the game medium storage tank TA installed in each island facility HS. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a shutter process for ball transport. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the store closing processing mode processing. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the initialization process. FIG. 167 is a schematic view of the movement of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) installed on the shelf board 407a as viewed from the bottom.

The averaging process (S3510) of the game medium storage tank will be described. The averaging process (S3510) of the game medium storage tank is the main process, and is roughly divided into a store closing process mode (S3540) and a ball transport shutter process (S3520). The ball transport shutter process S3520 is used during normal business hours, and in the store closing process mode (S3540), a large amount of pachinko balls Q may be returned to the counter JC in a short time at a time when the store is closed. This is the process used when expected. In the store closing processing mode (S3540), the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tanks (TA2, TA5) in which the counter JC is installed in order to smoothly count the pachinko balls Q acquired by the customer, especially when the store is closed. It is a control to adjust.

The averaging process (S3510) of the game medium storage tank TA is branched into a store closing process mode (S3540) and a ball transport shutter process S3520 (S3511). When the store closing process mode (S3540) is selected (YES in S3511), the store closing process mode (S3540) is selected (NO in S3515) until the initial value flag described later is turned on. When the initial value flag is turned ON, the process proceeds to the ball transport shutter process (S3520) (YES in S3515). As shown in FIG. 159, the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is set in five stages, and the storage amount of the pachinko ball Q is divided into five sensor levels to transport the pachinko ball Q and control the averaging. ing.

First, the shutter processing for ball transport (S3520) will be described with reference to FIGS. 156, 157 and 161.
The ball transport shutter process (S3520) controls the shutter unit 440 described above to transport the pachinko balls Q, and the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1. The amount of pachinko balls Q stored in) is averaged in the entire amusement park 1.

The ball transport shutter process (S3520) compares the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island with the game medium storage tank TA6 on the neighboring island, and if the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is low (S3521). YES), that is, if the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island is larger than that on the neighboring island, the shutter portion 440L on the own island is opened (S3523) and the shutter portion 440R on the neighboring island is closed ( S3524).

Next, the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island is compared with the game medium storage tank TA6 on the neighboring island, and if the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is not low (NO in S3521), the own island Comparing the game medium storage tank TA5 of the neighboring island with the game medium storage tank TA6 of the neighboring island, if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor S / Sa of the neighboring island is high (YES of S3522), that is, the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island. If the amount of pachinko ball Q stored in the island is smaller than that of the neighboring island, the shutter portion 440R of the neighboring island is opened (S3526), and the shutter portion 440L of the own island is closed (S3527).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island is not high (NO in S3522), it means that the sensor levels are the same, that is, the amount of pachinko ball Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island. Is the same as that of the neighboring island, so that the shutter portion 440R of the neighboring island and the shutter portion 440L of the own island are closed (S3525).

In this way, the island facilities HS5 and HS6 have been illustrated and described, but the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are controlled in the same manner, and the amount of pachinko balls stored in the game medium storage tank TA of the own island and the neighboring island is always set. Compared with the detection sensors S and Sa, control is performed so that the game medium storage tank TA of the island facility HS is evenly distributed in the entire game hall 1. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the island facility HS connected by the transport gutter BR can be moved between the island facility HS. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the entire game hall 1 can be efficiently used, and the pachinko balls Q are not insufficiently supplied to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.

Next, the store closing processing mode processing (S3540) will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 162 to 167.
The control of the store closing processing mode processing (S3540) is different depending on whether or not the island equipment (HS2, HS5) where the counter JC is installed (S3541). If the island facility HS is equipped with the counter JC (YES in S3541), the lower limit level "lower" is set to the sensor level "2" as shown in FIG. 159 (B) (S3542). Further, in the case of island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) in which the counter JC is not installed (NO in S3541), the upper limit level "above" is set to the sensor level "4" as shown in FIG. 159 (A). Is set to the initial value SS (shown in FIG. 146), which is an intermediate position between "" and "5" (S3551).

Next, the island facilities (HS2, HS5) determine whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island is the upper limit level (S3543). In the island facilities (HS2, HS5), if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island is not the upper limit level (NO in S3543), the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the own island is It is determined whether or not it is the lower limit level (S3545).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) of the own island is lower than the lower limit level (YES of S3545), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) opens the shutter part 440 of the adjacent island (S3553) and owns the island. By closing the shutter portion 440 of the island (S3554), it is possible to always secure the required storage amount on the island. Further, the island equipment (HS2, HS5) closes the shutter portion 440 of the adjacent island (S3555) unless the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) of the own island is lower than the lower limit level (NO of S3545). By opening the shutter part 440 of the island (S3556), pachinko balls above the lower limit level, which exceeds the required storage capacity of the island, can be handled even if they are returned to the counter JC at once after the store is closed. Q can be transported to secure the free capacity required for the game medium storage tank TA. In this way, if the mode is switched to the store closing processing mode, it is possible to secure the free capacity required for the game medium storage tank TA of the island facility HS in which the counter JC is installed in advance.

In addition, the island equipment (HS2, HS5) activates a timer to prevent malfunction of the sensor when the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island reaches the upper limit level (YES in S3543) (S3544). .. Until the timer elapses for a predetermined time, it is always determined whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island has reached the upper limit level (NO of S3546, S3544, S3546). When the timer elapses for a predetermined time (YES in S3546), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) turns on the sensor level increase flag of the own island used for the control described later (S3547). As shown in FIGS. 159 (B) to 159 (C), by turning on the sensor level increase flag of the own island, the control is performed to raise the lower limit level sensor position by one step. By raising the sensor level, it is possible to follow the amount of storage returned in real time, and it is possible to reduce unnecessary traffic of pachinko balls Q.
Until the lower limit level of the own island rises and becomes the same as the period value (YES in S3548), the rise flag for raising the sensor position of the lower limit level by one step is turned ON (S3547). If the lower limit level of the own island becomes the same as the initial value SS (YES in S3548), the initial value flag is turned ON (S3549).
By raising the pachinko ball Q until it becomes the same as the initial value SS, it is possible to induce the pachinko balls Q to be stored up to the initial value SS without having to move back and forth unnecessarily. In addition, the installed ball detection sensor (S or Sa) can be effectively used.

In this way, by changing the sensor level position from the currently set sensor level position to another placed sensor level position in response to the business form of the amusement park 1, traffic by transporting the pachinko ball Q The number of pachinko balls Q can be reduced and the pachinko balls Q can be efficiently stored. In particular, the time when the amusement park 1 operates after the store is closed is not very long, and by adopting the above-mentioned system, it is possible to move the pachinko ball Q in advance, so that the storage amount is equalized in a short time after the store is closed. Can be realized. As a result, when the store opens the next day, it is possible to operate in a state where the stored amount of pachinko balls Q is averaged in the entire amusement park 1.

Further, in the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) in which the counter JC is not installed, when the sensor level does not reach the upper limit level (NO of S3552), the shutter portion 440 of the adjacent island is opened (S3553). ), The shutter portion 440 of the own island is closed (S3554). By opening the shutter part 440 of the adjacent island (S3553) and closing the shutter part 440 of the own island (S3554), even if it is returned to the island equipment (HS2, HS5) where the counter JC is installed at once. Pachinko balls Q are quickly transported to the upper limit level, that is, the initial value SS, to the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed so that the counter JC can be installed in advance. It is possible to secure the free capacity required for the game medium storage tank TA of the island facilities (HS2, HS5). By moving the pachinko balls to the initial value SS in advance in this way, it is not necessary to provide a time for equalizing the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q separated after the store is closed among the island facilities HS of the entire amusement park 1.

As a modification of FIG. 176, the island facility HS2 in which the counter JC is installed among the island facility HS in which the counting unit 805 is not installed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 176, the island facility HS2 provides a small tank RTA2 capable of storing the pachinko ball Q under the counter JC, communicates with the small tank RTA2, and uses a conveyor lift 473 to provide the pachinko ball Q in the small tank RTA2. The amount of pachinko balls Q stored can be increased by transporting the pachinko balls in the recovery gutter 403. Further, the above-mentioned control can be performed by providing the ball detection sensor S5 in the small tank RTA2.
In this way, even if a pachinko ball Q that exceeds the lifting capacity of the ball polishing device 401 is thrown into the counter JC by providing the small tank RTA2, once it is stocked in the small tank RTA2, the counter JC It does not reduce the discharge capacity and does not make the player M wait even if the counting is concentrated just before the store closes.

The island facility HS2 is often equipped with a pachinko machine P, which is expected to acquire a large number of pachinko balls at one time. There are cases where the counting unit 805 is not provided for the amusement park 1 in order to stack the balls and create a lively atmosphere. On the contrary, the island facility HS (KC) in which the counting unit 805 is installed returns the acquired pachinko ball Q on the spot, so that the pachinko ball Q does not move much. Therefore, the storage amount of the game medium storage tank TA may be small.
At least, among the island equipment HS in which the counting unit 805 is not installed, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the island equipment HS2 in which the counting unit JC is installed is increased as compared with the island equipment HS (KC) in which the counting unit 805 is installed. This makes it possible to immediately respond to the processing of returning the pachinko balls Q counted by the counter JC and the replenishment of the pachinko machine P when a large amount of processing or ball ejection after closing the store is required.

Next, the sensor position setting process (S3560) used for controlling the shutter unit 440 described above will be described by taking a mobile ball detection sensor (Sa1 and Sa2) as an example, but it does not need to be particularly limited and is a fixed type. Needless to say, it can be applied to sensors (S1 to S7).

In the sensor position setting process (S3560), an initialization process (S3580) for determining the stored amount of pachinko balls Q in the game medium storage tank TA and the position of the sensor is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the store closing processing mode processing (S3540) is performed (S3561). If the store closing processing mode processing (S3540) is in progress (YES in S3561), it is determined whether or not the island equipment (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (S3562). If the island equipment (HS2, HS5) where the counter JC is installed (YES in S3561), the linear is activated (S3563), and the ball detection sensor (Sa1 and Sa2) is set to the sensor level along the rail portion 431. Move to the position of "2" ("2" in FIG. 159 and FIG. 167) (YES in S3564) and set the lower limit level (FIG. 167 (A), S3542 in FIG. 162).

The lower limit level does not move until the sensor level rise flag is ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (NO in S3565), but if the sensor level rise flag is ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (YES in S3565), it is linear. (S3563), and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) raise the sensor level by one step along the rail portion 431 and move to the position of the sensor level "3" (FIG. 159, FIG. 167, "3"). ) (YES in S3569), set the lower limit level (“below” in FIG. 162), and store the sensor level (S3571). This series of operations (S355 to S3572) is repeated until the sensor level increase flag is turned ON and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the positions of the initial values (SS in FIG. 167) (NO in S3572).
If the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the positions of the initial values (SS in FIG. 167) (YES in S3572), the initial value flag is turned ON (S3573), and the sensor position setting process (S3560) ends.

If the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed (NO in S3562), the linear operation (S3566) and the ball detection sensor (Sa1 and Sa2) are in the rail section 431. To the position of the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) along with (NO in S3567). If the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the initial value SS (YES in S3567), the upper limit level is set (“up” in FIG. 162), and the sensor level is stored (S3574). Then, the sensor position setting process (S3560) of the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) in which the counter JC is not installed is completed.

Further, unless the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) are in the closing process mode processing (S3540) (NO in S3561), the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) detect at a preset distance and detect the ball. It moves to the sensor level where the sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are turned on (FIG. 167 (B), S3575). Then, the sensor level is memorized (S3576) and the linear is operated (S3577).

Since it is not possible to predict whether the storage amount of pachinko ball Q will decrease or increase during business hours, it will move up and down from the stored sensor level (Fig. 167 (C)), and the ball detection sensor Sa1 will move to a position where the storage amount will decrease. The storage amount is monitored, the ball detection sensor Sa2 moves to a position where the storage amount increases, the storage amount is monitored, and if either ball detection sensor (Sa1 or Sa2) is turned ON (S3575), it is turned ON. (FIG. 167 (B), S3575), the sensor level is stored (S3576), and the linear is activated (S3757). Then, the same process (S3575 to S3577) is repeated during business.
In this way, the mobile sensor can detect whether the holding amount of the pachinko ball Q is decreasing or increasing at present, so fine control should be performed while grasping the tendency of increase or decrease. Is possible.

As described above, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) do not need to install many sensors as in the conventional fixed type with steps, and can detect even a small number. Is. In addition, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can control not only the stages but also the stepless control, so the storage amount of the pachinko ball Q can be controlled in five stages. Not only that, real-time control according to the amount of storage can be realized. In particular, it is optimal for equalizing the amount of balls in the entire game medium storage tank TA5 of the game hall 1 within the limited time until the employee returns home after the store is closed.

Next, the initialization process (S3580) will be described. The game medium storage tank TA of the island equipment (HS1 to HS6) actually throws in the pachinko ball Q to be stored and determines the level position of the sensor. The sensor level "1" and the sensor level "5" are the game media. It is defined when designing the storage tank TA (S3581). The sensor level "5" is set in consideration of a little margin from the position where the pachinko ball Q cannot be inserted any more. In addition, in the island facility HS where the counter JC is installed, when the amount of pachinko balls Q stored reaches the sensor level "5", the counter JC is refused to be accepted due to the blockage or display of the counter JC. It is also possible. The sensor level "1" is set to the minimum amount of balls that can be secured on the island before the pachinko balls Q are transported.
Next, the pachinko balls Q to be stored are actually stored in the game medium storage tank TA, and the sensor levels "2" to "4" are set to a sharp ball amount and stored (S3583 to S3585). In the case of this embodiment, the sensor level "1" is 50,000, the sensor level "2" is 100,000, the sensor level "3" is 150,000, the sensor level "4" is 200,000, and the sensor level. The optimum storage amount is 250,000 for "5".

<Control of jamming of shelf boards of island equipment>
Controls for detecting and eliminating foreign matter when foreign matter is mixed in the shelf boards 407 installed in the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1 are shown in FIGS. This will be described with reference to FIG. 174.
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a ball jam detection process. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the ball clogging abnormality processing. FIG. 170 is a schematic view showing a state in which a foreign substance BD is mixed in the shelf board 407. FIG. 171 is a schematic view showing a state when the shelf board 407 is operated. FIG. 172 is a schematic view showing a state when the shelf board 407 is operated. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a ball detection sensor 460 and a vibration device 470 of a modified example installed on the shelf board 407. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of the vibration device 470 of the modified example installed on the shelf board 407.

A state when a foreign substance BD is mixed in the shelf board 407 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. Normally, the pachinko balls Q are stored from the storage area TAC1 to the storage area TAC2 according to the gradient of the shelf board 407, and are gradually stored in the left direction. However, when the foreign matter BD is present, the foreign matter BD acts as a barrier and falls from the middle, the proper storage order of the pachinko ball Q is disturbed, and the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) erroneously detects it. The control for equalizing the game medium storage tank TA does not work well.

Therefore, the ball jam detection process (S3590) shown in FIG. 168 is required. The jam detection process (S3590) stores the current sensor level (S3591). Wait until the sensor level moves (NO in S3592). When there is a movement of the sensor level (YES in S3592), it is determined whether or not the sensor level is + -1 from the previous sensor level (S3593). If the range is + -1 from the previous sensor level (YES in S3593), the ball jam detection process (S3590) is terminated because the order of normal pachinko ball Q storage is normal.

If it is not in the range of + -1 from the previous sensor level (NO in S3593), there is a possibility that the ball is clogged due to foreign matter BD, so there is an undetected sensor among the ball detection sensors that are ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S3594). If there is no undetected sensor among the ON ball detection sensors (NO in S3594), the ball jam detection process (S3590) is terminated because the order of normal pachinko ball Q storage is normal.
If there is an undetected sensor between the ON ball detection sensors (S or Sa) (YES in S3594), there is a possibility that a ball jam has occurred, so the ball jam flag is turned ON. As (S3595), the ball jam detection process (S3590) is completed.

By recognizing the undetected sensor as described above, the jamming can be detected quickly, and the obstacle to the control can be quickly returned to the normal state. Further, in the case of the mobile ball detection sensor Sa, by measuring the distance to the pachinko ball Q while moving as shown in FIG. 170, unlike the stepwise detection, ball clogging occurs due to the inclusion of foreign matter BD. It is possible to quickly detect whether or not it has been done. The sensor that detects the distance can detect the distance by an ultrasonic sensor, a photo sensor, or a laser beam that picks up the reflected wave or the reflected light.

Next, a ball jam abnormality process (S3600) will be described as a process for dealing with a ball jam. The ball jam abnormality process (S3600) waits until the ball jam flag of the ball jam detection process (S3590) is turned ON (S3595) (NO in S3601). If the jam jam flag in the jam jam detection process (S3590) is ON (S3595) (YES in S3601), the jam jam elimination control is turned ON (S3602). When the ball jam clearing control is turned ON, the ball jam clearing device described later is driven.

The ball jam abnormality processing (S3600) is the result of operating the ball jam clearing device a predetermined number of times until the ball jam flag is turned off (YES in S3603) (NO in S3605, S3602). (YES in S3605), it is judged that the ball jam has not been cleared, the ball jam error flag is turned ON (S3606), and the employee is notified in the vicinity of the island facility HS or in the management area 2, and the ball jam is jammed. The abnormality processing (S3600) is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 as a ball clogging clearing device, the shelf board 407 is built into the L-shaped support piece 425 to a position where the stored pachinko ball Q or the like does not interfere with rotation. After being raised by the solenoid 428, the support piece 425 described above rotatably supports the rotary rod 424. Therefore, the angle adjustment motor 423 is driven to adjust the angle of the shelf plate 407 to an angle that can eliminate the foreign matter BD. By changing it, the foreign matter BD can be dropped and eliminated. The angle adjusting unit 421 can also tilt the angle to the left or right with respect to the axis of the rotating rod 424. Further, it is possible to drop and eliminate the foreign matter BD by tilting the angle to the left and right not only in one direction but many times.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, a ball detection sensor 460 equipped with a vibration device 470 that can be used for the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) can also be used as a ball clogging clearing device of a modified example.
The ball detection sensor 460 can be attached to the back surface of the shelf plate 407 with screws or the like from the attachment holes 466 provided in the plate-shaped sensor attachment piece 467. The sensor unit 461 is mounted in the mounting hole 466 by the mounting base 463. Further, the sensor unit 461 has a built-in photo sensor 462 and outputs an ON signal in response to the pachinko ball Q according to the set detection distance. The vibrating portion 470 surrounded by the vibrating case 465 generates vibration by rotating an eccentric and shaft-supported weight by a small motor 472.
This ball clogging clearing device vibrates a plurality of ball detection sensors 460 provided on the back surface of the shelf board 407, and the foreign matter BD is dropped or moved to the end of the pachinko ball Q passage by the vibration to clear the ball clogging. It is a mechanism to perform. In particular, it is possible to design it compactly by acting on an oscillator. In addition, by integrating with the ball detection sensor 460, it is possible to remove foreign matter in places where an abnormality should not occur (above the ball detection sensor, etc.), and at the same time, it is possible to detect and eliminate ball clogging at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to compactly design the elimination device including control.

(Island equipment of modified example)
A modified example of the island facility HS will be described with reference to FIG. 175. Since the structure above the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT is the same as the structure of FIGS. 147 to 148, the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko balls Q discharged from the outbox BO and the ball lending machine PT are distributed to the left and right by a mountain-shaped distribution shelf board 471 formed of metal, resin, or the like. The sorted pachinko balls Q fall from a shelf board 407b having a hole through which the pachinko balls Q pass in a flat metal plate and fall into the game medium storage tank TAb.
The game medium storage tank TAb is made of metal or wood and is formed in a box shape, the upper part is opened, and the upper part is closed by a shelf plate 407b. Further, the island facility HS is provided with a plurality of game medium storage tanks TAbs, and a conveyor lift 473 is provided between the game medium storage tanks TAbs so that the island facility HS can be transported even in a long island facility HS where a natural gradient cannot be taken. .. The bottom recovery gutter 405b lifts the pachinko balls Q in the game medium storage tank TAb by the conveyor lift 473, and finally lifts them to the upper tank B via a ball polishing and lifting device (not shown).

(Structure of stand information display device)
The table information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 67. The table information display device K is attached to the curtain plate 894 by a mounting table (not shown). The curtain plate 894 is formed in a U shape with an aluminum material or a stainless steel material, and is fixed to the island facility HS with screws, nails, bolts, or the like. Above the curtain plate 894, a separator 410 connected to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. 144 and a work door 895 that opens and closes when the supply bellows (411, 412) are clogged are provided. ing.
Further, the machine information display device K displays the information output from the pachinko machine P, the ball lending machine PT, and the outbox BO to the player M via the machine computer 93, such as a jackpot and the number of starts. There is. Further, the stand computer 93 transmits the collected information to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91.

<Modification example 1>
Next, the structure of the modified example 1 of the table information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 186.
FIG. 177 is a schematic view showing the end faces of the platform information display device Ka and the pachinko machine P of the modified example 1 seen from the side surface by cutting the island facility HS. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the stand information display device Ka of the modified example 1 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the stand information display device Ka of the modified example 1 as viewed from the back surface side. FIG. 180 is a schematic view of a state in which the stand information display device Ka of the modified example 1 is displaying information as viewed from the front. FIG. 181 is a schematic view showing a state in which the table information display device Ka of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility HS is closed from the side surface side. FIG. 182 is a schematic view showing a state in which the stand information display device Ka of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility HS is open from the side surface side. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a state in which the stand information display device Ka of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility HS is open from above. FIG. 184 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp unit 620a mounted on the table information display device Ka of the modified example 1 from the front side. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp unit 620a mounted on the table information display device Ka of the modified example 1 from the back surface side. FIG. 186 is an explanatory view showing a cut end surface of the calling lamp unit 620a mounted on the table information display device Ka of the first modification.

The table information display device Ka will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 to 183 and 197. The table information display device Ka is roughly classified into a table information control board 601 (FIG. 197), a liquid crystal display unit 610, a housing 611, a call lamp unit 620a, a hinge 613, and an electronic key holding unit 614.
The platform information display device Ka is formed in a width including the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and further extends in the vertical direction from above the pachinko machine P to the upper end of the island facility HS.
When a plurality of units of the unit information display device Ka are installed in the island facility HS, the units are brought into close contact with each other, so that it is possible to express one connected and related effect over the plurality of units. In addition, the effect expression is possible even with the stand information display device Ka alone.

Most of the front surface of the table information display device Ka is covered with a liquid crystal display unit 610, and the side surface, the lower end, and a part of the upper part of the liquid crystal display unit 610 are covered with a metal housing 611.
The liquid crystal display unit 610 includes a transparent liquid crystal display board 612 surrounded by a housing 611, and includes a liquid crystal display screen 891a that can be transmitted by making the liquid crystal transparent by control. In addition, various effects and data can be displayed by control.
The table information display device Ka is provided with a call lamp unit 620a, which will be described later, on the lower side surface of the housing 611 in the horizontal direction.
Further, the table information display device Ka has hinges 613 attached to the housing 611 so that the table information display device Ka can be opened and closed up and down at both upper ends. Further, below the hinge 613, electronic key holding portions 614 are attached to both ends of the housing 611.

The electronic key holding portion 614 is attached to the housing 611 with screws or the like by the holding portion mounting piece 617. The holding portion mounting piece 617 is connected to the first arm portion 617 that is rotationally supported, and the first arm portion 617 and the second arm portion 617 are rotationally supported. Further, the torque fixing portion 615 having a built-in electronic key is rotationally supported with the second arm portion 617.
As shown in FIG. 177, the hinge 613 is fixed to the metal or wooden cross rail 491 of the island facility HS, and the electronic key holding portion 614 is fixed to the metal or wooden vertical rail 492 of the island facility HS with screws or the like. There is.

When the electronic key holding unit 614 opens and closes the table information display device Ka up and down, the table information display device Ka can be fixed at a constant angle in the open state (FIGS. 182 and 183). By fixing the table information display device Ka in the upward open state, the employee MS does not need to hold the table information display device Ka by hand and can work with both hands, so that troubles can be dealt with quickly. is there.
Further, in the closed state (FIG. 181), the opening / closing operation can be fixed by the built-in electronic key. When releasing the electronic key, the structure is such that the electronic key cannot be released unless authentication for identifying a person such as fingerprint authentication, which will be described later, or a personal identification number is input by a signal from a remote controller or the like.

As described above, the electronic key holding unit 614 is controlled by the table information control board 601 and has a function of fixing the table information display device Ka by the fingerprint authentication reading device 627 and the fingerprint authentication board 628. Therefore, the platform information display device Ka is opened and closed, the hand is reached from above the pachinko machine P, the door lock on the back surface of the pachinko machine P is operated, and after the pachinko machine P is opened and closed, the main board and the payout board are used. It is possible to prevent the act of attaching a rom, a board, or the like, or the act of picking up banknotes from a banknote transport gutter after purchasing a game medium of a ball lending machine PT.

Next, the call lamp unit 620a will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. The call lamp portion 620a has a cylindrical shape with a diameter of about 35 mm, and is formed with a length close to the entire width of the table information display device Ka. The lamp mounting portions 622a at both ends of the calling lamp portion 620a are mounted on the side surface of the housing 611 below the stand information display device Ka.
The lamp housing portion 621a is formed in a columnar shape with a metal material such as stainless steel so as to cover the call display portion 623a. The lamp housing portion 621a is partially cut out at the center to expose the call display portion 623. The call display unit 623a is formed of a milky white or diamond-cut transparent resin, and transmits the light of the LED 625 mounted on the LED substrate 624 built in the call lamp unit 620a.
By attaching the lamp housing portion 621a of the calling lamp portion 620a to the table information display device Ka integrated with the work door as described above, the employee MS can easily lift the work door upward and the player It became easier for M to grab and stand up. In addition, since the gripping portion has a cylindrical shape, it is easy to grip. Further, by mounting the call lamp unit 620a in the horizontal direction on the table information display device Ka, the work door can be easily lifted upward.

A fingerprint reading device 627 for reading a fingerprint is provided in the center of the back surface of the lamp housing portion 621a. The fingerprint reading device 627 can read the fingerprint at the same time as holding the call lamp unit 620a. Therefore, the operation of releasing the electronic key and the operation of grasping the call lamp unit 620a and raising the table information display device Ka upward can be processed at the same time, so that the employee can proceed with the work quickly.
Inside the lamp housing portion 621a, a fingerprint authentication board 628 connected to the fingerprint reader 627, a touch sensor board 626, and an LED board 624 on which the LED 625 is mounted are provided. Each of these boards is controlled by the table information control board 601.

Does the touch sensor substrate 626 connected to the metal lamp housing 621a come into contact with the lamp housing 621a by using a capacitive touch sensor or a photoelectric photo sensor? Alternatively, the call display unit 623a can be turned on and controlled by a person holding his / her hand over it.
In this way, since the operation is as simple as a person touching it, the call display unit 623a can be turned on at the same time as holding the call lamp unit 620a, so that the call lamp unit 620a can be used by the player M and the employee MS. The operation of turning on the lamp and the operation of canceling the lighting are quick and easy.
In particular, the elderly player M can operate the call display unit 623a to be turned on and off at the same time as being held by the call lamp unit 620a when the player M stands up. Further, the employee MS can perform an operation of turning off the call display unit 623a at the same time as opening and closing the table information display device Ka.

The LED board 624 built in the call lamp unit 620a causes the LED 625 to emit red light or the like in response to a signal from the touch sensor board 626, and can be controlled by various patterns such as blinking and lighting. Then, by blinking or lighting the call display unit 623, it is possible to notify the employee MS to call.
In addition, at the time of a big hit, the function of lighting the call display unit 623 in rainbow colors by the output from the pachinko machine P, and the call display by connecting the call lamp unit 620a to the island edge as a runner function in cooperation with the adjacent call lamp unit 620a. It is also equipped with directing functions such as lighting the unit 623.
In this embodiment, the call lamp unit 620a is provided below the table information display device Ka, but the position where the table information display device Ka such as the center of the table information display device Ka can be easily opened and closed and the contents of the liquid crystal display unit 610 can be easily seen. If so, it is not necessary to limit the mounting location.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of the second modification of the table information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 188.
FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the table information display device Kb of Modification 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of a part of the platform information display device Kb and the pachinko machine P of the modified example 2 as viewed from the front side.

The table information display device Kb is roughly classified into a liquid crystal display unit 610, a housing 611, a call lamp unit 620b, a hinge 613, and an electronic key holding unit 614.
Since the same structure and function as those of the above-described modification 1 are designated by the same numbers, they are omitted, and the calling lamp unit 620ba, which is a different part, will be described in detail.
The table information display device Kb has a plurality of call lamp units 620b, and is provided in parallel in the vertical direction on the side of the table information display device Kb.
The stand information display device Kb can provide a space above the pachinko machine P by providing the call lamp unit 620b in the vertical direction to the side, and an accessory or the like is approaching above the pachinko machine P these days. However, it is possible to secure a space that does not come into contact.

Further, since the position where the call lamp unit 620b is turned on is also deviated from the center position of the pachinko machine P, it is easy for the player M to come into contact with the hand and turn on / off the call display unit 623b.
Further, by extending the lower end of the lamp housing portion 621b of the call lamp portion 620b in a direction closer to the player M, the player M can easily come into contact with the hand and turn on / off the call display portion 623b. ing.

In the lighting operation of the LED 625b (not shown), the two call display units 623b at both ends of the table information display device Kb are alternately blinked, so that the display is easy to see even from a distance. The position of the call display unit 623b is located in the line of sight of the employee MS, and the call display unit 623b extends long in the vertical direction, and two separate call display units 623b are lit across the large liquid crystal display unit 610b. Since it operates, the display operation looks large and it is easy to notify the employee MS.
The platform information display device Kb is configured with the width dimension of the pachinko machine P, but it can also be the width including peripheral devices such as the ball lending machine PT. Further dynamic display operation becomes possible, and it becomes easy to notify the employee MS.

<Modification example 3>
Next, the structure of the modification 3 of the table information display device K will be described with reference to 204.
FIG. 204 (A) is a front view showing the call lamp unit 620c, and FIG. 204 (B) is a rear view showing the call lamp unit 620c.
Since the same structures and functions as those of the above-described first and second modifications are designated by the same numbers, they are omitted, and the calling lamp unit 620c, which is a different portion, will be described in detail.
The call lamp portion 620c forms a columnar metal lamp housing portion 621c. The lamp housing portion 621c is partially cut out at both ends to expose the call display portion 623c. The call display unit 623c is formed of a milky white or diamond-cut transparent resin, and transmits the light of the LED 625 mounted on the LED substrate 624 (not shown) built in the call lamp unit 620c.
A fingerprint reader 627c for reading fingerprint authentication is provided in the center of the back surface of the lamp housing portion 621c. The fingerprint reading device 627c can read the fingerprint at the same time as holding the call lamp unit 620c.
Since the two call display units 623c separated from each other at both ends of the large liquid crystal display unit 610 are lit, the display operation looks large and it is easy to notify the employee MS.

In the modified examples 1, 2 and 3, the call lamp units 620a, 620b, and 620c are the stand information display device K as a work door with the liquid crystal display unit 610, but the call lamp unit does not include the liquid crystal display unit 610. A device or system that displays the information of the game machine in the 620 may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the device and system may be a work door 895 without a liquid crystal display unit 610 equipped with call lamp units 620a, b, and c. In that case, the information display of the game machine shall be a device and a system in which the platform information display device K is provided on the curtain plate 894 above the game machine as shown in FIG. 67 when the information display of the game machine is provided above the island facility HS. It is also possible.
In the modified examples 1, 2 and 3, the cross sections of the lamp housings 621a, 621b and 621c are circular, but they may be elliptical or quadrangular, as long as they are easy to grip as a handle.

(Display control of stand information display device)
Regarding the display control related to the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the table information display device K, refer to FIGS. 189 to 203, and since the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 show the same display contents, the table information display of the modified example 1 is performed. The device Ka will be described as an example. FIGS. 189 to 193 are front views showing a state in which a plurality of table information display devices Ka of the first modification 1 are arranged on the island facility HS and information is displayed. 194 to 196 are explanatory views showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the stand information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the stand information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of table information display data 644 used when controlling the table information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram for controlling the stand information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a manual display process when controlling the unit information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a manual transmission process when controlling the unit information display device Ka of the first modification. 202 and 203 are explanatory views showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the stand information display device Ka of the first modification.

FIG. 197 shows a block diagram of the stand information display device Ka. The main control of the table information display device Ka is performed by the table information control board 601. The stand information display device Ka has a CPU, ROM, RAM, and SSD built-in, and includes an electronic key holding unit 614, a transparent liquid crystal display board 612, a fingerprint reader 627, a fingerprint authentication board 628, an LED board 624, and a touch sensor board 626. I'm in control.
Further, the table information control board 601 is finally connected to the hall computer 90 via the table computer 93. The information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 and the maintenance information described later are transmitted from the hall computer 90 to the table information control board 601. Further, the table information control board 601 is connected to the transparent liquid crystal display board 612 that controls the liquid crystal display screen 891. Further, the table information control board 601 is also connected to the fingerprint reading device 627, the fingerprint authentication board 628, the LED board 624, and the touch sensor board 626 of the calling lamp unit 620a.

As shown in FIG. 189, each stand information display device Ka displays information on the game machine such as the number of big hits and the number of starts on the liquid crystal display unit 610. As a background background of the liquid crystal display unit 610, fish swimming in the sea are displayed as an effect over a plurality of stand information display devices Ka. These effect displays are controlled by the table information control board 601 in which adjacent table computers 93 are connected to each other and the neighbors are linked to each other. Further, it is also possible to display advertisements on a plurality of stand information display devices Ka installed on the island facility HS from one end to the other of the island facility by using the linked stand information control board 601. In this way, the island equipment has a large screen from one end to the other, which enables an impactful display as an advertisement display.
As shown in FIG. 190, not only the notification by the call lamp unit 620a but also the notification by the liquid crystal display unit 610 to call an employee is possible.

<Control of error display and processing method display of each device>
Next, control regarding the display when an error occurs due to a trouble in a device such as a game machine or a ball lending machine PT installed in the island facility HS and a display of a coping method is controlled with reference to FIGS. 191 to 201, and a sequence diagram and a flowchart. And an explanatory diagram will be described.

First, the manual display process (S3430) will be described as shown in FIGS. 199 and 200. If an error occurs in the target device (pachinko machine P, ball lending machine PT, ball polishing device 401, separator 410, etc.), the target device may go through the table computer 93 or directly from the table information display device Ka. An error code is sent to the platform information control board 601. Alternatively, when the employee MS notices it, it is possible to call the manual display by transmitting the error code 646 from the remote controller of the stand information control board 601 or the mobile terminal device 40 described above (S3466). When the machine information display device Ka receives the error code 646 (YES in S3431), the machine information display device Ka confirms the history of whether the same error code 646 was transmitted (S3432). When the same error code 646 is stored in the history (YES in S3433), the unit information display device Ka displays a coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434).

Further, when the same error code 646 is not saved in the history (NO in S3433), the stand information display device Ka inquires the hall computer 90 for the error code 646 (S3438). When the machine information display device Ka receives the manual data 649 from the hall computer 90 (S3438), it stores the manual data 649 (S3439) and displays the manual of the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434). The stand information display device Ka displays the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (NO in S3435, S3434) until the release signal of the error code 646 is received from the target device or the remote controller of the employee (YES in S3435). .. When the unit information display device Ka receives the release signal of the error code 646 from the target device or the remote controller of the employee (YES in S3435), the unit information display device Ka transmits the end signal to the hall computer 90 (S3436). Further, the machine information display device Ka simultaneously transmits the target device code 645 and the machine number data 648 of the machine information display device Ka to the hall computer 90 together with the end signal.

Next, the manual transmission process (S3440) will be described as shown in FIGS. 199 and 201. The hall computer 90 waits until there is an inquiry for error code 646 from the table information display device Ka (NO in S3441), and when it receives an inquiry from the table information display device Ka (YES in S3441), it outputs the error code 646. After confirmation (S3442), the manual data 649 is transmitted to the stand information display device Ka (S3443).
The hall computer 90 waits until the end signal is sent from the stand information display device Ka (NO in S3444), and when it receives the end signal from the stand information display device Ka (YES in S3444), as an example of transmission / reception recording. The table information display data 644 shown in FIG. 198 is recorded (S3445).

FIG. 198 shows an example of the stand information display data 644. The machine information display data 644 is recorded in the hall computer 90, and the above-mentioned event code 644, target device code 645, error code 646, occurrence time data 647, machine number data 648 of the machine information display device Ka, and manual data 649. Etc. are recorded. In this way, the previous record can be recalled at any time to display the manual, and the manual data 649 can be customized independently.
The stored manual data 649 also includes data originally created and data obtained by downloading a manual for repair or the like from the manufacturer of each device including the pachinko machine P or the like from the manufacturer's homepage via the Internet.

Further, FIGS. 194 to 196 show an example of the manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the table information display device Ka under the control described above.
FIG. 194 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the pachinko machine information display device Ka when the pachinko ball Q is not replenished in the upper tank of the pachinko machine P. The manual display 640 shows the target device simulated display 634 as a display that imitates the target device so that it can be easily understood by an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device. As for the manual display 640, the target device simulated display 634 shows an error location display 635 indicating an abnormality at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the upper tank of the pachinko machine P and the remedy are described as "Open and close the stand information display device and shake the bellows."

FIG. 195 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the stand information display device Ka when bills cannot be inserted into the bill collection device of the ball lending machine PT. The manual display 640 shows the target device simulated display 634A as a display that imitates the target device so that it can be easily understood by an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device. Then, the target device simulated display 634A shows an error location display 635A indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the bill collecting device of the ball lending machine PT and the coping method are described as "Open the pachinko machine P, take out the ball lending machine, and check the bill collecting part."

FIG. 196 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka when the pachinko balls are not paid out as prize balls from the payout device of the pachinko machine P. The manual display 640 shows the target device simulated display 634B as a display that imitates the target device so that it can be easily understood by an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device. Then, the target device simulated display 634B shows an error location display 635B indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the payout device of the pachinko machine P and "1. Open the pachinko machine and check the clogging of the payout device on the back." "2. Turn off the power and unlock the payout device. Please clear the clogging. " In addition, the stand information display device Ka has an additional position display 638B that shows the shape of the payout device so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device can understand the details, and an operation position display that displays the operation position of the lock for unlocking. The position 638B is displayed.

The additional position display 638B, the operation position display position 638B, or the display of the coping method of "1. ..." and "2. ..." may be displayed at the same time, but the additional position display 638B, the operation position display position 638B, or ". "1 ..." and "2. ..." can be displayed according to the procedure for performing the work. If the display is performed according to the procedure, even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device will have few mistakes and the work will be easy to understand, and troubles can be dealt with quickly. At that time, the display may be switched in order by a remote controller or the like, or the order may be automatically switched at regular intervals to display. It is also possible to switch the order of work procedures by sending signals from each device such as a game machine.

Next, when the ball lending machine PT or the pachinko machine P is performed from the separator 410 via the replenishment bellows (411, 412), the ball lending machine PT or the pachinko machine P indicates that the replenishment bellows (411, 412) or the like is clogged. An example of displaying a clogged portion when is detected will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193.
As described above, the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the table information display device Ka is equipped with a liquid crystal display screen 891 whose back surface can be transmitted by control, and a part or all of the liquid crystal display screen 891 is covered by the transparent liquid crystal display board 612. It is possible to control the transparency and display the object on the back side.
As shown in FIG. 191, the liquid crystal display unit 610 makes a part of the liquid crystal display unit 610 transparent. The liquid crystal display unit 610 is provided with an error location display 630 in which the location of the actual separator 410 on the back surface is surrounded by a shape such as a red circle and the inside is made transparent. The error location display 630 is provided with a confirmation display unit 631 indicated by a red circle border so that the employee MS can easily understand it. In this way, the employee MS can easily display the actual abnormal part without opening and closing the table information display device Ka, so that the processing can be performed quickly.

As shown in FIG. 192, the liquid crystal display unit 610 includes not only the separator 410 which makes the entire surface of the liquid crystal display unit 610 transparent and serves as the actual error location display 630 on the back surface, but also the replenishment bellows (411, 412). The whole can be displayed.
As described above, the employee MS can check at a glance which of the plurality of stand information display devices Ka is abnormal on the back surface of the stand information display device Ka without opening and closing the stand information display device Ka. Further, since the player M displays the minimum number of big hits and the number of starts as the information of the game machine, the information of the game machine can be confirmed regardless of the trouble.
In addition, as described above, when all or a part of the liquid crystal display unit 610 is made transparent and the actual abnormal part is displayed, the manual display unit 640 and the error part display 630 are simultaneously displayed on the same liquid crystal display unit 610. By doing so, the employee MS can confirm the abnormal part and the coping method at the same time, so even the employee MS who is unfamiliar with the equipment can easily understand the abnormal part and the work procedure, and can quickly deal with the trouble. It can be carried out.

As shown in FIG. 193, the liquid crystal display unit 610 makes the entire surface of the plurality of liquid crystal display units 610 transparent, and not only the separator 410 which becomes the actual error location display 630 on the back surface, but also the replenishment bellows (411, 412). The whole can be displayed including.
As described above, the employee MS can confirm at a glance which of the plurality of table information display devices Ka is abnormal on the back surface of the device information display device Ka without opening and closing the table information display device Ka. In addition, it is possible to inspect whether there is any abnormality after the store is closed without opening and closing the stand information display device Ka.

Next, as other functions of the liquid crystal display unit 610, FIGS. 202 and 203 show a function of moving a display portion of information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610.
FIGS. 202 (A) and 202 (B) show how the position for displaying the number of jackpots is moved. The liquid crystal display unit 610 can operate the display screen with a touch panel type by a capacitance type or a photoelectric type photosensor type. As shown in FIG. 202 (A), the jackpot count display unit 641 can be changed to the position shown in FIG. 202 (B) by touching and moving it with the hand ha.

Further, although the background pattern 642 has a picture of "octopus", the jackpot count display unit 641 is arranged at an upper position in preference to the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves below the empty area. In addition to moving in this way, the jackpot count display section 641 can be set in preference to the background pattern 642 by setting the jackpot count display section 641 on the upper layer. As described above, by allowing the jackpot count display unit 641 to be set with priority over the background pattern 642, the information desired by the player M can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner.
When the player M sitting on the chair C is viewed from below, the game information such as the number of jackpots displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 by the protruding accessory on the upper part of the pachinko machine P and the lamp display unit If it cannot be confirmed, the game information can be easily confirmed by moving the position of the jackpot count display unit 641 upward.

As shown in FIG. 203 (A), the manual display unit 640 can be changed to the position shown in FIG. 203 (B) by touching and moving the manual display unit 640 with a hand ha.
The employee MS, who is sitting on the chair C and solving problems such as a game machine, displays the manual when the manual display unit 640 is difficult to see because it is too close or too far when viewed from below. The unit 640 can be freely moved up, down, left and right. With the above configuration, by changing the position of the manual display unit 640 so that it is easy to see, the employee MS can easily see the manual and can easily work while looking at the manual.

Further, although the background pattern 642 has a picture of "octopus", the manual display unit 640 is arranged at an upper position in preference to the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves below the empty area. In addition to moving in this way, the manual display unit 640 can be set in preference to the background pattern 642 by setting the manual display unit 640 on the upper layer. As described above, by allowing the manual display unit 640 to be set with priority over the background pattern 642, the information desired by the employee MS can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner.

Further, in addition to the jackpot count display unit 641 and the manual display unit 640, an operation button for lighting the notification function of the call lamp 620 can be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610, and the set position of the operation button can be moved. Is. In this way, when it is difficult to press the operation button due to the protruding accessory or the lamp display on the upper part of the pachinko machine P, the player M changes the setting position of the operation button to set it to a position where it is easy to press. It is also possible to change.

(Counting unit)
The counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. The ball lending machine PT is provided with a counting unit 805 at the bottom, which receives pachinko balls (game medium) acquired by the player M from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P and can be counted by the counting counter 806. The ball lending machine PT counts the number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 as a holding ball, and displays the number of balls currently stored by the ball holding number display unit 802d.
In the counting unit 805, a storage portion formed in a square box shape is provided below the lower plate of the pachinko machine. The pachinko balls accommodated by the accommodating portion are accommodated in the lower part of the ball lending machine PT through the counting passage portion communicating with the accommodating portion, and the accommodated pachinko balls are counted by the counting counter 806. Further, the counted pachinko balls can be used when playing as a holding ball, and can be paid out from the pachinko machine P by operating the ball lending machine PT.

(Modification example of counting unit)
A modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described, but the parts having the same structure will be described with the same reference numerals.
<Modification example 1>
Next, the structure of the first modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 210.
FIG. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805a of the first modification is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 206 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 208 is a side view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AB of the counting unit 805a of the first modification shown in FIG. 209.

FIG. 205 shows a state in which the counting unit 805a is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805a is arranged below the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating portion 858 which is a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening 856 that is opened in a circular shape so that the stored pachinko balls can flow to the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859. Further, when counting pachinko balls from the lower plate 857, the lower plate opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower plate shutter 859 left and right, and the pachinko balls are dropped into the accommodating portion 710.

Next, the counting unit 805a will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. The counting unit 805a is roughly divided into an accommodating portion 710, a counting passage portion 720a, a lock mechanism portion 730a, a rotating passage portion 740a, and a counting strut portion 750. The details of the accommodating portion 710 and the counting strut portion 750 will be described later.

First, the counting passage portion 720a has a box-shaped first passage portion 721a whose length can be adjusted in four stages and a box-shaped second passage portion having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a. It is formed of 722a. By forming the counting passage portion 720a with the box-shaped second passage portion 722a having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a, the counting passage portion 720a can be formed without exposing the pachinko balls to the outside. The length can be adjusted, and pachinko balls can be transported without mischief or goto.
The first aisle section 721a and the second aisle section 722a receive the pachinko balls from the accommodating section 710 and head toward the ball lending machine PT from the accommodating section 710 in order to roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT with a natural gradient. The first passage 725a and the second passage 726a shown in FIG. 210 having a downward slope are provided. The inclination of the first passage 725a and the second passage 726a is preferably about 5% (angle of about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle of about 5.71 degrees).

The first passage portion 721a communicates with the accommodating portion 710 by the accommodating portion connecting passage 724a which is a box-shaped passage. As shown in FIG. 210, the first passage portion 721a is provided with four adjusting holes 734a on the ceiling surface at regular intervals. The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a are fixed by fitting the fixing piece 732a protruding from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a into the adjusting hole 734a. The length of the first passage portion 721a can be adjusted in four steps within the distance of L1 depending on the position where the fixed piece 732a is inserted.

The second passage portion 722a is provided with a circular covering portion 728a integrally formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the columnar rotating passage 741a supported by the counting column portion 750. The circular covering portion 728a of the second passage portion 722a is provided by notching a part thereof, and has a structure that rotates about the center line X of the rotating passage portion 740a shown in FIG. 210.
As shown in FIG. 209, the rotation angle α1 can be rotated up to about 90 degrees. Therefore, by rotating the first passage portion 721a, the second passage portion 722a, and the accommodating portion 710, the pachinko machine P When moving the machine, the parts of the counting unit 805a are not removed, and when the pachinko machine P is replaced, the counting unit 805a can be easily attached.

Further, as described above, since the length of the counting unit 805a can be adjusted and can be rotated, the lower plate opening 856 of the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P can be rotated at any position. The counting unit 805a can align the center of the accommodating portion 710 with the center of the lower plate 857 of any pachinko machine P by adjusting the length and the angle. Therefore, since the center of the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805a can be aligned with the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P, the pachinko ball can be installed in a state where it does not bounce and spill. Therefore, the accommodating portion 710 is not affected by the position of the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P lower plate 857, and can be formed compactly.

Next, the rotary passage portion 740a is connected to the ball lending machine connecting passage 723a communicating below the ball lending machine PT. As shown in FIG. 210, the rotary passage portion 740a includes a rotary passage 741a provided with a space 743a through which pachinko balls pass inside a columnar shape. The rotary passage portion 740a is provided with a lock mechanism portion 730a above.

The lock mechanism portion 730a includes a key cylinder lock 739a, and a key (not shown) can be inserted to switch between locking and unlocking. In the case of locking, the rotation of the circular covering portion 728a is fixed. The rotation of the circular covering portion 728a is fixed by inserting the fixing pin 738a, which is a piece connected to the key cylinder lock 739a, into the fixing groove 727a provided in the circular covering portion 728a.

Further, in the case of locking, the urging fixing piece 326a, which is a piece connected to the key cylinder lock 739a, fixes the vertical movement of the upward urging means 737a formed on a spring, rubber or the like and urging upward. .. Therefore, the lengths of the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a cannot be adjusted because the fixing piece 732a protruding from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a fits into the adjustment hole 734a and the vertical movement is fixed. The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a are fixed.
Then, until the key cylinder lock 739a is unlocked, the fixed piece insertion hole 733a is prohibited from moving up and down. Therefore, the storage unit 710 is moved to count the pachinko balls brought in from other corners or stores. Such acts can be prohibited. Further, as shown in FIG. 205, a fixed piece cover 735a is provided as a cover for covering the fixed piece 732a so that the fixed piece 732a is not operated by mischief or the like.

As described above, the rotation of the circular covering portion 728a is prohibited by locking, and at the same time, the adjustment of the lengths of the first aisle portion 721a and the second aisle portion 722a is prohibited, so that from other corners or other stores It is possible to prohibit the act of counting the pachinko balls brought in by the player, and it is possible to deal with mischief.
Further, by unlocking the lock, the counting unit 805a can freely rotate to the pachinko machine P and adjust the length, so that the accommodating portion 710 can be adjusted to the center of the drop port of the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to prevent the pachinko ball from falling from the counter unit 805a due to the jumping of the pachinko ball, and it is easy to replace the pachinko machine P or the like.

As shown in FIG. 68, the lock mechanism unit 730a is electrically connected to the ball lending machine PT, and by adopting an electronic key, the lock mechanism unit is operated by the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. It is possible to lock and unlock the 730a. Further, the lock mechanism unit 730a can be locked and unlocked by operating from the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 via the interface 808 and the stand computer 93.
Further, the lock state detection sensor 744a shown in FIGS. 68 and 210 detects the locked / unlocked state of the lock mechanism unit 730a, and the locked state can be grasped from the hall computer 90.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of the second modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 218. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805b of the second modification is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. 212 and 213 are perspective views showing the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 214 is a side view showing the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CDE of the counting unit 805b of the modification 2 shown in FIG. 215. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing a locking mechanism 731b of the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a locking mechanism 731b of the counting unit 805b of the second modification.

FIG. 211 shows a state in which the counting unit 805b is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805b is arranged below the lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating portion 858 which is a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening 856 that opens in a circular shape for allowing the stored pachinko balls to flow into the storage portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859, and when counting pachinko balls from the lower plate 857, the lower plate shutter 859 is opened by sliding left and right to the accommodating portion 710. The pachinko ball is being dropped.

Next, the counting unit 805b will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 218. The counting unit 805b is roughly divided into an accommodating portion 710, a counting passage portion 720b, a lock mechanism portion 730b, a rotating mechanism portion 770b, a connecting passage portion 741b, and a counting strut portion 750. The details of the accommodating portion 710 and the counting strut portion 750 will be described later.

First, as shown in FIGS. 211 to 215, the counting passage portion 720b is formed in a substantially S shape from the accommodating portion 710 to the ball lending machine PT, and is hollow so that pachinko balls can pass through the inside. Is provided, and an enclosed arc-shaped passage is formed. The counting passage portion 720b is composed of an enclosed arc-shaped first passage portion 721b, a second passage portion 722b, and a third passage portion 723b. Further, in order to receive the pachinko balls from the accommodating portion 710 and roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT with a natural gradient, as shown in FIG. The first passage 725b to the third passage 727b are provided. The inclination of the first passage 725b to the third passage 727b is about 5% (angle of about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle of about 5.71 degrees).

As shown in FIG. 216, the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b have a joint portion 741b having a size covering the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b) at the end of each passage portion (721b to 723b). It is provided. As shown in FIG. 216, the joint portion 741b can slide the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b) within a range of length L2.
Since the counting passage portion 720b is provided with a joint portion 741b having a size covering the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b), the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b are provided without exposing the pachinko balls to the outside. The length of the can be adjusted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 to 218, the side walls of the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b are fixed to the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b of the lock mechanism portion 730b and the rotation mechanism portion 770b. By rotating the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b within the range of the length R1 (FIG. 215), the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b can be slidably moved within the range of the length L2 (FIG. 215). 216).
The first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b formed in an S shape in this way can form the entire passage compactly. Further, since the counting unit 805b can be moved by sliding the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b along the arc, not only the length but also the angle can be adjusted at the same time, so that various pachinko machines can be adjusted. It is also possible to install the accommodating portion 710 in the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the lower plate 857 of P.

The lock mechanism portion 730b employs the key cylinder lock 739b of the mechanism (739a in FIG. 210) described above, and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b is fixed by operating a key (not shown).
Further, as shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the rotation mechanism portion 770b is composed of a rotation outer peripheral portion 772b and a rotation support column portion 771b. The rotation outer peripheral portion 772b can rotate about the central axis of the rotary strut portion 771b. Inside the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b, eight inner peripheral protruding claws 778b protruding from the inner circumference toward the center are arranged in a circumferential shape. The inner peripheral protruding claw 778b comes into contact with the tips of the eight outer peripheral protruding claws 773b provided on the rotary strut portion 771b, rotates the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b with a little resistance, and gets over the tips of the outer peripheral protruding claws 773b. Move while.

As shown in FIGS. 68, 217 and 218, the tip of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth to a position where the tip of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b cannot get over the tip of the outer peripheral protruding claw 773b. It moves and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed.
The fixed claw 775b has a structure in which one end of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth by being fixed by a support shaft 776 inside the rotary support column portion 771b and rotating around the support shaft. Further, the other end of the fixed claw 775b is connected to the guide piece 777b connected to the solenoid SO, and is interlocked with the movement of the solenoid SO, and one end of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth.

As described above, the rotation mechanism portion 770b has a structure in which the fixing claw 775b protrudes and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed by the vertical movement of the solenoid SO electrically connected as shown in FIG. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 68, power is supplied from the ball lending machine PT, and the lock state detection sensor 744a (FIGS. 68 and 210) detects the rotation operation of the key of the lock mechanism unit 730b, whereby the solenoid is used. It is possible to operate the SO and fix the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b. Further, it is possible to operate not only from the ball lending machine PT but also from the hall computer, the table information display device K, or the remote controller.
As described above, since it is possible to easily perform the operation of fixing the rotation of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b with respect to the change of the position of the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805b, the installation position of the accommodating portion 710 can be changed to other corners or other corners. It is possible to prohibit the act of counting pachinko balls brought in from other stores, which makes it easier to deal with mischief and the like, and also makes it easier to install the pachinko machine P when replacing it.

The rotary outer peripheral portion 772b is mounted above the rotary pedestal 774b, but the rotary outer peripheral portion 772b can be attached to the rotary strut portion 771b by attaching / detaching a component (773b or the like) above the rotary pedestal 774b upward. It has a structure that can be inserted and attached.

<Modification example 3>
Next, the structure of the third modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3 is mounted on the pachinko machine P. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3 mounted on the pachinko machine P. FIG. 221 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3 is disassembled. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805c of the modified example 3. 225 (A) shows a cross section of the counting passage portion 720c cut along the FG line of FIG. 224, and FIG. 225 (B) shows the first passage 727c seen from the left side surface side of FIG. 225 (A). A front view is shown, and FIG. 225 (C) shows a layout view of the first passage portion 721c. FIG. 225 (D) shows a state in which the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right, and a state in which the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right is represented by a broken line.

The counting unit 805c is roughly divided into a lower plate cover portion 760, an accommodating portion 710, a counting passage portion 720c, and a rotating passage portion 740c. The details of the accommodating portion 710 will be described later.

First, the lower plate cover portion 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 223. The lower plate cover portion 760 is composed of a lower plate cover 761 that matches the shape of the lower plate 857, an accommodating portion cover 762, a first connecting portion 763, and a second connecting portion 764.
219 and 220 show a state in which the counting unit 805c is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The lower plate cover 761 is arranged above the lower plate 857 formed in a box shape having an upper opening. The lower plate cover 761 is formed in a square shape in accordance with the shape of the lower plate 857 formed in a square shape when viewed from a plane.
By making the lower plate cover 761 according to the shape of the lower plate 857, it becomes impossible to put the pachinko balls into the lower plate 857, and it is possible to prevent the act of bringing in the pachinko balls and counting them. .. The lower plate cover 761 is formed to be one size larger than the lower plate 857 so that it can be easily attached to the lower plate 857.
The material of the lower plate cover 761 may be resin, metal, or the like, but is not particularly limited, and by forming the lower plate cover 761 with a transparent resin, it is possible to confirm whether the pachinko balls are discharged from the pachinko machine P.

The accommodating portion cover 762 covers the gap between the accommodating portion 710 and the lower plate 857, and at the same time, connects the lower plate cover 761 and the accommodating portion 710. The accommodating portion cover 762 is formed to match the shape of the side surface of the lower plate 857. The accommodating portion cover 762 is formed in consideration of the position and size in which the lower plate shutter 859 provided on the lower plate 857 can be slid to the left and right.
The accommodating portion cover 762 has a lower plate cover 761 fixed upward and a second connecting portion 764 fixed to the side surface. The material of the housing cover 762 is not limited, and may be soft urethane or hard resin. Further, a key cylinder lock 765 into which a key (not shown) can be inserted is provided at the upper end of the second connecting portion 764.

The first connecting portion 763 is fixed to the side surface of the accommodating portion 710, and the connecting portion fitting portion 766 is provided at the upper end thereof. The connecting portion fitting portion 766 can be inserted into the lower end of the second connecting portion 764 and fitted. The structure is such that the fitting cannot be released by operating the key cylinder lock 765 of the second connecting portion 764. In this way, since the lower plate cover 761 to the accommodating portion 710 can be integrally fixed and locked, it becomes impossible to put the pachinko balls into the lower plate 857 and the accommodating portion 710, and the pachinko balls are brought in. It is possible to prevent the act of counting. Further, since the lower plate cover 761 and the accommodating portion cover 762 cannot be easily attached and detached because they are locked, it also prevents mischief and goto acts.
Further, since the accommodating portion 710 can integrally fix the lower plate cover 761 to the accommodating portion 710, the accommodating portion 710 can be fixed in close contact with the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to prevent the ball from jumping and falling from the accommodating portion 710.
The lower plate cover portion 760 can be applied not only to the modified example 3 but also to the modified examples 1 and 2.

Next, the counting passage portion 720c will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 225. The counting passage portion 720c is composed of a first passage portion 721c and a second passage portion 722c.
The first passage portion 721c communicates with the accommodating portion 710 by an accommodating portion connecting passage 724c which is a box-shaped passage.
The first passage portion 721c is connected to a plurality of first passages 727c formed in a conical shape and having both ends open. The first passage 727c has a conical shape in which the tip on the second passage portion 722c side is narrowed and the rear end is widened. The first passage 727c is provided with shaft support pins 729c at the tip thereof up and down, and the shaft support pins 729c are pivotally supported in holes provided in the intermediate portion of the other first passage 727c. In this way, it is possible to freely move left and right with the shaft support pin 729c as the fulcrum by axially viewing at two points. Therefore, the first passage portion 721c can be bent to the left and right at an extremely fine angle (FIG. 225 (D)).

Further, the first passage portion 721c is provided with two guide passages 728c formed below a plurality of first passages 727c and made of a bendable material such as metal or resin. The guide passage 728c is provided in a rail shape so that the pachinko balls can roll to the second passage portion 722c, and the inclination of the guide passage 728c is 5% (angle of about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle of about 5). It is formed with a gradient of about .71 degrees). Further, the guide passage 728c can be bent according to the bending of the first passage portion 721c.
Since the first passage portion 721c can be bent to the left and right in this way, in the installation of the accommodating portion 710, the accommodating portion 710 is installed at the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the lower plate 857 of various pachinko machines P. It is also possible to do.

The second passage portion 722c whose one end communicates with the first passage portion 721c is a columnar passage, and the other end is connected to the rotary passage portion 740c. The rotating passage portion 740c communicates below the ball lending machine PT, and the pachinko balls that have passed through the rotating passage portion 740c are counted inside the ball lending machine PT. Further, the rotary passage portion 740c can rotate and move the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c, and the accommodating portion 710 by adopting the same structure as the rotary passage portion 740a (FIG. 210).
By rotating the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c, and the accommodating portion 710, the parts of the counting unit 805c are not removed except for the lower plate cover portion 760 when the pachinko machine P is moved. Further, when the pachinko machine P is replaced, the counting unit 805c can be easily attached.

<Modification of the accommodating part in the counting unit>
The accommodating portion 710 of the modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described, but the above-described modified examples 1 to 3 will be described with the same reference numerals where the structures are the same. Needless to say, the accommodating portion 710 described below can be applied to the modified examples 1 to 3.
226 and 227 are cross-sectional views showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modified example. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modified example. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls in the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modified example.

The accommodating portion 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207 and 226 to 229. The accommodating portion 710 is formed in a shape in which the upper end of the cylinder is open, and accommodates the pachinko balls Q that fall from the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P. The inside of the accommodating portion 710 is formed in a circular shape, and the pachinko ball Q can be guided in an arc shape by forming the inside in a circular shape, so that the pachinko ball Q can be guided in a spiral shape. It is a shape that makes it easy.
The accommodating portion 710 is provided with a first receiving portion 714, a second receiving portion 715, a third receiving portion 716, and a fourth receiving portion 717, which are divided into four equal parts when viewed from a plane. The first receiving portion 714 becomes the second receiving portion 715, the third receiving portion 716, and the fourth receiving portion 717 in the highest order, and the first receiving portion 714, the second receiving portion 715, and the third receiving portion 716 and so on. A step is provided between the fourth receiving portion 717 and the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 so that the pachinko ball Q can be easily received.

As shown in FIG. 227, in the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715, the first receiving portion 714 is raised, and the temperature is about 2.85 degrees from the first receiving portion 714 toward the second receiving portion 715. There is a slope. Further, the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715 are each provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees from the outside toward the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717.
Further, below the first receiving portion 714, a receiving portion connecting port 719 which is connected to the accommodating portion connecting passage 724 and guides the pachinko ball Q to the accommodating portion connecting passage 724 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717, the third receiving portion 716 is raised, and the degree is about 5 to 6 degrees from the third receiving portion 716 toward the fourth receiving portion 717. There is a slope. Further, a step is provided between the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717, and is provided to surely guide the pachinko ball Q to the receiving portion passage 718. The receiving portion passage 718 is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees toward the receiving portion connecting port 719 in order to guide the pachinko ball Q from the receiving portion connecting port 719 to the accommodating portion connecting passage 724.

As shown in FIG. 229, the formed accommodating portion 710 receives the pachinko ball Q that has fallen from the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P and guides it to the receiving portion communication port 719.
In FIG. 229, as a state in which the pachinko ball Q rolls, a path LO1 indicating a path in which the ball rolls is shown by a solid line. Further, when the pachinko ball Q falls into the accommodating portion 710, the rolling direction RA1 of the first receiving portion 714, the rolling direction RA2 of the second receiving portion, and the third receiving portion are the directions in which the pachinko ball Q rolls. The rolling direction RA3 of the above and the rolling direction RA4 of the fourth receiving portion are indicated by solid arrows.

In this way, the pachinko ball Q rolls while drawing a spiral according to the inclination of the accommodating portion 710, so that the pachinko ball Q is smoothly guided to the receiving portion contact port 719 while being aligned over time, so that the pachinko ball Q may be clogged. It is possible to compactly mold the accommodating portion 710 itself in order to align the pachinko balls Q in three dimensions. Further, there is an advantage that the pachinko ball Q can be reliably guided by each step provided in the accommodating portion 710. Further, since the pachinko ball Q can be guided in an arc shape by forming the inside of the accommodating portion 710 in a circular shape, the ball can be easily guided in a spiral shape.
As described above, since the accommodating portion 710 itself can be formed compactly, the accommodating portion 710 can be installed at the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the lower plate 857 of various pachinko machines P.
A shock absorbing material may be attached to the surfaces of the first receiving portion 714 to the fourth receiving portion 717 of the accommodating portion 710 in order to suppress the impact and vibration of the pachinko ball Q. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from jumping and deterioration of the accommodating portion 710 due to the impact of the resin or metal.

Next, the counting column portion 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228. Although the structure of the counting column portion 750 is adopted in the modified examples 1 and 2, it may be used not only for the accommodating portion 710 but also for the lock mechanism portions 730a and 730b and the rotating mechanism portion 770b.
The counting column portion 750 is provided with a circular base portion 757 to be placed on a counter provided in the island facility HS. The base portion 757 is provided with a cylindrical spring accommodating portion 755, and the spring 753 is built in the spring accommodating portion 755. Further, the accommodating portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical foot portion 712 that is one size larger than the spring accommodating portion 755, and can be fitted with the spring accommodating portion 755. Further, the accommodating portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical spring strut 754 that can be inserted into the inner diameter of the spring 753 at the center of the accommodating portion 710. The spring strut 754 functions to prevent the spring strut 754 from falling off from the spring 753.

As described above, the accommodating portion 710 is constantly urged toward the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P by the spring 753 built in the counting column portion 750, so that the accommodating portion 710 is in close contact with the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. Become. With such a structure, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from jumping and falling from the accommodating portion 710.

Further, a lower plate contact portion 711 formed of elastic rubber (silicon rubber or the like) is provided around the upper portion of the accommodating portion 710. The lower plate contact portion 711 has a function as a cushioning material between the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P and the accommodating portion 710, and urges the accommodating portion 710 to the pachinko machine P side to the pachinko machine P. Can be in close contact. With such a structure, the lower plate contact portion 711 does not damage the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P even if the accommodating portion 710 is brought into close contact with the pachinko machine P, so that the adhesion with the pachinko machine P is improved. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from falling from the accommodating portion 710 due to the jumping.

<Modification example 4>
Next, a modification 4 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 243. FIG. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4. FIG. 232 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805d in the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q is returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780d. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805d in which the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d are cut by the LM line shown in FIG. 231. FIG. 234 is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4 is enlarged and the pachinko ball Q is returned. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls by enlarging a part of the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls. FIG. 238 is a side view of the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls. FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko ball Q of the counting unit 805d, which is obtained by cutting the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d by the OP line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 240 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko ball Q of the counting unit 805d, which is obtained by cutting the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d by the OP line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 241 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko ball Q of the counting unit 805d, in which the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d are cut by the OP line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an individual count return process in the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4. FIG. 243 is a schematic view showing a state of switching passages in the counting unit 805d of the modified example 4.

FIG. 230 shows a state in which the counting unit 805b is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805d is arranged below the lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating portion 858 which is a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening 856 (not shown) having a circular opening for flowing the stored pachinko ball Q into the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859, and when counting pachinko balls Q from the lower plate 857, the lower plate shutter 859 is opened by sliding the lower plate shutter 859 left and right to open the storage portion. The pachinko ball Q is dropped on the 710d, and the pachinko ball Q is counted by the counting counter 806 inside the ball lending machine PT via the counting passage section 720d and the ball lending machine connecting passage section 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, the counting unit 805d is roughly classified into a storage unit 710d, a counting passage unit 720d, a return plate 780d, and a ball lending machine connecting passage unit 740d described later.
As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box-shaped accommodating portion 710d receives a large amount of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749d inclined toward the accommodating portion passage 745d. A cushioning material such as rubber or urethane is laid on the bottom plate 749d in order to cushion the impact from the pachinko ball Q falling from the lower plate 857. Further, the bottom plate 749d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the accommodating passage 745d. The accommodating passage 745d forms a groove-shaped passage that guides the pachinko ball Q below the bottom plate 749d, and is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747d. Further, the accommodating passage 745d communicates with the lower passage 747d of the counting passage 720d.

Next, the counting passage portion 720d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 241.
The upper passage 746d and the lower passage 747d are the main passages of the counting passage portion 720d. Each of the upper passage 746d and the lower passage 747d is an enclosed passage, and each communicates with the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d, which will be described later.
As shown in FIGS. 233, 234 and 239, the upper passage 746d is a passage that guides the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780d. The upper passage 746d has an upper connecting passage 787d communicating with the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d and an upper conversion passage 786d that changes the direction of the pachinko ball Q rolling from the upper connecting passage 787d and connects to the return port 748d. It is provided.

The upper connecting passage 787d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the upper conversion passage 786d. Further, the upper conversion passage 786d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the return port 748d. A step is provided between the upper connecting passage 787d and the upper conversion passage 786d, so that the direction of the pachinko ball Q can be easily changed. The return port 748d has a rectangular opening formed above the return plate 780d.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 234 and 239, the lower passage 747d is a passage that guides the pachinko ball Q from the accommodating portion 710d to the ball lender PT. The lower passage 747d has a lower connecting passage 789d having one end communicating with the accommodating passage 745d and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine connecting passage 740d, and a pachinko ball Q collected from the collection port 783d of the return plate 780d. A lower conversion passage 791d that changes the direction and communicates with the lower connecting passage 789d is provided.

The lower connecting passage 789d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d. Further, the lower conversion passage 791d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees from the collection port 783d toward the lower connecting passage 789d.
A first step 793d, which is equal to or slightly larger than the thickness of the movable return passage 784d, is provided between the lower connecting passage 789d and the accommodating portion passage 745d. By providing the first step 793d, it is possible to guide the pachinko ball Q in the movable return passage 784d without staying.
A second step 799d, which is a step, is provided between the lower connecting passage 789d and the lower conversion passage 791d. By providing the second step 799d, it is possible to guide the pachinko ball Q to the lower part conversion passage 791d without causing the pachinko ball Q to flow backward, and to guide the pachinko ball Q passing through the lower connecting passage 789d without staying.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 238 and 240, the movable return passage 784d is a substantially L-shaped passage, the L-shaped bent passage faces the collection port 783d, and the long passage is the lower part. It is provided at a position above the connecting passage 789d. The long passage of the movable return passage 784d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees along the slope of the lower connecting passage 789d. Further, the L-shaped bent short passage is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the return plate shutter 782d of the return plate 780d. The tip of the movable return passage 784d facing the lower connecting passage 789d is formed with a triangular guide piece 792d which is a piece protruding in a substantially triangular shape. The triangular guide piece 792d guides the pachinko ball Q that has rolled from the accommodating passage 745d to the return plate shutter 782d.
One side of the movable return passage 784d is connected to the movable return passage solenoid SOd so that it can move up and down. Further, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is fixed at a position that does not interfere with the rolling of the pachinko ball Q in the lower connecting passage 789d.
By allowing the movable return passage 784d to move up and down in this way, the movable return passage 784d for carrying the lower connecting passage 789d when counting the pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q housed in the accommodating portion 710d Since it is possible to compactly configure the counting passage portion 720d by arranging the counting units vertically, the entire counting unit 805d can be compactly provided.

Next, the return plate 780d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. The return plate 780d is a plate that accommodates the pachinko ball Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko ball Q returned from the storage unit 710d. The return plate 780d is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage portion 720d, and is provided with a storage bowl 781d capable of accommodating about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. The return plate 780d is returned from the ball lending machine PT by being provided at a position between the accommodating unit 710 and the ball lending machine PT, unlike the position of the accommodating portion 710 that accommodates the pachinko ball Q from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to secure a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls Q to be produced, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls from the lower plate 857.
Therefore, since the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return plate 780d, a preliminary pachinko used when purchasing food and drink in the store by the pachinko ball Q or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as storage for ball Q. This is particularly effective for pachinko machines P that do not have a lower plate 857 or have a small capacity for storing pachinko balls.

The storage bowl 781d has a structure in which the inner surface is formed in a mortar shape and the pachinko balls Q are gathered on the bottom surface. Further, on the side surface of the accommodating bowl 781d, an open collection port 783d communicating with the lower conversion passage 791d of the counting passage portion 720d is provided.
Further, the return plate 780d is provided with a return plate shutter 782d formed on the bottom in the same shape as the collection port 783d. The return plate shutter 782d has a triangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the side surface, and the angle can be changed in three stages around the support shaft 785d by the rotary solenoid RS connected to the support shaft 785d.
The return plate shutter 782d serves as a shutter for fastening the pachinko ball Q stored in the return plate 780d by changing the angle, and returns the pachinko ball Q stored in the return plate 780d to the ball lending machine PT. It can fulfill three functions: the role of the passage and the role of the passage for accommodating the pachinko ball Q from the accommodating portion 710d in the accommodating bowl 781.

In this way, by configuring the roles of a number of passages with one member, the entire counting unit 805d can be compactly provided without complication.
Further, by providing the return plate shutter 782d, the pachinko ball Q can be accommodated in the return plate 780d without forming a useless flow of the pachinko ball Q.

With reference to FIGS. 232 to 243, the operation when returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described based on the flowchart of the individual counting return processing.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 242 describes the individual count return process (S3450).
First, when the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P is housed in the return plate 780d (YES in S3451), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return plate shutter 782d rotates, and the return plate shutter 782d becomes a horizontal line. It moves to the position of the relative angle α (FIG. 243 (A), S3452). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned on (S3453), and the movable return passage 784d moves downward (FIGS. 243 (A), S3453). The angle α has an upward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees with respect to the horizon (FIG. 243 (A)). Therefore, the pachinko ball Q housed in the return plate 780d does not come up, passes through the movable return passage 784d and the return plate shutter 782d, and rolls along the inclination.

When the return plate shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d are moved as described above, the return plate shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d are shown in FIGS. 234, 238, 240 and 243 (A). The pachinko ball Q rolls on the return plate shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d. Specifically, the pachinko ball Q that has passed from the accommodating portion 710d to the accommodating passage passage 745d passes through the descending movable return passage 784d, changes its direction by the triangular guide piece 792d, passes through the return plate shutter 782d, and passes through the return plate. Roll towards 780d.
In this way, since the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return plate 780d, it is a preliminary to be used when purchasing food and drink in the store by the pachinko ball Q or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a storage for pachinko balls Q. It is particularly effective for pachinko machines P without a lower plate 857.

Next, a case of counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the return plate 780d will be described. When the pachinko ball Q stored in the return plate 780d is counted by the ball lender PT (YES in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return plate shutter 782d rotates, and the return plate shutter 782d becomes a horizontal line. It moves to the position of the relative angle β (FIG. 243 (B), S3455). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d is kept in the upper position (FIGS. 243 (B), S3457). The angle β has a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees with respect to the horizon (FIG. 243 (B)). Therefore, the pachinko ball Q housed in the return plate 780d rolls along the inclination of the return plate shutter 782d.

When the return plate shutter 782d moves as described above, as shown in FIGS. 233, 236, 241 and 243 (B), the return plate shutter 782d forms a downward inclination and is housed in the return plate 780d. The pachinko ball Q rolls on the return plate shutter 782d. Specifically, the pachinko ball Q in the return plate 780d passes over the return plate shutter 782d, rolls from the lower conversion passage 791d to the lower connecting passage 789d according to the inclination, and passes through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d. It is transferred to the ball lending machine PT and counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q stored in the return plate 780d can also be collected in the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the payment is made. In addition, when the pachinko ball Q left behind by the player M is collected, the employee can collect the pachinko ball Q in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work and at the same time, the game. It is also possible to manage the totalization of pachinko balls Q that the customer M has forgotten.

Next, a case where the pachinko ball Q stored in the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P is counted, or a case where the pachinko ball Q is returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780d will be described. When counting the pachinko balls Q stored from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine to the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return plate shutter 782d rotates, and the return plate shutter 782d It moves to a position at an angle γ with respect to the horizon (FIG. 243 (C), S3456). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d is kept in the upper position (FIGS. 243 (C), S3457). The angle γ has an upward inclination of about 30 to 70 degrees with respect to the horizon (FIG. 243 (C)). Therefore, the pachinko ball Q housed in the return plate 780d does not roll to the lower connecting passage 789d because the collection port 783d is blocked by the return plate shutter 782d.

When the return plate shutter 782d moves as described above, as shown in FIGS. 235, 237, 239 and 243 (C), the return plate shutter 782d is closed and the pachinko ball Q from the ball lender PT is closed. Rolls on the return plate shutter 782d and is housed in the return plate 780d. Further, the pachinko ball Q on the lower plate 857 rolls along the lower connecting passage 789d according to the inclination, further passes through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d, and rolls to the ball lending machine PT and is counted.
As described above, the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower plate 857 can also be collected in the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls Q. Further, since the pachinko ball Q counted by the ball lending machine PT can be stored in the return plate 780d, the player M can use the pachinko ball Q to purchase food and drink in the store or to play the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a reserve storage for pachinko balls Q. It is particularly effective for pachinko machines P without a lower plate 857.

<Modification 5>
Next, a modification 5 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 254. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805e of the modified example 5 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 245 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805e in the modified example 5 showing how the pachinko ball Q is returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e. FIG. 246 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805e of the modified example 5. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805d in which the accommodating portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e are cut by the QR line shown in FIG. 246. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls of the counting unit 805e, in which the accommodating portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e are cut by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, roll. FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls of the counting unit 805e, in which the accommodating portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e are cut by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, roll. FIG. 253 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls of the counting unit 805e, in which the accommodating portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e are cut by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, roll. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a return plate return process in the counting unit 805e of the modified example 5.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the counting unit 805e is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805e is arranged below the lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating portion 858 which is a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening 856 (not shown) having a circular opening for flowing the stored pachinko ball Q into the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859, and when counting pachinko balls Q from the lower plate 857, the lower plate opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower plate shutter 859 left and right, and the accommodating portion 710d. The pachinko ball Q is dropped into the pachinko ball Q, and the pachinko ball Q is counted by the counting counter 806 inside the ball lending machine PT via the counting passage section 720d and the ball lending machine connecting passage section 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the counting unit 805e is roughly classified into a storage unit 710e, a counting passage unit 720e, a return plate 780e, and a ball lending machine connecting passage unit 740e described later.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the box-shaped accommodating portion 710e receives a large amount of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749e inclined toward the accommodating portion passage 745e. A cushioning material such as rubber or urethane is laid on the bottom plate 749e in order to cushion the impact from the pachinko ball Q falling from the lower plate 857. Further, the bottom plate 749e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the accommodating passage 745e. The accommodating passage 745e forms a groove-shaped passage that guides the pachinko ball Q below the bottom plate 794e, and is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747e. Further, the accommodating passage 745e communicates with the lower passage 747e of the counting passage 720e.

Next, the counting passage portion 720e will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253.
The upper passage 746e and the lower passage 747e are the main passages of the counting passage portion 720e. Each of the upper passage 746e and the lower passage 747e is an enclosed passage, and each communicates with the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e described later.
The upper passage 746e is a passage that guides the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e. The upper passage 746e is a movable return passage 787e that communicates with the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e and a movable return passage 784e that changes the direction of the pachinko ball Q that rolls from the upper connecting passage 787e and connects to the return port 748e. Is provided. Further, a side wall portion 779e that changes the direction in which the pachinko ball Q rolls in the direction of the return port 748e is provided.

The upper connecting passage 787e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the movable return passage 784e. Further, the short L-shaped passage toward the return port 748e of the movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the return port 748e. Further, a step is provided between the upper connecting passage 787e and the movable return passage 784e, so that the direction of the pachinko ball Q can be easily changed and the pachinko ball Q does not flow backward. The return port 748e has a rectangular opening formed above the return plate 780e.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 250 to 253, the lower passage 747e is a passage that guides the pachinko ball Q from the accommodating portion 710e to the ball lender PT. The lower passage 747e has a lower connecting passage 789e having one end communicating with the accommodating passage 745e and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine connecting passage 740e, and a pachinko ball Q collected from the collection port 783e of the return plate 780e. A lower conversion passage 791e that changes the direction and communicates with the lower connecting passage 789e is provided.

The lower connecting passage 789e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e. Further, the lower conversion passage 791e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees from the return port 748e toward the lower connecting passage 789e.
A step portion 799e that serves as a step is provided between the lower connecting passage 789e and the lower conversion passage 791e. By providing the stepped portion 799e, it is possible to guide the pachinko ball Q to the lower part conversion passage 791e without backflowing and without causing the pachinko ball Q passing through the lower connecting passage 789e to stay.

The movable return passage 784e is a substantially L-shaped passage, the short L-shaped bent passage faces the return port 748e, and the long passage is provided above the lower connecting passage 789e. There is. The movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees along the inclination of the lower connecting passage 789e. Further, the L-shaped bent short passage is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the return plate 780e. The tip of the movable return passage 784e facing the lower connecting passage 789e is formed with a triangular guide piece 792e which is a piece protruding in a substantially triangular shape. The triangular guide piece 792e guides the pachinko ball Q that has rolled from the accommodating passage 745e to the return plate 782e.

As described above, the movable return passage 784e has two functions as a return passage from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P to the return plate 780e and a return passage from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e. It is possible to design the 720e compactly. Therefore, since the device itself can be made compact, the capacity of the pachinko ball Q in the return plate 780e can be increased.
One side of the movable return passage 784e is connected to the movable return passage solenoid SOe so that it can move up and down. Further, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is fixed at a position that does not interfere with the rolling of the pachinko ball Q in the lower connecting passage 789e.
Further, by allowing the movable return passage 784e to move up and down in this way, the movable return passage 789e when counting the pachinko balls Q and the movable return passage Q accommodated in the accommodating portion 710e are conveyed. Since the counting passage portion 720e can be compactly configured by arranging the passages 784e vertically, the entire counting unit 805e can be compactly provided.

Next, the return plate 780e will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 250. The return plate 780e is a plate that stores the pachinko ball Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko ball Q returned from the storage unit 710e. The return plate 780e is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage portion 720e, and is provided with a storage bowl 781e capable of accommodating about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. The return plate 780e is provided at a position between the accommodating portion 710 and the ball lending machine PT, unlike the position of the accommodating portion 710 for accommodating the pachinko ball Q from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to secure a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls from the lower plate 857.
Therefore, since the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return plate 780e, a preliminary pachinko used when purchasing food and drink in the store by the pachinko ball Q or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as storage for ball Q. It is particularly effective for pachinko machines P without a lower plate 857.

The storage bowl 781e is formed in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has a mortar-shaped structure in which pachinko balls Q gather on the bottom surface. Further, on the side surface of the storage bowl 781e, an open return port 748e that communicates with the upper and lower conversion passages 791e and the upper connecting passage 787e of the counting passage portion 720e is provided.
Further, the return plate 780e is provided with a return plate shutter 782e on the side surface which closes the return port 748e. The return plate shutter 782e is provided with an operation knob 796e on the upper side surface so that it can be manually moved to the left and right. The return plate shutter 782e moves left and right to open and close the return port 748e. Further, an open / close detection sensor 797e for detecting the opening / closing of the return plate shutter 782e is provided inside the counting passage portion 720e.

The operation of returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 254 based on the flowchart of the return plate return process.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 254 describes the return plate return process (S3460).
First, when the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P is housed in the return plate 780e, if the return plate shutter 782e does not open the return port 748e, it waits as it is (NO in S3461) and detects opening / closing. If it can be confirmed by the sensor 797e that the return plate shutter 782e opens the return port 748e (YES in S3461), a request signal for returning to the return plate 780e has been transmitted by operating from the liquid crystal screen of the ball lending machine PT. (YES in S3462), the solenoid SOe for the movable return passage is turned on (S3463), and the movable return passage 784e is lowered. The movable return passage 784e keeps the movable return passage solenoid SOe in a lowered state as shown in FIG. 250 until the return request signal is turned off (NO in S3464). Then, when the return request signal is OFF (YES in S3464), that is, when it is not necessary to store the pachinko ball Q in the return plate, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is OFF (S3465) and the movable return is performed. The passage 784e is maintained in an elevated state, and the lower connecting passage 789e is in a state where it can pass through the pachinko ball Q.

When the return plate shutter 782e opens the return port 748e and the movable return passage 784e moves as described above, as shown in FIG. 250, the pachinko ball Q that has passed from the storage portion 710e to the storage portion passage 745e It passes through the lowered movable return passage 784e, changes its direction by the triangular guide piece 792e, and rolls toward the return plate 780e.
In this way, since the pachinko ball Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return plate 780e, it is a preliminary to be used when purchasing food and drink in the store by the pachinko ball Q or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a storage for pachinko balls Q. It is particularly effective for pachinko machines P without a lower plate 857.

Next, a case where the pachinko balls Q stored in the return plate 780e are counted will be described. When counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the return plate 780e to the ball lending machine PT, it is possible to lead to the ball lending machine PT by opening and closing the return plate shutter 782e and opening the return port 748e.
When the return plate shutter 782e moves as described above, as shown in FIGS. 247 and 252, the pachinko ball Q rolls from the lower conversion passage 791e to the lower connecting passage 789e according to the inclination, and communicates with the ball lender. It passes through the passage portion 740e and is transferred to the ball lending machine PT and counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q stored in the return plate 780e can also be collected in the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the payment is made. In addition, when collecting the balls left behind by the player M, the employee can collect the pachinko balls in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work and at the same time, the player. It is also possible to manage the totalization of pachinko balls Q that M has forgotten.

Next, a case where the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P are counted, or a case where the balls are returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e will be described.
When counting the pachinko balls Q stored from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine to the ball lending machine PT, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is kept OFF as shown in FIG. 253, so that the movable return passage 784e is It is kept in the upper position. The pachinko ball Q on the lower plate 857 rolls according to the inclination of the lower connecting passage 789e, further passes through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e, and rolls to the ball lending machine PT and is counted.
When returning balls from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e, the return plate shutter 782e closes the return port 748e as shown in FIGS. 251 and 253, and the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT is on the upper side. It rolls on the connecting passage 787e, changes its direction by the movable return passage 784e and the side wall portion 779e, and is accommodated in the return plate 780e from the return port 748e.

As described above, the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower plate 857 can also be collected in the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls. Further, since the player M can store the balls counted by the ball lending machine PT in the return plate 780e, a spare used when purchasing food and drink in the store by the pachinko ball Q or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a storage for typical pachinko balls Q. It is particularly effective for pachinko machines P without a lower plate 857.

<Ball lending machine used in the modified example>
The ball lending machine PT and the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d will be described with reference to FIG. 255. The modified example can be applied to 1 to 5, and will be described by taking the individual counting unit 805e as an example. FIG. 255 is a schematic view showing the movement of pachinko balls inside the ball lending machine PT. The ball lending machine P is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko machine P. Further, the ball lending machine PT is provided with an individual counting unit 805e, and can count the pachinko balls Q discharged from the pachinko machine P. Specifically, the lower plate shutter 859 of the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P is opened, and the discharged pachinko ball Q is accommodated in the accommodating portion 710e of the individual counting unit 805. The housed pachinko ball Q passes through the lower passage 747e of the counting passage portion 720e, passes through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d, and passes through the counting counter 806 provided in the middle of the counting ball passage 822 of the ball lending machine PT. It is counted. The counted pachinko balls Q pass through the equipment communication nozzle 819 and are collected in the equipment HS by the bellows 415. Further, the counted value is recorded on an IC card or the like as a ball possessed by the player M.

In addition, the balls can be discharged from the pachinko machine P, and can be discharged from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e. When discharging from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780e, the pachinko ball Q discharged from the ball lending machine PT by a sprocket or the like (not shown) passes through the counter discharge passage 821 and passes through the ball lending machine connecting passage section 740d. It passes through the upper passage 746e and is discharged to the return plate 780e.

The ball lending machine PT is a system that uses a prepaid IC card or magnetic card, a system that inserts a credit card or cash and gives the IC card or IC coin a valuable value that allows the purchase of a game medium, and a mobile terminal. It can be applied to a system that reads the valuable value stored in the card and gives a valuable value that allows the purchase of the game medium, a system that purchases the game medium in cash, and the like.

(Wireless system for data transfer of equipment including game machines installed in the amusement park)
The wireless system in the amusement park shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257 to describe the wireless system for the amusement park. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing data transmission / reception between each device in the wireless game hall 1. FIG. 257 (A) is a block diagram of a first communication (BLT) showing data transmission / reception between the transmission / reception device 94 and the unit information display device K. FIG. 257 (B) is a block diagram showing the contents of the data of the first communication (BLT) received by the transmission / reception device 94 from the stand information display device K.

FIGS. 256 and 257 show the transfer of data output from ancillary equipment such as a gaming machine (pachinko machine P) and a ball lending machine PT installed in a game hall. The data output from the pachinko machine P shown in this embodiment is an example. The data output from the pachinko machine P includes game information such as an out signal, a safe signal, a jackpot signal, and a start signal.
Further, as the data output from the ball lending machine PT, for example, a sales signal, a camera ID obtained from each camera 69 mounted on the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. 104, an imaging time data, and the like are output. The data output from the gaming machine (pachinko machine P) and the ball lending machine PT are once aggregated in the machine information display device K. The stand information display device K transfers the data shown in FIG. 263, which will be described in detail later, to the transmission / reception device 94 by the first communication (BLT) equipped with a wireless communication standard represented by Bluetooth (registered trademark), for example. To do. For the first communication (BLT), a Class 1 having an output of 100 mW and a reach of about 100 m, a Class 2 having an output of 2.5 mW, and a Class 2 having a reach of about 10 m are adopted.

The transmission / reception device 94 shows the role of the island computer 91 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and the data in the island facility HS is aggregated and stored in the hall computer 90 in the management area 2, for example, an encrypted WIFI which is a wireless standard. The received data is conveyed via the wireless router 5 and the switching hub 7 by the second communication (WIFI) using the standard.
The wireless communication of the first communication and the second communication is indicated by a broken line, and the solid line indicates that it is wired.
The first communication (BLT) may be not only Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard wireless communication but also WIFI standard wireless communication. Further, the first communication and the second communication may be wireless communication using any of the standardization standards of IEEE1451, IEEE802.15, IEEE802.11, IEEE802.16, IEEE802.20, 3GPP and 3GPP2.

Further, the switching hub 7 connects the hall computer 90, the surveillance camera system 60, and the face recognition server 80, and transfers data between these systems. In particular, the surveillance camera system 60 receives and stores the camera ID and the imaging time data, extracts the imaging data of the recording device 68 from the camera ID and the imaging time data, and collates it with the face data 605 stored in the face recognition server 80. Judge the person who needs attention such as Goto.
By managing the image or recorded data by using the camera ID and the imaging time in this way, it is not necessary to transmit the image data that was taken each time, and a huge amount of image data can be individually stored. Since the image data can be extracted from the recorded data at any time, the capacity of the face recognition system can be reduced. In addition, since personal face image data is not stored individually, personal information can be easily handled.
It should be noted that the imaging data, which is the recording data captured by each camera 69, can be distributed as a wireless signal, but in this embodiment, assuming that the capacity is large, the recording device in the management area 2 is wired. I am sending it to 68.

Next, FIG. 257 shows an outline of a form of data transmission / reception between the transmission / reception device 94 and the unit information display device K. FIG. 257 (A) shows a one-to-many connection state in which the device that starts the communication connection is the master (MA) and the device connected to the master (MA) is the slave (SL). As shown in FIG. 257 (B), in this embodiment, the transmission / reception device 94 is used as the master (MA), and the stand information display device K is connected as the slave (SL) to receive data.

In this embodiment, the frequencies used for communication include a plurality of different frequencies, and a technique is adopted in which one frequency is selected from the plurality of frequencies at regular time intervals and different frequencies are used at regular time intervals. Therefore, since radio wave interference with other frequencies is prevented, it is possible to prevent interference with a wireless LAN or the like such as the WIFI standard. For example, the frequency band from 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz is further divided into 79 channels with a width of 1 MHz, and hopping from one frequency to another is performed as a function of time by a narrow band carrier signal. It is possible to adopt a frequency hopping method in which the data signal is modulated.
The master (MA) can keep the communication with the slave (SL) connected. The master (MA) is capable of simultaneous communication with the slave (SL) and controls the timing of urgent commands and data transmission.

Next, the configurations of the transmission / reception device 94 and the stand information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing a configuration exemplifying the stand information display device K of the game hall system shown in FIG. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transmission / reception device 94 of the amusement park system.
The table information display device K shown in FIG. 258 is provided with a table information display device control unit 910 inside a housing (not shown), and the table information display device control unit 910 includes a CPU 911, a ROM 912, a RAM 913, and a power supply unit 914. The stand information display device K stores the above-mentioned various data obtained from the game machine in the storage unit 904 connected to the I / O 907, which is an input / output unit, and displays a touch panel type liquid crystal display connected to the I / O 907. The information integrated from the obtained data is displayed on the screen 891 under the control of the display control unit 903.

The table information display device K includes a call button 901 that displays a display for calling the employee MS on the liquid crystal display screen 891 or the like when the player M supplies a ball box or has a problem with the game machine. Further, the employee MS includes a remote control light receiving unit 902 for receiving a remote control signal for operating the liquid crystal display screen 891. Further, the stand information display device K includes an external I / F 905 for obtaining information from the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.
Further, the stand information display device K includes a first communication module 906 that controls the first communication (BLT).

The transmission / reception device 94 shown in FIG. 259 is provided with a reception device control unit 941 inside a housing (not shown), and the reception device control unit 941 includes a CPU 942, a ROM 943, a RAM 944, and a power supply unit 945. The transmission / reception device 94 is a storage unit connected to the input / output unit 946, which temporarily stores various data from the stand information display device K obtained by the first communication module 947 connected to the I / O unit I / O 946. It is equipped with 949. The transmission / reception device 94 includes a second communication module 948 that transmits data once stored in the storage unit 949 to the hall computer 90 via a wireless router 5 (FIG. 256) by WIFI standard wireless communication. Further, the transmission / reception device 94 includes a touch panel type input screen 918 connected to the I / O 946 to set communication. Further, the transmission / reception device 94 is connected to the top lamp 965 provided at the island end of the island facility HS, and controls the lighting of the LED provided on the top lamp 965.

Next, the communication connection and the data structure of the transmission / reception device 94 and the stand information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 263. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing data transmission / reception in the island facility HS of the amusement park system. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of the first communication (BLT) showing the transmission and reception of data between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure transmitted and received between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the amusement park system.

Communication connections will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. The unit information display device K (SL) and the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) form a piconet that forms one group, and are connected in a relationship of a master (MA) and a slave (SL) to form one master (MA). On the other hand, up to seven slaves (SL) can be connected at the same time. The master (MA) employs a time division multiplexing transmission method in which the transmitted data is processed in a time division manner. The transmission / reception device 94 is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and is provided at the end near the wireless router 5 (FIGS. 1 and 2) for performing the second communication (WIFI). Communication is possible without the need to add ports or the like by the time division multiplexing method.

The relay device 96 has the same structure as the transmission / reception device 94 shown in FIG. 259, but does not include the second communication module 948, but includes the first communication module 947. Further, the relay device 96 installed at the island edge of the island facility is connected to the top lamp 965 provided at the island edge and controls the lighting of the LED provided at the top lamp 965.
By switching between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), the relay device 96 transmits data collected from the stand information display device K (SL) to the transmission / reception device 94, and data from the stand information display device K (SL). Can fulfill the role of receiving. For example, the relay device 96 (a) transmits the data of the stand information display device K from SL7 to SL12 and the data collected by the relay device 96 (b) to the transmission / reception device 94. By transmitting and receiving data via the wireless relay device 94 in this way, the amusement park system first collects the data of all the units collected by the unit information display device K (SL) in the island facility HS. It is possible to transmit data to the transmission / reception device 94 by communication (BLT), and to collectively transmit data from the transmission / reception device 94 to the hall computer 90 by second communication (WIFI).

FIG. 261 shows the communication state between the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL). After establishing the connection with the stand information display device K (SL1 to S7), the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) simultaneously transmits to the stand information display device K (SL1 to S7), and the emergency flag (D0016) of FIG. Check if is occurring. For example, the target of the emergency flag (D0016) is an abnormal signal due to the pachinko machine P's goto when a magnet or radio wave is detected, and the unlocking of the game machine requested by the employee MS when dealing with a trouble of the game machine. Examples include a request signal, an abnormal signal due to a trouble in the ball lending machine PT, and an abnormal signal of the counter JC. After the simultaneous transmission, as shown in FIG. 261, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) transmits data in order with the table information display devices K (SL1 to S7).

FIG. 262 shows a data structure to be transmitted between the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL). The access code 915 specifies the identification number of the piconet that is a group of slaves (SL1 to SL7) configured in the island facility HS, the packet header 916 specifies the identification number of the slaves (SL1 to SL7), and the payload 917 is The type of data (D0001 to D00017) shown in the form of FIG. 263 is written.
The data transmitted from the machine information display device K (SL) to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) is an identification number such as a machine number that D0001 can recognize by the game machine and ancillary equipment such as the machine information display device K and the ball lending machine PT. Is. D0002 indicates the time when data is transmitted from the stand information display device K (SL) to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA).

D0003 represents the number of out balls discharged from the game machine, and "1" indicates 100 balls when converted into the actual number of balls. The stand information display device K (SL) sets data to be transmitted based on the predetermined number of out balls. For example, a signal of one pulse is received with 10 out balls, and when this one pulse is counted 10 times, other data (D0001 to D0017) is extracted and set as data to be transmitted as in the form 908A of FIG. 263. Will be done.
By using the number of out balls as a reference, many devices actually process data based on the number of out balls in the calculation indicated by the commercial data such as the operating status of the game machine in the hall computer 90, which facilitates data conversion. The introduction of other equipment becomes smooth. In addition, since the operating status of the game machine is often judged by whether or not there are out balls, it is extremely easy to check the operating status of the game machine by using this number of out balls as a setting standard for transmitting data. Become.

D0004 represents the number of safe balls, which is the number of game media acquired by the player M, and "8" indicates eight when converted into the actual number of balls. D0005 indicates whether or not the game machine is a big hit, "0" indicates that the game is not a big hit, and "1" indicates that the game machine is a big hit. D0006 indicates whether or not the game machine is undergoing probabilistic change, “0” indicates that it is not undergoing probabilistic change, and “1” indicates that it is undergoing probabilistic change. D0007 indicates the number of times the symbol of the game machine has changed, and "8" indicates that the symbol has changed eight times. D0008 is a number indicating how much the ball lending machine PT has sold, and "1" indicates 500 yen in terms of monetary amount.

D0009 indicates the time when the game machine started the jackpot. D0010 indicates the time when the game machine finishes the jackpot. D0011 indicates the time when the game machine starts the probability change. D0012 indicates the time when the game machine finishes the probability change. Reference numeral D0013 indicates an identification number of each camera 69 (FIG. 104) mounted on the ball lending machine PT. D0014 indicates the time when each camera 69 (FIG. 104) acquired an image by face recognition when it was detected that a person requiring attention was found or was mischievous due to blindfolding of each camera 69. .. D0015 indicates the type in which the image by face recognition is acquired, "3" indicates the player M who is good at it, and the player M of the person requiring attention is represented as "1".

D0016 is the above-mentioned emergency flag, and the type is indicated by numbers such as "0", "1", and "2". "0" indicates that there is no emergency flag, and "1" and "2" indicate that there is an emergency flag. "1" is an important code for a game machine such as a chord or a trouble, and is a coordination that requires the hall computer 90 to be notified as soon as possible. Further, "2A, 2B" is a code provided at the end of the island facility HS by pressing the call button to light the top lamp 965 that informs the employee MS that the player M is calling. .. The "A, B" of the code of "2" is provided to distinguish which passage side of the island edge of the island facility HS is to be lit (FIG. 260).
D0017 indicates the counting data and indicates the number of balls counted by the individual counter 805 mounted on the ball lending machine PT, and "859" indicates the number of balls actually counted and 859. These data (D0001 to D0017) are cleared if the data transmission is successful, and then the stand information display device K (SL) extracts and transmits each data at the time when the predetermined number of out balls is reached. Set.

<Control of wireless communication that carries data>
The control of wireless communication will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 271. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram at the time of initial registration between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the game data communication main process of the game field system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing emergency communication data processing of the amusement park system. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the first communication data transmission process of the amusement park system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the second communication data transmission process of the amusement park system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing emergency data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system.

<< Initial setting >>
The initial setting of communication between the transmission / reception device 94 and the unit information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265.
As shown in FIG. 264, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the unit information display device K (SL) shift to the initial registration mode (S3471), and the pair of the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the unit information display device K (SL). Prepare the ring. The transmission / reception device 94 (MA) searches for the stand information display device K (SL) capable of the first communication (S3472), and the stand information display device K (SL) searches for the stand information display device K (SL) capable of the first communication. In response to SL), the unit number, the BL address which is a unique address for communication, and the authentication code are transmitted as information (S3473). The transmission / reception device 94 (MA) is selected from the list of the unit information display device K (SL) capable of the first communication (S3475), and the authentication code of the unit information display device K (SL) is input to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA). (S3476) and complete the link connection (S3477). Immediately after the link connection, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) exchange random number keys different from those of the second communication (WIFI) with each other (S3478) in order to strengthen the communication security. Random number keys are stored in each storage area so that they can be stored even when the power is turned off (S3479). The random number key may be a code or a calculation formula. In this way, it is possible to strengthen security from eavesdropping and the like.
Further, when the stand information display device K (SL) is added, it is not necessary to lay the wiring because the addition can be performed by a simple operation of completing the link connection with the transmission / reception device 94 (MA).
Further, since the security functions of the first communication (BLT) and the second communication (WIFI) are different, the system becomes more difficult to eavesdrop by providing double security.

The transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) generate dynamic random numbers and store the dynamic random numbers so that they are stored even when the power is turned off (S3480). Further, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) exchange dynamic random numbers with each other (S3481), so that when the connection is cut off and the connection is reconnected, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the unit information display device K (SL) By confirming the generated random numbers with each other, the table information display device K (SL) enables safe and automatic link connection. Random numbers for connection are automatically generated based on the random number key when the power is turned on, and by exchanging dynamic random numbers with each other, security regarding reconnection and connection after power is turned on is enhanced.
As a result, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) have been paired by initial settings. Therefore, after that, the power supplies are turned on and the devices are automatically connected if the first communication is possible. Will be done.

Next, FIG. 265 shows a state from the successful pairing of the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) to the state of the standby mode.
When the power of the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the unit information display device K (SL) is turned on (S3482), the unit information display device K (SL) becomes the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) that has been successfully paired before. On the other hand, pairing is requested (S3483). When requesting pairing, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) transmits the table information, the BT address, and the dynamic random number as information, and the table information display device K (SL) collates the information such as these dynamic random numbers. If the connection is possible, it responds (S3483). At the time of response, the table information, the BT address and the dynamic random number are transmitted as information to establish the connection (S3485).
Immediately after establishing the connection, the transmitter / receiver 94 (MA) and the stand information display device K (SL) generate and store dynamic random numbers (S3486), exchange dynamic random numbers (S3487), and use them for the next connection. Be prepared. After that, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the unit information display device K (SL) shift to the standby mode with low power consumption until the transmission / reception of data is started (S3488).

<< Control by wireless communication of data >>
The control of communication between the transmission / reception device 94 and the unit information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 271.
First, the game data communication main process (S3490) shown in FIG. 266 shifts to the first communication data processing (S3560) and the second communication data processing (S3580) after first performing the emergency communication data processing (S3550). , Performs processing until data of a game machine or the like is transferred to the hall computer 90.

First, emergency communication data processing (S3550) will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 271. The transmission / reception device 94 (MA) performs simultaneous transmission before the first communication in order to confirm the emergency flag, and the emergency flag is sent to the stand information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d). Check if there is any (S3552, S3557). There are two types of emergency flags, "1" and "2", and "1" is the most urgent flag related to goto acts. Further, "2" is a flag for the player M to call the employee MS. If there is an emergency flag (YES in S3552, YES in S3557), the contents of the emergency flag are sent to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3553, S3558). In the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d), the call flag “2” is transmitted to light the top lamp 965 as described above. Further, the flag of "1" is transmitted from the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 by the second communication (WIFI). The hall computer 90 displays a pop-up or the like on the screen of the monitor according to the content of the emergency flag, and the employee processes the response. The emergency flag may be further subdivided for each abnormal type. For example, "1-1" is a magnet goto, "1-2" is a radio wave goto, "1-3" is a door open signal, "1-4" is a door unlock request signal, and "1-5" is a counter. The open / close signal and "1-6" may be subdivided into a counter open / close request signal and the like, and the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) may transmit an emergency flag to the hall computer 90.

Then, when the emergency flag is transmitted, the stand information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) shift to the standby mode in order to wait for a response from the hall computer 90. (S3554). Then, the response data is sent from the hall computer 90 to the table information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d), and the table information display device K (SL) performs the response process.
In the case of the emergency flag "1", it waits to respond to the signal from the hall computer 90 until the emergency flag is cleared, and immediately shifts to a state in which data can be received (NO of S3556, S3553, S3554, S3555).

Further, if the emergency flag "1" is released (YES in S3556), it is confirmed whether or not the emergency flag "2" has occurred (S3558), and the call button of the unit information display device K (SL) is confirmed. When 901 is pressed (YES in S3557), the unit information display device K (SL) transmits a call flag to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3558). ). If both the emergency flags "1" and "2" are released (NO in S3557), the unit information display device K (SL) sets the release flag, and the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (NO). It is transmitted to a, b, c, d) (S3559). Further, the release flag is transmitted from the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 by the second communication (WIFI) (S3559).

Next, the first communication data transmission process (S3560) and the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 270.
First, in the first communication data transmission process (S3560), the stand information display device K (SL) performs game information (out signal, safe signal, jackpot signal and start signal, sales signal, camera ID, imaging time data, etc.) related to the game machine. ) Is collected (S3561). The stand information display device K (SL) sets the data to be transmitted based on the number of out balls as described above. When the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) (YES in S3562), the unit information display device K (SL) transmits data including the number of out balls (for example, a safe signal, a jackpot signal, and a jackpot signal). The start signal, sales signal, camera ID, imaging time data, etc. (FIG. 263)) are set (S3563). The set data is transmitted from the stand information display device K (SL) to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3565). The data to be transmitted is transmitted until the data transmission of the first communication (BLT) is successful (NO in S3566), and if the data transmission is successful in the stand information display device K (SL) (YES in S3566). , Clear the set data (S3567) and prepare for the next transmission.

Further, when the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (NO in S3562), the stand information display device K (SL) counts the number of times the data transmission process is not performed (S3569), and the counted number of times is counted. When the predetermined number of times is reached (YES in S3570), it is a process of transmitting the forcibly collected data (S3562) data transmission. Due to these processes (NO in S3562, YES in S3569, S3570), if the number of safe balls, the number of starts, etc. are generated even though there is no out signal, the hall computer 90 is abnormal, so it is a goto act, a game. It is possible to detect an abnormality in the machine or an abnormality in communication. Then, the stand information display device K (SL) clears the count number (S3567), and the first communication data transmission process (S3560) ends. The count number (S3569) is counted when a predetermined time that is not transmitted for a certain period of time is reached based on the number of simultaneous transmissions transmitted to confirm the emergency flag from the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) and the transmission time. You may reach the number.

Next, the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described. Transmitter / receiver 94 (MA)
Stores the transmitted data (S3581) and confirms whether or not there is an emergency flag (S3584). When there is an urgent flag (YES in S3584), the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) extracts the urgent flag (S3585) and lights the flag of "2", that is, the top lamp 965 when there is a call flag. Take control. In the case of the flag of "1", the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) sets the second communication data of the type corresponding to the emergency flag and transmits the data to the hall computer 90 (S3590). The data transmission is performed until it succeeds (NO in S3591), and if the data transmission is successful (YES in S3591), the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) clears the set data (S3592) and then transmits the next data. Prepare for.
If there is no emergency flag (NO in S3584), the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) aggregates the data sent from the stand information display device K (SL), and the second communication (WIFI), so-called WIFI communication. Generates transmission data converted into a format that can be transmitted in (S3586), transmits until data transmission is successful as described above (S3590, S3591), and if data transmission is successful, clears the set data (S3586). S3592), prepare for the next transmission.

<Modified example of control of wireless communication that conveys data>
FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted / received by wireless communication of the amusement park system. Wireless system for data transfer of devices including game machines installed in the above-mentioned game hall The configuration is the same as that of the wireless system, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted. In particular, the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) does not change, but the relay device 96 is eliminated, and the stand information display device K (SL) has a function of relaying. The stand information display devices K (SL1 to SL14) are described, and the stand information display devices Ka1 and Ka2 switch between the master (MA) and the slave (SL) to perform the second communication (BLT) to perform the stand information. It is possible to transmit the data of the display device K to the hall computer 90.

For example, the stand information display device K (SL7 to SL14) wirelessly conveys the game information obtained by the pachinko machine P or the like to the stand information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) by the first communication (BLT). At that time, the stand information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) becomes the master (MA), the stand information display device K (SL7 to SL14) becomes the slave (SL), and the stand information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) becomes the stand information. Data of display device K (SL7 to SL14) is collected. Further, after the table information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) aggregates the data collected by the table information display device Ka2 (MA / SL14) as the master (MA), the table information display device Ka2 (MA / SL14) is used. The data collected as a slave (SL) is transmitted to the stand information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11).
Further, after the unit information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) aggregates the data collected as the master (MA), the unit information display device Ka1 (MA / SL11) transmits the collected data to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA). To do. By forming a piconet and transmitting / receiving data between the piconets in this way, data can be transmitted from the platform information display device K (SL) at one end of the island to the transmission / reception device 94 (MA) at the other end of the island. Since it is possible to transport by wireless communication, there is no need to lay wiring in the island equipment, and at the same time, there is a risk of noise due to the transport of pachinko balls, influence on errors due to radio wave noise from the pachinko machine P, and leakage of electricity. Is reduced.

(A modified example of a system in which the signals for lighting the call button and the top lamp are made wireless)
A modification of the system in which the signal for lighting the call button and the top lamp is made wireless will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 278.
<Configuration of call button wireless system>
A configuration of a wireless system for lighting a call button and a top lamp will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 277. FIG. 273 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that sends and receives call data from the call button unit 962 of the amusement park system. FIG. 273 (B) is a front view of the call button unit 962.
FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission / reception of call data between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration between each device of the amusement park system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the amusement park system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the amusement park system. FIG. 277 (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the call button unit 962 of the amusement park system and the mobile terminal SM are connected. FIG. 277 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state of the mobile terminal SM of the amusement park system.

FIG. 273 shows a call button unit 962 attached to the ball lending machine PT. The call button unit 962 is connected to the stand information display device K by wire, and is installed within reach without having to stand up. The call button unit 962 includes a call switch 967, a call liquid crystal display 966, and a USB terminal 968. The call switch 967 is an ON / OFF changeover switch, and by pressing the call switch 967, the call liquid crystal display 966 indicates that the call is being made by displaying "calling". Further, by pressing the call switch 967, the call button unit 962 sets the call flag to ON. Further, as shown in FIG. 276, the USB terminal 968 is a terminal for charging the storage battery owned by the personal mobile terminal SM. As shown in FIG. 277, the personal mobile terminal SM can be used as a substitute for the operation button of the call button unit 962 only when the USB terminal 968 is connected and charging is in progress by the dedicated application software. Therefore, the call button unit 962 can be operated at hand while operating the personal mobile terminal SM owned by the individual. In this way, it is not necessary to reach for the table information display device K above the player M, and the operation is possible at hand.

Further, the call button unit 962 can set a call flag by inputting a signal for calling through the USB terminal 968 from the dedicated application software stored in the personal mobile terminal SM. As described above, the operation from the personal mobile terminal SM can react only with the call button unit 962 to which the personal mobile terminal SM is connected by the USB terminal 968, so that it interferes with another call button unit 962. There is no such thing, and it is possible to deal with mischief. The stand information display device K and the call button unit 962 may be connected not only by wire but also by wireless. Further, the permission signal for transmitting the call flag may be transmitted from the USB terminal 968 to the call button unit 962 by wire or wirelessly to the dedicated application software of the personal mobile terminal SM.

Next, the configuration of wireless communication using the first communication (BLT) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 and 275. The call button unit 962 is connected to the call button unit 962 as a plurality of slaves (SL) using the transmission / reception device 961 (MA) as a master by Bluetooth (registered trademark) communication. Once the link connection is established between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), a secure wireless communication connection is established by the above procedure and security, and the master (MA) and slave (SL) can send and receive. It becomes a state.
Further, the call button unit 962 is usually a slave (SL), and if a call flag is generated, the flag is transmitted, but some call button units 963 are used as a relay base to transmit and receive the flag. The flag is transmitted to the transmission / reception devices 965 (MA) at both ends, and the transmission / reception device 965 (MA) lights the top lamps 965A and B.
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) has a function of switching between a master (MA) and a slave (SL), and transmits / receives a call flag of the network (SLB).

The call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL7) of the network (SLA) is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) and relays the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14). It is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2).
Further, the call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network SLC is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2) and relays the call button unit 963 (SL14) and the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7). It is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1).
Further, the call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL7 to SL14) of the network SLB is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) to send the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14). It is relayed and transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) and the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2).

<Control of call button unit in wireless system>
The control of the call button unit 962 in the wireless system will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 and 278. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing call data communication processing between each device of the amusement park system.
The call button units 962 and 963 set a call flag when the call switch 967 or the like is pressed by the player M (S3601). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 display on the call liquid crystal display 966 that the call is being made, such as "calling" (S3602).

Next, the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6, SL15 to SL20) transmits a call flag, and the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1, 2) receives the call flag (S3603). Further, the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) transmits a call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7), and also transmits the network (SLB) and the network (SLB). The call flag from the call button units 962 and 963 (SL7 to SL20) of the SLC) is received (S3607).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) receives a call flag from the call button units 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network (SLB) (S3604).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) receives a call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14), and calls the network (SLA). The call flag from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (SL14) (S3606).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives a call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2), and calls the network (SLA). The call flag from the button units 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2) (S3605).
Then, when the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1, 2) receives the call flag from the call button units 962 (SL1 to SL20), the top lamps 965A and 965B are turned on (S3608).

Next, the call button units 962 and 963 release the call flag when the call switch 967 or the like is pressed again by the player M (S3609). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 erase the display being called on the call liquid crystal display 966 (S3610).
Next, the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6, SL15 to SL20) transmits the flag release, and the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1, 2) receives the flag release (S3611). Further, the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) transmits a flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7), and also transmits the network (SLB) and the network (SLB) The flag release from the call button units 962 and 963 (SL7 to SL20) of the SLC) is received (S3615).

Further, the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) receives a call flag from the call button units 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network SLB (S3604).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA / SL7) receives a flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14), and calls the network (SLA). The flag release from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the calling button unit 963 (SL14) (S3614).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives the flag release from the call button units 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2), and calls the network (SLA). The flag release from the button units 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA2) (S3613).
Then, when the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1, 2) receives the flag release from the call button units 962 (SL1 to SL20), the top lamps 965A and 965B are turned off (S3616).

Since it is possible to transfer data from the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) at one end of the island to the transmission / reception device 961 (MA1) at the other end of the island by wireless communication, it is troublesome to lay wiring in the island equipment. At the same time, there is less risk of noise due to the transportation of pachinko balls, error due to radio wave noise from the pachinko machine P, and leakage of electricity. In addition, since the security function has been strengthened, it is possible to deal with eavesdropping.
The top lamp 965 may be turned on not only in the same island facility HS but also on the island facility top lamp 965 that sandwiches the facing passage.

(Input amount rewriting control)
The configuration of each device used for input amount rewriting control will be described with reference to FIGS. 68, 70, 279 and 280.
To rewrite the input amount, for example, if the membership card 550 is inadvertently forgotten to be inserted into the ball lending machine PT and the money is inserted first, or the guest player M becomes a valuable value for the guest card 551. If you forget to insert the guest card 551 in which the valuable value is stored even though there is a balance and insert the money first, the value of the guest card 551 is added to the desired IC card (550, 551). It is a control process that rewrites to move the value.

The membership card 550 has an IC chip 553 provided inside, which contains information such as an ID which is a unique identification number of the card, face image data 555 captured at the time of member registration, balance, balls, medals, and balls acquired today. It is remembered. In addition, the guest card 551 inserts an ID, which is an identification number unique to the card, money taken by each camera 69 into the IC chip 507 provided inside, or the imaging date and time, the balance, and today counted by the counting unit 805. Information such as the number of acquired balls is stored.

The devices used for these controls are provided in the card processing unit 807 provided in the ball lending machine PT, each camera 69, the individual face recognition server 820 built in the HDD 855 connected to each camera 69, and the management area 2. It is composed of a face recognition server 80 and a hall computer 90. The hall computer 90 may be a system that manages valuable values such as ball storage, medals, and ball lending machine PT, and may be a device or system provided outside the hall computer 90, not only inside the hall computer 90. good.

Next, the input amount rewriting control will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 284. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing a process of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the main process of rewriting the input amount of the amusement park system. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing a process of rewriting the input amount of each camera of the game hall system. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the amount rewriting process of the amusement park system. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the guest card balance face recognition process of the amusement park system.

First, the input amount rewriting main process (S3620) will be described with reference to FIGS. 279, 280 and 281. The card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT waits until a bill is inserted into the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3621), and if the bill is inserted into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3621), the bill The input signal is transmitted to each camera 69 (S3622). At the same time, the card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT transmits the ID of the guest card 551 and the input amount to the hall computer 90 (S3623). Then, the hall computer 90 stores the received ID of the guest card 551 and the input amount (S3624), and uses it for data at the time of sales and the like.
Further, in the card processing unit 807, the guest card 511 is in a position where the guest card 511 can be read and written by the card reader / writer 804 from the card storage unit 816, and another membership card 550 or the guest card 551 is inserted into the card insertion / ejection port 811 (FIG. 68). Move the guest card 551 to a position where it cannot be inserted.

A member holding a membership card 550 or another player M holding a guest card 551 notices that he / she has made a mistake and operates the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. 69, and inputs (not shown) from the menu. Operate the button for requesting rewriting to rewrite money. When the player M operates the button (YES in S3625), the card processing unit 807 transmits a face authentication verification request signal to the individual face authentication server 820 of each camera 69.
At the same time, the card processing unit 807 transmits the ID of the guest card and the rewriting amount requested for rewriting to the hall computer 90 (S3627). If the result of the face recognition determination by the individual face recognition server 820 matches the person at the time when the money is inserted (YES in S3268), the card processing unit 807 is approved by the hall computer 90 (S3629). The process shifts to the rewriting process (S3640). If the face recognition determination results do not match or the approval is not obtained, the card processing unit 807 displays an "error" or "impossible" on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 (FIG. 69) of the ball lending machine PT. Etc. (S3631).
The approval means may be automatically performed by the hall computer 90, or an approval signal may be transmitted after determining whether or not the card has an abnormality. Further, the means of approval may be an operation by an employee. By providing the means of approval in this way, security can be further strengthened.

Next, each camera determination process (S3650) will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 282. The camera determination process (S3650) for each unit is a process performed by the camera 69 for each unit and the individual face recognition server 820.
Since each camera 69 constantly captures images from the time the power is turned on and monitors the player M, the captured moving images are always recorded on the individual face recognition server 820 (S3651). When the individual face recognition server 80 receives the bill insertion signal from the card processing unit 807 (YES in S3652), the individual face authentication server 80 extracts and stores the captured time data (S3653).
In addition, even when the acquired balls are counted, the captured time data may be extracted and stored. Since the time data recorded by each camera 69 is mainly stored, the amount of data is small and the speed of data storage processing is high, so that the player M does not have to wait. In addition, since the data held is mainly time data, it is not data related to faces, so it is suitable for both the amusement park and the handling of personal information.

After that, when the individual face recognition server 80 receives the face recognition verification request signal (YES in S3654), the individual face recognition server 80 extracts the time when the most recent bill was inserted from the stored time data (S3655). Then, the individual face recognition server 80 extracts the face of the person recorded at the extracted time (S3656), collates the face of the person currently being imaged with the extracted face (S3657), and confirms whether the faces match. The determination is made (S3658). After the determination, the individual face recognition server 80 transmits either the mismatch determination or the match determination to the hall computer 90 as a result (S3569, S3661).

Next, the amount rewriting process (S3640) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68, 279, 280 and 283.
The card processing unit 807 waits until the approval of rewriting is transmitted from the hall computer 90 (NO in S3641), and if the approval signal is transmitted (YES in S3641), it is stored in the ID and card of the guest card 551. The remaining amount is read from the card reader / writer 804 (S3642) and temporarily stored in the RAM 853 and the HDD 855 (S3643).

The card processing unit 807 erases data such as the balance of the target guest card 551 (S3644), controls the drive motor 814, and converts the data so that the other player M can use it for storing money etc. next time. The erased guest card 551 is moved to the card storage unit 816 (S3645).
The card processing unit 807 performs a process of retracting the guest card 551 to the card storage 816, and can insert another membership card 550 or another guest card 551 into the card insertion / ejection port 811 (S3646). For example, a case where the amount of money is rewritten on the membership card 550 will be described as an example. When the card processing unit 807 that can accept the card stores 10,000 yen as the balance in the received guest card 551, the card processing unit 807 once stores the amount of 10,000 yen in the RAM 853 and the HDD 855 as the membership card. Add to 550 (S3647).
In addition to the amount of money, the number of balls counted by the counting unit 805 stored in the guest card 551 is also added.
As described above, the guest card 551 automatically erases the data and is stored in the card storage unit 816, and can be used for storing the next gate card 551. Therefore, the employee MS replenishes the guest card 551. It is not necessary to do so, and the workability is improved because the money is automatically rewritten to the membership card 550 or another guest card 551.

Next, the card processing unit 807 transmits the ID of the membership card 550, the added amount, the processing date and time, and the information of the ball, if any, to the hall computer 90 (S3648). The hall computer 90 stores the ID of the membership card 550, the added amount, the processing date and time, and the information of the ball, if any, in order to manage the business and avoid troubles with the player (S3649).
As described above, the player M can rewrite money while being there, and the game hall can build a system that does not cause trouble with the player while improving the security. ..

Next, referring to FIG. 284, the guest card 551 is ejected while leaving money, and the guest card balance face recognition process for enabling the rewriting of the input amount at the ball lending machine PT of another game console. (S3670) will be described.
The above-mentioned S3620 to S3661 are used for the basic processing. The guest card balance face authentication process (S3670) is a process for writing data to the IC chip 507 of the ejected guest card 551 at the time of ejection so that face authentication can be performed by another ball lending machine PT.
First, when the guest card 551 is ejected (YES in S3761), in order to prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, the camera determination process is first performed for each camera (S3650) to prepare for the ejection of the ghost card. Next, when there is a balance (YES in S3762), the card processing unit 807 extracts data regarding the recording date and time at the time of the latest bill insertion from the individual face authentication server 820 (S3674). The card processing unit 807 records on the guest card 551 data regarding the ID of each camera 69 captured or the ID for managing the recorded data, the date and time of recording, the balance, and the number of balls acquired, if any.

When there is no remaining money and only the balls are held (YES in S3763), the card processing unit 807 extracts data regarding the recording date and time at the time of counting the latest balls held from the individual face authentication server 820 (S3676). The card processing unit 807 records on the guest card 551 the ID of each camera 69 that has been imaged, the ID that manages the recorded data, the date and time of recording, and the number of acquired balls.

Next, the individual face recognition server 820 extracts the recorded data of the date and time stored in the guest card 551 from a predetermined time before, for example, one minute before (S3678). This process is a process for reducing the storage capacity of the recorded data to be stored as much as possible. The extracted recorded data is associated with the ID of the guest card 551 and saved in the individual face recognition server 820 (S3679), or saved in the face recognition server 80 in consideration of centralized management, communication, etc. (S3679). ) May. In this way, the face recognition server 80 may collectively manage the data.
Since the guest card 551 stores only the recording date and time without including the recorded data, the processing at the time of ejecting the card becomes faster. After that, a face recognition verification request is sent to the individual face recognition server 80 (S3680), and if the judgment result that the faces match (YES in S3681) is obtained, the person who put the money and the holder of the guest card 551 who has the balance are left. Is the same, so the guest card 551 is ejected (S3682). By this process, it is possible to prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen. Further, considering that the player M spends all the money, it is not necessary to perform unnecessary processing by performing the processing (S3761 to S3682) of storing the data in the guest card 551 when the guest card 551 is ejected.

By recording the camera ID and the recording date and time on the guest card 551 in this way, the above-mentioned processes (S3620 to S3661) can be used. When the camera ID is described at the time of extracting the recorded data at the time of processing S3653, the individual face recognition server 820 extracts the face image data from the data of the recording date and time by the camera ID, and the face image data and the present It may be a process of collating with the imaged face. Since the balance rewriting process can be performed quickly even at the ball lending machine PT to which the player has moved, the player M does not have to wait to rewrite the balance.

Although the above-mentioned membership card 550 or guest card 551 has been described as a card equipped with an IC chip, it may be a medium in a coin format as well as a card format. Further, it may be used not only between guest cards and membership cards but also for rewriting money between guest cards.

(Management system for accommodating amusement media installed in the amusement park)
The configuration of the ball box management system 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 295 using the wireless system in the amusement park shown in FIG. 256. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout and radio wave intensity of the equipment installed in the playground of the playground system. FIG. 286 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a part of the layout of the equipment installed in the playground of the playground system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio field strength and the distance of the amusement park system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing a ball box 955 and a ball box mounting stand 952 having a function of charging the ball box 955 of the amusement park system. FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing the ball box 955 of the amusement park system. FIG. 290 is a schematic view showing a state in which pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the amusement park system. FIG. 291 is a schematic view showing the state of the ball box 955 when the pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box 955A of the amusement park system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ball box 955B of the amusement park system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ball box 955A of the amusement park system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system 950 of the amusement park system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detecting the state of the ball box 955 of the amusement park system.

The ball box management system 950 is controlled by the hall computer 90, and may be managed and controlled not only by the hall computer 90 but also by a computer system including a CPU, ROM, RAM, and a storage device. The ball box management system 950 is mainly composed of a hall computer 90, a ball box 955, a transmission / reception device 94 which is a wireless network, and a surveillance camera system 60.

The layout shown in FIG. 285 shows the area (HA) of the 4-yen corner and the area (HA) of the 4-yen corner as a high-priced corner where the unit price of each pachinko ball Q rented out when playing the pachinko machine P is 4 yen. Is also divided into low unit price (for example, 1 yen) corner areas (LA) with low unit prices. In the low unit price corner (LA), the unit price per pachinko ball can be 2 yen, 1 yen, 0.5 yen, or the like.
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine P that uses the pachinko ball Q as the game medium will be described as an example, but it may be applied to the slot machine SMA that uses the medal as the game medium. In that case, the unit price of one medal in the high unit price corner may be 20 yen, and the unit price of one medal in the low unit price corner may be 10 yen or 5 yen.

As shown in FIG. 285, the ball box 955 is capable of wireless communication by the transmission / reception device 94 provided at the island end of the island facility HS1 described above. In this wireless communication, for example, the ball box 955 conveys data to the transmission / reception device 94 by a communication module 974 equipped with a wireless communication standard represented by Bluetooth (registered trademark). For wireless communication, Class 1 having an output of 100 mW and a reach of about 100 m is adopted. As shown in FIG. 287, depending on the radio wave strength (dBm) received by the transmission / reception device 94, the ball box 955 on the transmission side and the reception side The distance of the transmission / reception device 94 is shown. From this table, it is possible to specify the distance between the receiving device 94 and the ball box 955.
In particular, as will be described later, the master side (MA) can acquire the radio field strength and ID address of the slave (SL) without performing pairing. Therefore, the position of the ball box 955 can be specified by the ID address of the ball box 955 and the radio field strength.

The transmission / reception device 94 in the upper left portion of FIG. 285 shows five radio wave areas (WA1-1 to WA5-1) for receiving in units of 3 m. The transmission / reception device 94 at the upper right shows five radio wave areas (WA1-2 to WA5-2) for receiving in units of 3 m. The transmission / reception device 94 at the lower left shows five radio wave areas (WA1-3 to WA5-3) for receiving in units of 3 m. The transmission / reception device 94 at the lower right shows five radio wave areas (WA1-4 to WA5-4) for receiving in units of 3 m. The five areas are provided with a position defined as an area code in a circular shape from each transmission / reception device 94 according to the radio wave intensity within a range of 3 m, and the area code is provided by each transmission / reception device 94.
As shown in FIG. 285, the transmission / reception device 94 is provided with four transmission / reception devices 94 for the nine island facilities at the four corners of the entire amusement park, so that the reception areas for radio waves are overlapped. As a result, the position of the ball box 955 can be specified within a range of 3 m.

In addition, surveillance cameras 61 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 are arranged in each passage of the island facility HS. Each surveillance camera 61 is assigned an identification number (CH1 to CH20) of the surveillance camera 61 so that each surveillance camera 61 can be identified.

FIG. 286 shows an enlarged view of a part of the layout shown in FIG. 285. The ball box 955B used in the high unit price corner adopts Class 3 used for short-distance communication of 0.5 m to 1 m by the short-distance communication module 975 described later in addition to the position measurement. This makes it possible to detect the approach of the ball box 955 used for the corner of another unit price. When the player M1 brings the ball box 955B for the rental unit price of 4 yen to the corner where the rental unit price of the pachinko ball Q used for the pachinko machine P is 1 yen, for example, the ball box 955B is 0. The rental unit price in the radio wave area (WB1-1 to WB1-6) in the range of 5 m to 1 m is paired with the ball box 955A for 1 yen so that communication is possible.

Next, the configuration of the ball box 955 and the ball box mounting table 952 will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 293.
The ball box 955 is provided with a ball box 955A for a lending unit price of 1 yen and a ball box 955B for a lending unit price of 4 yen. As shown in FIG. 289, the shape of the ball box 955 is such that the pachinko ball Q can be accommodated and is formed in a box shape with an upper opening, and handles extend to both ends of the upper side. Further, as shown in FIG. 288, the ball box 955 can be stored by stacking the boxes with the lower accommodating portions overlapped. The ball box 955 includes a control module 954 embedded at one end as shown in FIG. 289.
A warning LED 972 and a speaker 971 are provided around the upper end of the ball box 955. The LED 972 employs a full-color LED, and the blinking cycle and color can be changed. Further, the speaker 971 can output a warning sound, a voice, and the like. As the ball box 955 approaches the ball boxes 955 in other corners and the game medium is transferred, the color and tone of the alarms of the ball boxes 955 are made the same, and the colors and sounds are synchronized. It is possible to inform which ball boxes the ball boxes 955 are approaching each other and the game medium is transferred to each other by making the same and notifying in pairs.

The control module 954 is provided with positive and negative charging terminals 956 at its tip. As shown in FIG. 288, the charging terminal 956 receives power such as DC5V or DC12V from the rail distribution line 953 provided in the central portion of the columnar charging pillar 952 of the ball box mounting table 952. The ball box mounting table 952 is provided with a power supply, a board for power supply control, and the like. The transmission / reception device 94 may be provided on the charging pillar 952 or the ball box mounting table 952.

As shown in FIG. 293, the ball box 955A has a built-in control module 954, and the control module 954 includes a control unit 978 such as an LSI in addition to the rechargeable battery 981 connected to the charging terminal 956 described above. It includes a storage unit 977, an arithmetic processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 that plays the role of a slave, and a short-distance communication module (SL) 975 that plays the role of a slave. The control module 954 stores the electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in the built-in rechargeable battery 981. Further, the ball box 955A has a sensor unit 973 connected to the control unit 978 embedded in the bottom thereof. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 that detects the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 that detects vibration due to the movement of the ball box 955A and the insertion of the pachinko ball Q. Further, the control unit 978 is connected to the LED 972 and the speaker 971 described above.

As shown in FIG. 292, the ball box 955B has a built-in control module 954, and the control module 954 includes a control unit 978 such as an LSI in addition to the rechargeable battery 981 connected to the charging terminal 956 described above. It includes a storage unit 977, an arithmetic processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 that plays the role of a slave, and a short-range communication module (MA) 975 that plays the role of a master. The control module 954 stores the electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in the built-in rechargeable battery 981. Further, the ball box 955B has a sensor unit 973 connected to the control unit 978 embedded in the bottom thereof. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 that detects the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 that detects vibration due to the movement of the ball box 955B and the insertion of the pachinko ball Q. Further, the control unit 978 is connected to the LED 972 and the speaker 971 described above.

As shown in FIG. 295, the control unit 978 determines the insertion and movement of the ball from the numerical value of the acceleration sensor 982 by the arithmetic processing unit 976.
As shown in FIG. 289, the acceleration sensor 982 employs an X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis sensor, and the XYZ values are periodic peak values due to phenomena such as movement and vibration. It's different.
For example, the table of FIG. 295 (A) shows the features of each phenomenon. In the case of ball insertion detection, X (value) and Y (value) are minute values, respectively, as shown in the graph of FIG. 295 (C), and Z (value) appears in a fine cycle, and the pachinko ball Q appears. It will continue as long as it is put in the ball box 955.
Next, in the case of movement by walking, X (value) and Y (value) appear small and periodically with the number of steps as shown in the graph of FIG. 295 (B), and the heel when walking is the same as the cycle. The vibration of the landing of is greatly appearing as Z (value). In addition, since the cycle continues for a long time by the walking distance and the function of the pedometer is also possible, it is possible to calculate the stride length and the distance traveled.
As described above, the ball box 955 can detect the inclination of the ball box 955, the movement of the ball box, and the insertion of the ball box.

<Control of ball box management system>
Next, the control of the ball box management system 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 285, 286, 294, and 296 to 298. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing the control of the ball box management system 950 of the amusement park system. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a ball box management control process (S3690) of the amusement park system. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a ball box monitoring control process (S3710) of the amusement park system.

As shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, a case where the player M1 transfers the pachinko ball Q acquired at the rental unit price of 1 yen corner to the ball box 955B for the rental unit price of 4 yen and plays the game at the 4 yen corner will be described. ..
When the player M1 plays with the pachinko machine P302 series of the island facility HS3 whose rental unit price is 1 yen corner and acquires the pachinko ball Q, as shown in FIGS. 296 and 298, the sensor unit 973 of the ball box 955A The acceleration sensor 982 detects vibration (S37711), and turns on the position measurement communication module 974 (SL) and the short-range communication module 975 (SL) of the ball box 955A (S3712). However, if the sensor unit 973 does not detect or connect (pair) communication for a predetermined time (about 20 minutes), both communication modules 974 and 975 are turned off in order to suppress power consumption.

After that, the player M1 moves with the ball box 955B from the 4-yen corner. When the acceleration sensor 982 detects the movement of the ball box 955B (S3711), the communication modules 974 and 973 are turned on (S3712), and the transmission / reception device 94 receives the transmitted radio wave to receive the transmitted radio wave of the ball box 955B. The ID address (4S0001) which is an identification number is received (S3691). Then, the transmission / reception device 94 detects the received ID address (4S0001) and radio wave intensity (-65 dBm) as shown in FIG. 294 (A) (S3692).
As shown in FIG. 294 (B), the transmission / reception device 94 is a master code that is an area code (WA2-1), an ID address (4S0001), and an identification number of the transmission / reception device 94 determined from the radio field strength in the ball box management system 950. (MA0001) is transmitted (S3693).

As shown in FIG. 294 (D), the ball box management system 950 receives the area code (WA2-1, WA5-3), the ID address (4S0001), and the master code (MA0001, MA0003) from the plurality of transmission / reception devices 94. , The position of the ball box 955B (ID address (4S0001)) is detected (S3694), and the position of the ball box 955B owned by the player M1 is specified. At that time, since the moving distance of the ball box 955B can be calculated from the number of steps and used as a correction function for specifying the position, the accuracy of specifying the position is improved and it can be used for monitoring, etc. Is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the player M1 brings the 4-yen dedicated ball box 955B into the 1-yen corner area where it is originally prohibited to bring in, so the ball box management system 950 is prohibited. When the intrusion into the area is confirmed (S3696) and the intrusion into the prohibited area of the ball box 955B is confirmed (YES in S3696), the communication connection (pairing) between the ball box 955B and the transmission / reception device 94 is permitted. (S3697). At the same time, the ball box management system 950 provides the surveillance camera system 60 with the optimum position information for monitoring by the surveillance camera 61 or each camera 69 specified by the ball box management system 950 as shown in FIG. 294 (C). The identification number (CH3) and the position information of the determined virtual position (302 series) are transmitted (S3707).

By connecting the communication, the ball box 955B causes the LED 972 to emit light in order to prompt the warning (S3715), and the warning may be an alarm by the speaker 971 instead of the light emission. At the same time, the surveillance camera 61 or each camera 69 emits light from the ball box 955B, which makes it easier to check the monitoring target, and it is also possible to automatically check the ball box 955B by image recognition (S3698) and track it. There is (S3499). Here, in the surveillance camera system 60, images captured by the surveillance cameras 61 or each camera 61 are recorded at any time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 294 (D), 1S050 represents the ID address of the ball box 995A owned by the player M1, and the area codes (WA2-1, WA5-3) are the same as the ball box 955A. It is found that the ball box 955B is close to the range of 3 m, and the ball box management system 950 can confirm the approach of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B (S3701). Not only that, but with the approach of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B (YES in S3716), the short-range communication module 975 (MA) enters the radio wave reception area of 0.5 m to 1 m for short-range communication. Communication connection (pairing) with the module 975 (SL) is started (S3717).

Then, the adjacent ball box 955A is also made to emit light with the communication connection (pairing) (S3718). This makes it easier to check with the surveillance camera 61, and it is also possible to notify the employee MS. In addition, it is possible to confirm later which ball box 955A to which ball box 955B the pachinko ball Q has been moved. Further, since the ball box 955B can obtain information by communication from the ball box 955A, it is possible to obtain information on the inclination of the ball box 955A, information on vibration, and the like, and it can be used for monitoring the ball box 955. .. Further, it is possible to make the synchronization and the selection of colors and tones when issuing an alarm from the ball boxes 955 the same between the ball boxes (955A, 955B).

Next, when the player M1 tilts the ball box 955A and moves the pachinko ball Q to the ball box 955B, the ball box 955A detects the tilt by the angular velocity sensor 983 (YES in S3719). The ball box 955A transmits a signal for detecting the inclination to the transmission / reception device 94 via the ball box 955B which is the master (S3721). Then, when the ball box management system 950 receives the detection of the inclination of the ball box 955A (S3702), the surveillance camera system 60 stores and stores information such as the imaging time by the surveillance camera 61 and the identification number of the surveillance camera 61. .. And the employee MS is prepared to prepare for later verification.

Further, when the ball box 955B detects the vibration when the pachinko ball Q is thrown by the acceleration sensor 982 (YES in S3722), the ball box 955B transmits a command to give an alarm to the ball box 955A, and the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B Emits a warning sound from the speaker 971 as an alarm (S3723). In this way, by detecting the transferred state of the pachinko ball Q to the other ball box 955 and issuing a warning, it is possible to reliably detect the transferred state of the pachinko ball Q without worrying about malfunction. Therefore, troubles between the player M1 and the employee MS are reduced. In addition, the transferred 4-yen corner ball box 955B also notifies the outside to the alarm of the LED 972 and the speaker 971, so the employee MS refrains from counting the pachinko ball Q with the counter JC and the store side suffers damage. There is no such thing.

The light emission and alarm of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B also allow the player M1 to refrain from making mistakes and prevent illegal games by the player M1. Further, even if the player M1 uses it as it is, the employee MS can immediately confirm it by the light emission of the ball box 955. In addition, since the surveillance camera 61 captures the whole story from the place where the ball box 955B is brought into the prohibited area to the place where the pachinko ball Q is moved to the ball box 955B, the player M1 cannot escape. It becomes. Therefore, the employee MS is less likely to have trouble with the player M1.

Then, the ball box 955 that emits light and emits an alarm sound does not stop unless it is released from the ball box management system 950 (YES in S3724, YES in S3704). The ball box management system 950 transmits a release signal to the transmission / reception device 94 (S3705), and the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B that have received the release signal from the transmission / reception device 94 or the ball box 955B stop emitting light and alarm sound (S3705). S3725).

(Information display device and game information management system installed in the game hall)
The table information display device K and the game hall information management system 1050 installed in the game hall will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 68 and 299 to 313. The display of the following aspects will be described by taking the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the liquid crystal display unit 610 displayed on the table information display device Kd as an example, but the liquid crystal of the above-mentioned table information display devices K, Ka, Kb, etc. It can be applied to the display screen 891. Further, the embodiment described below can be applied not only to the liquid crystal display but also to the 7-segment display and the dot display by the LED.

<Collection of game information to be displayed on the stand information display device>
Regarding the configuration for collecting the game information to be displayed on the table information display device K (Ka, Kb, Kd), the configuration for collecting the game information will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 67, 299 and 300. ..
FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing a configuration related to a game hall information management system that collects game information displayed on the table information display device Kd. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode correspondence table 1037 showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode displayed on the table information display device Kd and the model type of the game machine.

The information displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) is the game information directly obtained from the game machine, the game information provided by the game machine manufacturer, etc., and the promotional information for advertising obtained from the neighboring cooperating stores, etc. It is roughly classified into three types of information. Of these, game information obtained from a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P is output from an information terminal board I, which will be described later, in a signal form such as a pulse signal, as shown in FIGS. 1, 2, and 299. The output signal is converted into data suitable for the table information display device K (Kd) by the table computer 93 and transmitted to the table information display device K (Kd).
Various signals as the obtained game information are stored in the hall computer 90 via the platform computer 93 and the island computer 91. The hall computer 90 aggregates and processes various signals in order to obtain business information related to the game. At the same time, the table information display device K (Kd) processes the information to be displayed on the player M from the signal obtained from the game machine and displays it on the liquid crystal display screen 891.
The signal obtained from the game machine may be transmitted directly from the information terminal board I of the game machine to the table information display device K (Kd) without going through the table computer 93, and the table information display device K (Kd) may be transmitted. ) May transmit a signal obtained from the game machine to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91.

As shown in FIG. 299, the game hall information management system 1050 stores not only the information of the game machines in the game hall but also the information of the game machines and cooperating stores from the outside in the external information management server 1051 via the Internet or the like. To do. As for the information about the game machine from the outside, the game information of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA is collected from the game machine maker in the external information management server 1051. For example, as shown in FIG. 300, the game information includes wiring information and pachinko output from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA for connecting to the machine information display device K (Kd) or the machine computer 93. There is spec information of machine P and slot machine SMA. In addition, the game hall information management system 1050 collects display material information to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) from the game machine manufacturer. In addition to the information related to the game, the game hall information management system 1050 collects the advertising content information for advertising from the cooperating stores to the external information management server 1051.

The wiring information shown in FIG. 300 indicates the arrangement of the information terminal board I and the color of the wiring connected to the information terminal board I. The wiring information indicates the type of signal output from the information terminal board I connected by the wiring color. For example, "red" in the model "CR ○○ Z" indicates "start wiring". The signal of the "start wiring" is a signal output from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P, and is a start signal output when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is confirmed. This wiring information may differ depending on the game machine manufacturer or the model of the game machine, and it is necessary to obtain this wiring information for each model when replacing a new machine or moving in the game hall. By displaying these wiring information on the liquid crystal display screen 891, the machine information display device Kd can quickly connect the pachinko machine P and the machine information display device Kd while looking at the wiring information when the machine is replaced. It is possible to work on and prevent mistakes in wiring or polarity. Only when the power of the stand information display device Kd is turned off and the wiring is made, it is preferable to display it on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device Kd on the opposite side or the stand information display devices Kd on both sides in the vicinity. .. The stand information display device Kd may display the position of the terminal board, the type of signal line, the wiring color, the type of signal line, the polarity of wiring, and the like on the liquid crystal display screen 891.

Further, as the spec information of the gaming machine, there are a pachinko machine P and a slot machine SMA as typical examples, and each of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA has various specifications. For example, the pachinko machine P shown in FIG. 67 is a so-called "probability variation" type in which the probability fluctuates after a jackpot at a predetermined rate. This pachinko machine P is in a so-called "small hit continuous winning" state in which the special symbol 2 changes in a short period of time when the special symbol 2 starting port 304 is won after the big hit, and the probability of the small hit is also improved. Become.
In this "small hit continuous winning" state, the small hit attacker 303 frequently opens and the number of winnings increases, so that the number of balls to be acquired increases. In this "small hit continuous winning" state, the number of balls that are hit each time is small, but the number of balls that are hit frequently may increase. There are various types of pachinko machines P such as a type in which small hits continue until a big hit and a type in which the probability of small hits changes in this "small hit continuous winning".

Further, in the special symbol 306 shown in FIG. 67, the variation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the special symbol LED display 305 by lighting the LED. The special symbol 306 includes a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2, which correspond to each other depending on the position of the starting port for winning a prize. The special symbol 1 varies depending on the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 1 starting port 309, and the special symbol 2 varies depending on the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 2 starting port 304.

The spec information of one model is, for example, "number of prize balls" = "4 & 1 & 6 & 8 &14","number of rounds" = "6OR16R", "count number" = "9C", "normal jackpot probability" = "1/319", " Probability fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "probability change") jackpot probability "=" 1/114 "," probability change inrush rate "=" navel (special symbol 1 start port 309): 54%, electric chew (special symbol 2 start port start port) 304) 83% (ST168 rotations) ”,“ time saving ”=“ 100 times OR168 times ”and“ average payout ”=“ 6R: about 702 pieces ”“ 16R: ”and the like.
This spec information is published by each game machine manufacturer on the Internet, so the game information display management computer

The 1055 automatically or manually collects this information on the external information management server 1051.

Further, in the spec information of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 300, the model "CR ○○ Z" indicates the above-mentioned "probability variation" type "small hit continuous winning", and the model "CRXX △△" indicates "probability variation". Type "ST 100 times", model "CR ○○ ××" indicates "probability change" type "ST 25 times" and "time reduction 55 times", model "CR △△ ○○" indicates "V" It indicates "winning" type "time reduction 15 times" and "time reduction 25 times".

Further, the display material information is a graphic material saved in JPEG format or BMP format such as characters and patterns related to the game machine used when displaying on the stand information display device Kd. In addition, as for the display material information, since the flow chart of the game method is published on the Internet by each game machine manufacturer in BMP format or JPEG format, the game information display management computer 1055 automatically or manually performs such information. Is collected in the external information management server 1051.
Further, the advertisement content information is information for advertisement for displaying products and services sold by cooperating stores on the stand information display device Kd and the POP in the store for a fee or free of charge.

As shown in FIG. 299, the game hall information management system 1050 that collects and manages the above-mentioned information is mainly composed of a hall computer 90, a stand information display device Kd, and a game information display management computer 1055. The hall computer 90 includes a server equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and a hard disk, a computer equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and a hard disk, and a monitor in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) is provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 on the surface of the housing, which provides information to the player M. Further, the game information display management computer 1055 places the external information management server 1051 equipped with the CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, the computer 1052 equipped with the CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, and the monitor 1054 in the management area 2 (FIG. 1). I have. The game information display management computer 1055 manages the spec information, the wiring information, and the advertisement content information collected automatically or manually in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

<Selection processing of contents to be displayed on the stand information display device>
Next, a process of selecting the contents to be displayed on the table information display device K (Kd) will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process (S3750). FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display content list 1035 showing a display mode and display contents on the stand information display device K (Kd).
The game information display management computer 1055 selects the content to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) by the display mode switching process (S3750) shown in FIG. 301 from the spec information which is a characteristic of the game machine, and displays the display shown in FIG. 302. It is decided from the content list 1035. The display mode is switched mainly when the game machine is replaced or when the game machine is moved in the store.

The display mode switching process (S3750) will be described with reference to FIG. 301. First, the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether it is a pachinko machine P or a slot machine SMA (S3750). If it is a slot machine SMA, the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether or not it is in the ART format (NO in S3751) (S3753). If the game information display management computer 1055 is in ART format (YES in S3753), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) as "SB mode" (S3754). If the game information display management computer 1055 is not in the ART format (NO in S3753), it is a normal type, so the mode to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) is determined to be "SA mode" (S3755).

Next, the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether or not the pachinko machine P (YES in S3751) is a so-called ST type in which the probability change or the time reduction ends according to the specified number of times (S3752).
If the game information display management computer 1055 is a so-called ST type described later (YES in S3752), the effect symbol 308 (FIG. 67, 314) that appears on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307 (FIG. 67, 314) during the effect of the pachinko machine P. 67, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine P is of a type in which the production continues without stopping the fluctuation of FIG. 314) and the special symbol 306 (FIG. 67) of the special symbol LED display 305 (FIG. 67) stops. (S3757). If the pachinko machine P is a type of pachinko machine P in which the special symbol is stopped during the production (YES in S3757), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) as "PSA mode". (S3761).
The game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) as the "PSB mode" unless the pachinko machine P is of a type in which the special symbol is stopped during the production (NO in S3757). (S3762).

Further, the game information display management computer 1055 determines that if it is not the so-called ST type, the probability fluctuation continues until the next big hit without a specified number of times (NO in S3752), and the small hit occurs during the probability change. It is determined whether or not it is a certain type (S3756). The game information display management computer 1055 determines that the mode to be displayed on the table information display device K (Kd) is the "PKR mode" (S3759) if there is a small hit during the probability change (YES in S3756).
The game information display management computer 1055 determines that the mode to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) is "PKA mode" unless it is a type in which there is a small hit during the probability change (NO in S3756) (S3758).

Next, each mode and the contents to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) will be described with reference to the display content list 1035 of FIG. 302. In the display content list 1035, the display content to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) is shown in the horizontal column, and the display content is vertically divided into the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA, and the content displayed for each mode is ". ○ ”indicates.

In the "PKA mode" and the "PSB mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquisition count", "probability change count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd).
In the "PKR mode", the table information display device K (Kd) has "big hit count", "start count", "small hit count", "acquisition count", "ball ejection speed", "probability change count" and "big hit history". Is displayed.
In the "PSA mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquisition count", "probability variation count", "start count non-display" and "big hit history" are displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd).

In the "SA mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquisition count", "BIG count", "REG count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd).
In the "SB mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquisition count", "BIG count", "REG count", "ART count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd). indicate.
The display mode correspondence table 1037 and the display content list 1035 displayed in FIG. 300 are managed by the game information display management computer 1055. The machine information display device K (Kd) stores the same settings as the display content list 1035, and each mode can be switched by operating the game information display management computer 1055 and the machine information display device K (Kd). Is. The amusement park information management system 1050 can change the content to be displayed on the stand information display device K (Kd) by switching each mode.

<< Display processing that displays information on pachinko machines with continuous small hits on the machine information display device >>
With reference to FIGS. 303 to 308, a process for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pa on the machine information display device K (Kd) and display contents will be described. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the game machine information terminal board I. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing the processing of the game machine information signal in the table information display device K (Kd). FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection speed display control process (S3730) that controls the display of information regarding the ball ejection speed on the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection speed display process (S3740) for controlling the display of information regarding the ball ejection speed on the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 307 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode for displaying on the table information display device K (Kd). FIG. 308 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode for displaying on the table information display device K (Kd).

The pachinko machine Pa shown in FIG. 303 has specifications in which the probability change continues until the next big hit at a rate of 65%, and the above-mentioned "small hit continuous winning" is mounted on a main board (not shown). "Small hit continuous winning" is a so-called high probability state in which the probability of big hit is improved at the time of judgment of big hit, and the probability of small hit is also improved at a predetermined rate at the time of judgment of big hit. It is a "small hit continuous prize". In the "small hit continuous winning", the probability of a small hit is maintained at a high probability until the next big hit, so that the number of pachinko balls Q acquired increases continuously until the big hit is won.

In addition to the case of the above-mentioned "small hit continuous winning", this pachinko machine Pa always maintains a high probability of small hit during the probability change, and when it continues until the next big hit, and the probability of small hit. Not only when the number of hits is improved to a plurality of stages, but also when a big hit is determined, if a small hit is won, the probability of hitting the small hit may be maintained at a high probability until the next big hit.
The display mode displayed by the stand information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pa becomes "PKR mode" when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. 300 to 302, as described above. The "big hit count", "start count", "small hit count", "acquisition count", "ball ejection speed", "probability variation count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd).

Further, the main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pa and input to the stand information display device K (Kd) are the special prize 1 signal 1011 and the special prize middle signal 1012, and the prize ball payout. There are a signal 1013, a start signal 1014, a special prize 2 signal 1015, and a special symbol 2 start opening winning signal 1016.
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal that outputs a big hit and a small hit of the pachinko machine Pa. The special prize middle signal 1012 is a signal that continuously outputs between a big hit, a small hit, and a probability change. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal that outputs one pulse in units of 10 acquired payouts. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pal when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are stopped. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal output when the small hit attacker 303 is won.

The special symbol 2 start port winning signal 1016 is a signal output when the special symbol 2 start port 304 (FIG. 67) is won. The out signal 1017 counts the balls fired by the pachinko machine Pa and indicates that the pachinko machine Pa is in operation. The out signal 1017 obtains information from the island facility HS, but if the prize ball is paid out even though there is no out ball signal 1017, troubles such as goto may occur, so it is necessary to take immediate action. is there. Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) may display the following information on the liquid crystal display screen 891 as one of the services only when the player M is in operation, depending on the presence or absence of the out-ball signal.

In FIGS. 304 to 306, a ball ejection speed display control process (S3730) for determining based on various signals input by the table information display device K (Kd) and displaying the “ball ejection speed” on the liquid crystal display screen 891 is performed. Shown. As shown in FIG. 305, first, the table information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the special prize intermediate signal 1012 is input to the table information display device K (Kd) (S3731). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize middle signal 1012 to the table information display device K (Kd) when the special prize is being given during the jackpot, probability change, or time reduction. The stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the special prize is being awarded when the input of the special prize in-progress signal 1012 is turned ON (tr4).

Next, if the special prize is in progress (YES in S3731), the stand information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot ends from the output of the special prize 1 signal 1012 input to the stand information display device K (Kd). Judgment (S3732). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 to the table information display device K (Kd) when a big hit or a small hit is in progress. When the pachinko machine Pa hits a jackpot, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 and then turns off the signal after the jackpot ends. Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the jackpot has ended when it is turned off (tr1). Further, the table information display device K (Kd) causes the ball ejection speed display control process (S3730) to stand by (NO in S3731) unless the special prize is in progress.

Next, if the jackpot ends (YES in S3732), the platform information display device K (Kd) receives a special symbol from the output of the special symbol 2 start port winning signal 1016 input to the platform information display device K (Kd). 2 It is determined whether or not a pachinko ball has been won in the starting port 304 (FIG. 67) (S3733). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs one pulse to the table information display device K (Kd) each time a prize is won in the special symbol 2 start port 304 (FIG. 67). The special symbol 2 start port 304 (FIG. 67) of the pachinko machine Pa has an increased probability of opening the electric chew during probabilistic change, and is frequently opened. Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the special symbol 2 start opening winning signal is being won when the special symbol 2 starting opening winning signal 1016 is turned ON (tr2) (S3733). Further, the table information display device K (Kd) causes the ball ejection speed display control process (S3730) to stand by if the jackpot is in progress (NO in S3732). The stand information display device K (Kd) is input during the special symbol 2 start opening winning signal 1016 based on the special symbol 2 starting opening winning signal 1016, which is also a trigger (tr2) for the start of a period in which small hits are continuous. By doing so, it is possible to use it as an opportunity to accurately judge that the small hit has been started while also taking measures against goto.

Next, if the special symbol 2 start port 304 is winning (YES in S3733), the stand information display device K (Kd) outputs the special prize 2 signal 1015 input to the stand information display device K (Kd). It is determined whether or not a pachinko ball has been won by the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) (S3734). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs one pulse to the table information display device K (Kd) each time the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) wins a prize. If the pachinko machine Pa wins a small hit as a result of winning a prize in the special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67), the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is released and the specified number of winning numbers is reached. Control is performed to close the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) when the specified time is reached. Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning a prize when the special prize 2 signal 1015 is turned ON (tr3) (YES in S3734).

Next, if the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning (YES in S3734), the stand information display device K (Kd) starts counting the elapsed time 1019 by the built-in clock function (S3735). .. Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) shifts to the ball ejection speed display process (S3740) described later. Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) counts the pulses from the special prize 1 signal 1011 or the special prize 2 signal 1015, and stores the counted value in the storage area as the number of small hits (S3736).
Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) continues the processing (S3734 to S3736) until the winning of the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) and the continuation of the small hit are completed (YE of S3737). The machine information display device K (Kd) has a small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) when the special prize 2 signal 1015 is OFF (tr5) (NO in S3734) and the special prize 1 signal is OFF (tr6) (YES in S3737). Judge that the prize is finished. In addition, it may be determined that the continuation of the small hit is completed only when the special prize 2 signal 1015 is turned OFF (tr5). However, by adding to the condition that the special prize 1 signal is OFF (tr6), the table information display device K (Kd) can further accurately determine the end of the small hit.

Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) starts the timer (T1) on the program from the clock function built in the CPU when the winning of the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is completed (NO in S3734). (S3738). When the predetermined time of the preset timer (T1) elapses (YES in S3739), the unit information display device K (Kd) stops the timer (T1) and the timer (YES). After clearing T1) (S3748), calculating the elapsed time 1019, and storing the elapsed time 1019 in the storage area (S3749), the ball ejection speed display control process (S3730) is terminated.

The predetermined time of this timer (T1) is to measure the timing at which the small hit ends when measuring the elapsed time, and is set to about 1 to 2 minutes in consideration of the fact that the continuous small hits are accidentally interrupted in the middle. It is desirable, and it is appropriately changed depending on the characteristics of the pachinko machine Pa. These are effective not only as noise countermeasures but also when there are no consecutive small hits accidentally, and erroneous processing can be prevented.

Next, the ball ejection speed display process (S3740) will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. The unit information display device K (Kd) operates a timer (T2) programmatically from the clock function built in the CPU (S3741). The unit information display device K (Kd) totals the number of prize balls in the storage area until a predetermined time of the preset timer (T2) elapses (NO in S3734) (S3742). The platform information display device K (Kd) totals the number of prize balls in one pulse output from the prize ball payout signal 1013. Then, when the timer (T2) elapses the predetermined time (YES in S3734), the table information display device K (Kd) calculates the speed of the number of balls to be ejected based on the predetermined time and the total number of prize balls (S3745). ).

For example, as shown in FIG. 307, the table information display device K (Kd) determines the interval at which "10800 balls per hour" is displayed in the ball ejection speed display area 1028 by a timer (T2). For example, if the timer (T) is 10 seconds, the table information display device K (Kd) displays the ball ejection speed in the ball ejection speed display area 1028 at 10 second intervals. Further, the table information display device K (Kd) calculates the speed based on the time of the timer (T2) (S3746). For example, if there are 30 prize balls acquired in 10 seconds, the speed will be 60 minutes x (60/10) seconds x 30 = 10800 pieces / hour, so the table information display device K ( Kd) displays "10800 balls per hour" in the ball ejection speed display area 1028 (S3746). Then, the table information display device K (Kd) clears the timer (T2), stores the ball ejection speed 10800 / hour in the storage area (S3747), and ends the ball ejection speed display process (S3740).

An example of displaying on the liquid crystal display screen 891 when the table information display device K (Kd) is in the “PKR mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308.
As shown in FIG. 307, the stand information display device K (Kd) shows the ball ejection speed information on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The stand information display device K (Kd) provides a small hit duration display area 1026 on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The table information display device K (Kd) is the elapsed time 1019 (“5 minutes”), which is the continuous time (“5 minutes”) of the small hit from the big hit calculated by the table information display device K (Kd) to the next big hit as described above. S3749) is shown in the small hit duration display area 1026. By displaying the time during which the small hit has continued, the machine information display device K (Kd) allows the player to know how long the small hit has continued, and at the same time, the next time. How long the small hit lasts can be used as an index for the player or other players.

Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) is provided with an acquired number display area 1027 on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The acquired number display area 1027 displays the number of balls (“900 balls”) acquired during the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit (S3742).
Further, the table information display device K (Kd) provides a ball ejection speed display area 1028 on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The ball ejection speed display area 1028 represents the speed of the number of balls ejected (“10800 balls per hour”) during the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit (S3746). As described above, the ball ejection speed display area 1028 is updated at 10-second intervals to display the ball ejection speed (S3746).

In this way, the speed display of the number of balls to be ejected conveys the sense of speed of the ejection to the player M, and at the same time, the player M grasps how much the ball is expected to be ejected in consideration of the time. It can be used as an index. It is updated at 10-second intervals, but if the interval is made shorter, the player M can feel the speed of the ball in real time, and at the same time, the player M takes time into consideration. It can be used as an index to grasp how much ball is expected to be released.

In addition, the employee MS can estimate how long after the speed of the number of balls to be ejected, the ball box to be replaced will be needed. Therefore, the speed of the number of balls ejected may be measured from the hall computer 90, and an instruction may be given from the intercom or the mobile terminal device 40 to allocate a capacity to the island facility HS where the high-speed pachinko machines P are lined up. Further, the hall computer 90 may collect information such as the number of small hits and the speed of the number of balls to be ejected from the stand information display device K (Kd) to the server connected to the hall computer 90.

Further, as a speed display of the number of balls to be ejected, as shown in FIG. 307, there is a meter display 1021 imitating a speedometer in addition to the ball ejection speed display area 1028. The meter display 1021 includes a scale portion 1023 that displays the number of balls (“10000”, “20000”), and a needle portion 1022 that points to the scale portion 1023 that matches the number of ball ejection speeds. The meter display 1021 sets the limit value at 20000 balls / hour (h) and indicates the position where 10080 balls / hour (h) is changing.

Further, as another example of displaying the ball ejection speed, the ratio display 1024 shows whether the ball ejection speed is high or low depending on how much the hatched area is occupied by the ratio of the occupied area 1025 extending in a straight line. Is displayed so that you can grasp. The ratio display 1024 sets the limit value as 20000 balls / hour (h), and indicates how much the ratio of 10080 balls / hour (h) is changing. In this way, by providing the meter display 1021 or the ratio display 1024, the player M can intuitively distinguish whether the ball ejection speed is high or low. In addition, even when the employee MS is busy, by intuitively grasping the ball ejection speed, it is possible to recognize at a glance how often the player M needs the ball box.

The table information display device K (Kd) may display the average speed of the number of balls to be ejected. Further, the hall computer 90 can also display the average speed of the number of balls to be ejected or the ranking of the speed of the maximum number of balls to be ejected on an information display device (not shown) installed at the edge or wall of the island facility HS. .. Further, the number of small hits per unit time may be used instead of the number of balls acquired per unit time. By displaying the number of times in this way, the player M can feel the speed of the ball output, and at the same time, the player M Can be used as an index to grasp how much ball is expected to be released in consideration of time.

The stand information display device K (Kd) stores the number of times obtained from the special prize 1 signal 1011 or the special prize 2 signal 1015 in the storage area (S3748), and the number of times the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit continues (“100”). "Times") is displayed in the small hit count display area 1029. By displaying the number of times in this way, a sense of speed of a small hit is transmitted to the player M, and at the same time, it can be used as an index for grasping how much the player M is expected to pay out in consideration of the time. .. In addition, by displaying to the player the number of times in a special state due to continuous small hits, it is possible to promote the expectation of small hits when the small hits are in a continuous state.

As shown in FIG. 308, the stand information display device K (Kd) shows the special prize history information on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The stand information display device K (Kd) displays the start count history 1031 up to the jackpot imitating a bar graph in the center of the liquid crystal display screen 891. In the start count history 1031, the right side on the screen shows the oldest history and the left side shows the latest history. For example, the stand information display device K (Kd) indicates the number of starts up to the jackpot as "164 times" above the start number history 1031 at the right end. Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) shows the above-mentioned meter display 1021 showing a state in which big hits and small hits are continuous to the right of the start number history 1031. Further, the total number of starts "353 times" is shown above the start number history 1031.

Further, the table information display device K (Kd) indicates the location where the jackpot is hit in the start count history 1031 by hatching. In particular, the start count history 1031 in which the total number of starts is "353" indicates that the hatching has hit the jackpot three times. The other start count history 1031 indicates that the jackpot was completed in a single shot without drawing a probability change because there is no part where the hatching is interrupted. The hatched portion shown on the liquid crystal display screen 891 may actually be expressed in different colors.

Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) includes a jackpot count display area 1053, a start count display area 1034, and a probability variation count display area 1037 on the upper right of the liquid crystal display screen 891.
Since these three displays are information that the player M wants to know as information, the display characters and the like are enlarged and displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 for easy understanding.

<< Display processing that displays the information of the pachinko machine whose jackpot judgment is confirmed during the production on the stand information display device >>
With reference to FIGS. 309 to 314, a process for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pb on the machine information display device K (Kd) and display contents will be described. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the game machine information terminal board I. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing the processing of the game machine information signal in the table information display device K (kd). FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing a start count non-display process for controlling the display of the stand information display device K (kd). FIG. 312 is a schematic view showing an example of a mode for displaying on the table information display device K (kd). FIG. 313 is a start count display area display list 1036 showing an example of the contents to be displayed on the stand information display device K (kd). FIG. 314 is a schematic view showing the effect of the pachinko machine Pb and the mode of the special symbol 306 displayed on the special symbol LED display 305.

The pachinko machine Pb shown in FIG. 309 is provided with a specification on the main board, which is called "V winning", which is a special state at a rate of 60% after a big hit, and has a high continuation rate.
When the pachinko machine Pb hits right and wins the special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67), the probability of hitting is higher than in the normal case, so the probability of continuing is high. However, the number of times the lottery for the special symbol 2 continues in a high probability state is set, and the number of times the lottery for the special symbol 2 is specified is set to, for example, 5 times or 10 times.

Further, in such a pachinko machine Pb, as shown in FIG. 314, the effect design 308 is displayed together with the effect on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307. The production of the pachinko machine Pb in the case of a big hit and in the case of a miss is shown below. The pachinko machine Pb shows the specifications when the specified number of times of the special symbol 2 is set to 5 times.

When the pachinko machine Pb is detached, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a first indicates that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305a causes the special symbol 2 (306a) to be detached for the second time. it's shown. Next, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b shows that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305b displays the special symbol 2 (306b) for the third time. Further, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c shows that the effect symbol 308c is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305c displays the special symbol 2 (306a) for the fourth time. Then, the effect symbol 308d indicates "384" on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, and the special symbol 2 (306a) displays the fifth deviation of the specified number of times on the special symbol LED display 305d. In this way, in the pachinko machine Pb, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is actually stopped, but on the effect of the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, the fish asks whether or not it has deviated at the end of the specified number of times. It is expressed by whether or not it was caught, and the specified number of times is shown by one production display. With such a production expression, the player M can enjoy the production with a sense of expectation until the end.

When the pachinko machine Pb is a big hit, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a first indicates that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305e causes the special symbol 2 (306a) to come off for the second time. it's shown. Next, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b shows that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305f displays the big hit with the special symbol 2 (306c) for the third time. Further, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c indicates that the effect symbol 308c is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305 g keeps the state in which the special symbol 2 (306c) displays the jackpot for the third time as it is. ing. Then, the effect symbol 308d indicates "333" on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307e, and the special symbol 2 (306c) displays a big hit on the special symbol LED display 305h. In this way, the pachinko machine Pb actually stops the fluctuation of the special symbol 2, but the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d is produced until the time when it is estimated that the specified number of times can be consumed. , The jackpot is expressed by whether or not the fish is caught, and the time for the specified number of times is shown by one production display. With such a production expression, the player M can enjoy the production with a sense of expectation until the end.

The display mode displayed by the stand information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pb becomes "PSA mode" when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. 300 to 302, as described above. The "big hit count", "start count", "acquisition count", "probability variation count", "start count non-display" and "big hit history" are displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd).

The main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pb and input to the stand information display device K (Kd) are the special prize 1 signal 1011 and the special prize middle signal 1012, and the prize ball payout signal. There are 1013, a start signal 1014 and a special prize 2 signal 1015.
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal that is continuously output between the jackpots of the pachinko machine Pa. The special prize middle signal 1012 is a signal that continuously outputs between a big hit, a small hit, and a probability change. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal that outputs one pulse in units of 10 acquired payouts. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pal when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are stopped. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal output at the time of winning a prize to a small hit attacker 303 or an attacker having a different big hit when used without a small hit.

In FIGS. 310 to 314, a start count non-display process (S3770) is performed in which a determination is made based on various signals input by the stand information display device K (Kd) and the “start count” is hidden on the liquid crystal display screen 891. Shown. As shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 first, the table information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the special prize intermediate signal 1012 is input to the table information display device K (Kd) (S3771). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize middle signal 1012 to the table information display device K (Kd) when the special prize is being given during the jackpot, probability change, or time reduction. The stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the special prize is in progress when the input of the special prize in-progress signal 1012 is turned ON (tr7).

Next, if the special prize is in progress (YES in S3771), the stand information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot ends from the output of the special prize 1 signal 1012 input to the stand information display device K (Kd). Judgment (S3772). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 to the table information display device K (Kd) when a big hit or a small hit is in progress. When the pachinko machine Pa hits a jackpot, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 and then turns off the signal after the jackpot ends. Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) determines that the jackpot has ended when the OFF (tr8, tr9) is turned off.

Next, if the jackpot ends (YES in S3772), the stand information display device K (Kd) resets the number of starts displayed in the start number display area 1034 (tr9, S3774). By resetting the number of starts at the end of the big hit in this way, by displaying the number of starts as much as possible even during the big hit, the maximum time to confirm to the player M how many rotations the big hit was made is maximized. It is possible to give a period.
The stand information display device K (Kd) does not display the number of starts on the liquid crystal display screen 891 even when the start signal 1014 is input (S3775).
In the conventional stand information display device, the start signal 1014 is received together with the stop of the special symbol of the pachinko machine Pb, and the number of starts is updated and displayed. However, the jackpot production is performed after the specified number of times such as shortening of time. In the pachinko machine Pb with specifications such as the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b or the effect symbol 308b, if the number of starts is not updated, it will be understood that a big hit was made in the middle of the effect, and the pachinko machine Pb The production of is also exciting.
By hiding the number of starts in this way, the machine information display device K (Kd) prevents the timing of the jackpot of the pachinko machine Pb from being known by the number of starts, so that the production is not aroused. The number of starts is displayed according to the production of the machine.

Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) performs a random lottery by the built-in CPU, and determines the content to be displayed in the start number display area 1034 from the start number display area display list 1036 as shown in FIG. 313. (S3776). As shown in FIG. 312, the stand information display device K (Kd) selects from the start count display area display list 1036 in the start count display area 1034 of the liquid crystal display screen 891 during the period when the start count is hidden (1041). The displayed "Time saving" is displayed. In this way, the platform information display device K (Kd) can know the current state of the pachinko machine Pb by displaying the game state on the liquid crystal display screen 891 even if the number of starts is not displayed. In addition to "time saving", in the case of probability change, "probability change in progress" may be displayed.
In addition to the above, the contents of the start count display area display list 1036 include "chance", "tomorrow is open at 9 o'clock", "○○ cake is available as a free gift", and "weather is fine". These displayed contents can be quoted from the above-mentioned advertisement content information, and by providing the displayed contents at the position of the liquid crystal display screen 891 that the player M usually pays attention to, the stand information display device K (Kd) advertises. It is possible to impress the content on the player.

Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) receives the input of the start signal 1014 and stores the number of starts in the built-in storage area in order to finally notify the player M even if the number of starts is not displayed. I'm counting.
Next, the stand information display device K (Kd) repeats the above processing (S3772 to S3779) until it becomes a big hit (NO in S3772) if it is in the special prize such as during time reduction or probabilistic change (YES in S3779). ..

Further, the stand information display device K (Kd) determines that a big hit is being made when the special prize 1 signal 1011 is turned ON (tr10). Further, when the special prize middle signal 1012 is turned OFF (tr11), it is determined that the time reduction or the probability change is completed and the special prize is finished.
Then, the stand information display device K (Kd) displays the number of starts (S3773) if it is not in the special prize (time reduction or probability change) (NO in S3771, NO in S3779) or in the big hit (YES in S3772). .. In this way, by displaying the number of starts after the big hit or after the end of the special prize, the player M can grasp the result of his / her game in a satisfactory state after enjoying the production of the game machine. ..

If the pachinko machine Pb is a type in which the production ends after the probability change and the opening probability of the special symbol 2 start port 304 is improved, the stand information display device K (Kd) starts. After hiding the number of times, the number of starts may be displayed in the start number display area 1034 after the probability change is completed, and the player M can confirm the remaining number of time reductions during the time reduction. The trigger for the end of the probability change may be determined from the special prize intermediate signal that does not include the time reduction.
In addition, the stand information display device K (Kd) displays the number of starts after hiding the number of starts (the number of times the special symbol is confirmed), after the number of starts reaches the specified number of times of probability change or time reduction, or during a big hit. The specification may be such that the number of starts is displayed in the area 1034.

(Set value management system for set values of game machines installed in the amusement park)
A setting value management system for managing the setting values of the game machines installed in the amusement park will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 299 and 315 to 330.

First, a set value management system for managing set values will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 299, and 330. The hall computer 90 manages the set value management system related to the set value. As shown in FIG. 299, the hall computer 90 is composed of a personal computer, a monitor 97, and a server 95. Further, the hall computer 90 processes and stores the game information obtained from the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA on the server 95 connected to the hall computer 90. In addition, the monitor 97 operates or displays information on the game machine such as set values and information on profits on the screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 330, the setting management system is located in front of the keyhole of the slot machine SMA, and each camera unit 1070 is provided so as to block the keyhole of the slot machine SMA. Each camera unit 1070 is connected to the medal lending machine CT, and the position is fixed by a key. In this way, by closing the keyhole of the slot machine SMA using each camera unit 1070 with a key, it is possible to prevent the slot machine SMA from prying the keyhole and replacing the board or the like, and to specify the goto. It is possible to suppress evidence such as images and videos to the person who said. In this way, each camera unit 1070 is used as a tool for obtaining anti-goto measures and sales information in the same manner as each camera 69 connected to the ball lending machine PT of the pachinko machine P described above.

Each unit camera unit 1070 is provided with each unit camera 69F for authenticating the face of the player M and identifying a person toward the player M side. Further, each unit camera unit 1070 is provided with each unit camera 69U capable of photographing the effect liquid crystal 1105 and the reel pattern 1040 above.
The stop of the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) due to the push is different depending on the individual ability, and the player M may be able to obtain a large number of balls by technical intervention. Since the setting management system has different abilities for each player M, gender and age groups are used by face recognition technology from each camera 69F connected to the medal lending machine CT in order to grasp the degree of technical intervention for each person. I am getting information about people such as.
In the ball lending machine CT, the player M operates a medal storage or medal lending operation from the operation screen 1085 provided on the ball lending machine liquid crystal operation unit 1080, and pays out medals from the bent tip nozzle 1083 of the medal payout nozzle 1082. Pay out to the saucer 1106.

Next, as a representative example of the gaming machine provided with the set value used in this embodiment, the slot machine SMA will be described with reference to FIGS. 315 to 318 and 330. FIG. 315 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of the reels of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram showing a comparison of the number of payouts in a symbol in which the reel of the slot machine SMA is stopped. FIG. 317 is a comparison table showing the number of slots obtained at the time of bonus of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 318 is a comparison table regarding the probabilities and machine percentages at the set values of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing the slot machine SMA and the medal lending machine CT.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 315, 316, and 330, the slot machine SMA is provided with a reel symbol 1040 having three reels (1041, 1042, 1043) in the upper center of the housing. The slot machine SMA also includes an effect liquid crystal 1105, an effect lamp 1109, a side effect lamp 1108, a stop button 1102 (1102L, 1102M, 1102R), a start lever 1101, a medal payout outlet 1107, and a payout medal tray 1106.
As shown in FIGS. 315 and 330, the reel symbol 1040 includes reels (1041, 1042, 1043) on which the symbols are arranged, and the slot machine SMA stops the symbols by pressing the stop button 1102. Depending on the combination of the stopped symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the storage counter or from the medal payout outlet 1107 to the payout medal tray 1106.

For example, the arrangement of the symbols on which the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) shown in FIG. 316 (A) is stopped shows the case where the number of payouts from the slot machine SMA is 15. The arrangement of the symbols in which the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) are stopped shown in FIG. 316 (B) shows the case where the number of payouts from the slot machine SMA is 12. In this way, in the slot machine SMA, the control of the stop of the symbol is to push the symbol by the technical intervention of the player M, stop the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) at the spots, and the stopped reel symbol. Depending on the combination of the symbols arranged in 1040, the number of payouts will differ.

As shown in FIG. 317, the slot machine SMA described in this embodiment has two types of jackpots, big (BIG) and regular (REG), as types at the time of winning a bonus. In particular, if the jackpot is regular (REG), the total number of payouts at the time of the jackpot can be 112 if it is a complete capture that succeeds in all the pushes, but if all the hits fail, 82 It ends with a sheet. Also, if the jackpot is BIG, the difference from the complete capture difference is about 3 cards.

As shown in the set value list 1046 of FIG. 318, the slot machine SMA has a high probability of regular (REG) and a low probability of big (BIG) when the set value T is set. Therefore, the total probability of bonuses is higher than the set value 6. In the case of the set value T of this slot machine SMA, there is a difference between the case of complete capture by pressing and the machine allocation (so-called ball ejection rate) due to failure of pressing. In addition, the probability of a regular (REG) jackpot is 1/100, which is higher than the set value 6, and many regular (REG) jackpots appear, so there is a difference depending on the ability of the player M to push. Therefore, it is rare to obtain the data according to the theoretical value in the set value.
Further, in the slot machine SMA, when the set value T, the machine percentage is close to the set value 6 of the slot machine SMA, and the machine percentage is more than the set value 5 to be 109.7%. Therefore, the player M can get more balls than in the case of the set value 5 if he / she completely captures each big hit.

<Control processing of the setting value management system when setting the setting value>
Next, the control process in the set value management system for setting the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to 329. FIG. 319 is a table showing information on the jackpot of the slot machine SMA for each person. FIG. 320 is a chart showing the ratio of the number of players for each day of the week and the age group and the correction value for each age group. FIG. 321 is a table showing the technical intervention rank and the success rate. FIG. 322 is a comparison table showing the theoretical value and the measured value for each unit. FIG. 323 is a comparison table showing the set value and the correction value. FIG. 324 is a comparison table regarding the machine allocation in the set value of the slot machine SMA for each machine in a part. FIG. 325 is a schematic view of an operation screen showing input of set values for each unit displayed on the monitor 97. FIG. 326 is a schematic view of the operation screen 1060 showing the hall layout and set values displayed on the monitor 97. FIG. 327 is an enlarged schematic view of a part of the operation screen 1060 displayed on the monitor 97. 328 and 329 are flowcharts showing a set value control process (S3780) for controlling the display of the set value and the hall layout of the set value by the hall computer 90.

<< Gathering information on the character of the player and the success rate of technical intervention >>
The hall computer 90 collects information as an important factor in determining the set value. As the information, information on the success rate of technical intervention by person and the age group by day of the week is required. The ball lending machine CT determines the replacement of persons from the information from the above-mentioned cameras 69 (69F), and determines the gender and age group by the face recognition engine of the above-mentioned individual face recognition device 800. In addition to these face recognitions, it is also possible to make a judgment by biometrics such as vocal cords, fingerprints, veins or irises.
Then, the information is sent from the ball lending machine CT to the hall computer 90. The hall computer 90 links the information obtained from the slot machine SMA with the information that identifies the person obtained from the ball lending machine CT, generates the technical intervention rank list 1048 shown in FIG. 319 as a form, and sends it to the server 95. It is memorized and displayed on the monitor 97.

As shown in the technical intervention rank list 1048 of FIG. 319, the hall computer 90 has "type of jackpot" for "person A" and "person B", "number of hits" at the time of one jackpot, and up to the jackpot. "Number of times", "Big hit probability" during the game, "Difference from the complete capture" between the number of acquisitions at the time of big hit and the case of complete capture, and "Success" in the number of acquisitions when 100% is the case of complete capture Calculate the rate every time. The hall computer 90 refers to the technical intervention rank assignment table 1071 shown in FIG. 321 stored in the server 95, and determines the technical intervention rank for each person from the average value of the technical intervention rate. The hall computer 90 also calculates the ratio of the number of technical intervention ranks at the same time. Then, as shown in FIG. 319, the hall computer 90 can rank each person, store the aggregated data in the server 95, make a list on the monitor 97, and output it as a form.

Further, FIG. 320 (A) shows an age group graph 1049 in which the age group that played the target slot machine SMA is specified by the face recognition engine and the number of players M for each age group is graphed for each day of the week. Then, the hall computer 90 shows the technical intervention success rate table 1045 by age group in which the success rate of the technical intervention by age group was calculated from the data shown in FIG. 319 described above in FIG. 320 (B). Further, the hall computer 90 calculates the ratio of the age group from the age group graph 1049 for each day of the week shown in FIG. 320 (A), and calculates the correction value for each day of the week from the technical intervention success rate table 1045 for each age group shown in FIG. 320 (B). The machine allocation correction value table 1058 by age group and day of the week shown in FIG. 320 (C) is provided.

Next, the hall computer 90 sets the set value while using the expected machine percentage as a guide when setting the set value, but since there is always a discrepancy between the set value and the actual measured value, the above-mentioned day of the week is used. In addition to by age and age, correction values are calculated to correct deviations from the basic measured values.
FIG. 322 (A) shows the “set value” for each unit, the theoretical value “theoretical value machine discount” and “machine allocation (complete capture)”, the actual measurement data “measured machine discount”, and the non-complete capture and complete capture. The "correction multiplication factor" of the time is shown. The hall computer 90 calculates the correction multiplication factor by dividing the actually measured "measured machine discount" by the "theoretical machine discount" and multiplying it by 100. The hall computer 90 calculates the average value of the correction multiplication rate from the collected data for each set value.

In FIG. 323 (A), the average value of the correction multiplication rate for each set value calculated by the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 322 is divided into the time of complete capture and the time of non-complete capture, and the average value of the correction multiplication rate is compared. Is shown. The average value of the correction multiplication rate is calculated from the data of each unit by dividing it into two, one for complete capture and the other for non-complete capture, for each set value.
If nothing is done, it will be two correction values and it will be difficult to use it as an index. Therefore, it is necessary to use one correction value. Therefore, the hall computer 90 divides the success rate according to the collected technical intervention success rate shown in FIG. 321 into four stages. Further, the hall computer 90 divides the average value of the correction multiplication rate from the time of non-complete capture to the time of complete capture shown in FIG. 323 (A) into four stages according to the technical intervention rank. Then, as shown in the correction value calculation table 1074 of FIG. 323 (B), the hall computer 90 multiplies the average value of the correction multiplication rate divided into four stages by the number of people ratio for each rank shown in FIG. 321 for each set value. , The average value is calculated as the correction value in the rightmost column. As described above, the hall computer 90 has high accuracy in the set value by applying the correction value calculated by taking into account the ratio of the number of people in the measured technical intervention rank to the ratio of the machine division between the non-complete capture time and the complete capture time. It is possible to predict the machine rate.

<< Control processing of setting value management system >>
Next, the set value control process (S3780) of the hall computer 90 when applying the above-mentioned correction value and setting the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 329.
As shown in FIG. 325, the employee MS of the amusement park sets a set value of a plurality of slot machines SMA of the entire amusement place, applies a correction value from the set value, and averages the total machine allocation to 100. The case of setting the target as% will be described. In the hall computer 90, the setting field 1075 of the operation screen 1060 shows the "previous setting value" in the previous setting value column 1061 as the previous setting value for each unit, and the hall computer 90 displays the "calculated setting value" as the setting value calculated by the hall computer 90. Is displayed. Further, the hall computer 90 displays the target setting field 1076 on the operation screen 1060. The employee MS operates the operation screen 1060 of the monitor 97 of the hall computer 90, and inputs the target value as "100%" in the target setting field 1076. If the "calculation setting field" shown in FIG. 325 is set to be fixed, the hall computer 90 reflects the previously set value and calculates the set value. In this way, by providing the previous setting value column 1061, it becomes a reference value for this setting and the setting may be read by the player M. Therefore, the employee MS sets the setting with reference to the previous setting value. It will be easier to determine this setting, noting that it will be overlooked.

First, when the hall computer 90 operates the set value control process (S3780) shown in FIGS. 328 and 329, the hall computer 90 displays the “pachislot corner layout” shown in FIG. 326 (S3781). In the "pachislot corner layout", the layout of all the slot machines SMA and the previous setting value are superimposed and displayed in the previous setting value column 1061 (S3782), and the newly set setting value is newly set next to it. It is displayed in column 1063. FIG. 327 is an enlarged view of the AB portion surrounded by the broken line of the “pachislot corner layout”. The hall computer 90 can set a set value by enlarging a part of the layout on the operation screen 1060, but the hatched part shown in the figure is the same as the previous set value in the 405 series. The fixed state is shown on the fixed display 1062.

Next, the employee MS inputs the date and time to be set in the date and time input field 1067 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325 (S3783). In the date and time input field 1067, the day of the week is automatically input by the calendar function.
Next, the employee MS selects automatic or manual from the mode selection field 1065 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325 (S3783). When the employee MS selects manual (YES in S3783), the hall computer 90 causes the employee MS to select whether or not to apply the correction value from the correction value setting field 1066 on the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90. (S3796). When the employee MS selects not to apply the correction value (NO in S3796), the hall computer 90 displays the theoretical machine percentage on the operation screen 1060 (S3977), and the employee MS sets all the set values. Is input to the operation screen 1060 (S3798). For the set value input by the employee MS, the hall computer 90 totals the machine percentage, which is the theoretical value of all the machines, and obtains the average value (S3805).

The hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit in the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). Further, as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine percentage of all the machines in the calculated value display column 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 (S3808). In this way, since the hall computer 90 displays the set values along the hall layout, the employee MS can predict the predicted ball ejection, the stacking condition of the ball boxes, etc. while looking at the layout. It is easy to imagine the impression given to the player M from the assumption that the ball boxes are loaded.

Further, when the employee MS manually sets and applies the correction value (YES in S3796), the hall computer 90 extracts the correction value shown in FIG. 323 (B) described above for each set value (YES in S3796). S3799), the correction value is set (S3801). The hall computer 90 calculates the machine percentage by multiplying the theoretical machine percentage for each set value for each model by the above-mentioned correction value (S3802). The employee MS inputs the set values of all the units from the operation screen 1060 (S3803), and the hall computer 90 calculates the machine percentage corrected by the correction values of all the units based on the input set values (S3804). ..
For the set value input by the employee MS, the hall computer 90 totals the machine percentages to which the correction values of all the machines are applied, and calculates the average value (S3805). The hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit in the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). Further, as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine percentage of all the machines in the calculated value display column 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 (S3808).

Further, when the employee MS selects the automatic input (NO in S3784), the employee MS selects the correction value selection field 1064 by age group / day of the week on the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325 by age group. -Select whether or not to apply the correction value for each day of the week (S3785).
Next, if the employee MS chooses to apply the age-specific / day-of-week correction values (YES in S3785), the hall computer 90 extracts the age-specific technical intervention success rate 1045 accumulated in the server 95 (YES in S3785). S3786). Further, the hall computer 90 extracts a model to which the correction value for each age group and each day of the week is applied (S3787). Next, the hall computer 90 sets the set value from the machine allocation correction value table 1058 for each age group and day of the week shown in FIG. 320 (C) according to the day of the week (S3788). It should be noted that the machine discount correction value for each day of the week and the machine discount correction value for each age group are required to be applied, but only one of the correction values is applied to obtain the average value of the machine discount. May be good. In particular, by age, the ability of technical intervention tends to decline with age, so by applying the correction value by age, it is possible to calculate closer to the measured value. Further, regarding the days of the week, since the age distribution differs greatly between weekdays and holidays, the hall computer 90 can calculate the value closer to the actual measurement value by specifying the correction value based on the distribution of the number of people by day of the week. ..

Next, the hall computer 90 calculates the machine discount for each set value by multiplying the theoretical machine discount, the correction value, and the machine discount correction value for each age group and day of the week as shown in the calculated value list 1047 of FIG. 324 (S3789). .. For example, in the "315 series" shown in the upper part of FIG. 324, when the calculated setting value is "T", the correction value "0" in FIG. 323 is set to "109.7%" of the theoretical value machine discount (at the time of complete capture). Multiplying by ".9686" and further multiplying by the correction value "0.97" in FIG. 320 (C) because the day of the week is Saturday, "103.07%" shown in the upper part of FIG. 324 is calculated. In this way, this system applies statistically measured values such as skill by age group and ratio by age group for each day of the week to the theoretical value, so that the predicted value approaches the measured value and is an index when setting. It is possible to

Next, the hall computer 90 calculates the set value by a random number (S3793), and obtains the average value of the machine percentages of all the machines by the set value determined by the random number value (S3794). Then, the hall computer 90 sets the permissible range of the calculated value of the machine allocation as shown in FIG. 325, for example, until the target value falls within the permissible range of “+ −−0.5” in the permissible range setting column 1069, S3793 The process of S3794 is repeated (NO of S3795).
By such processing, if the setting on the store side is artificially performed, the setting may be read by the player M due to a habitual habit. Therefore, the hall computer 90 should not be a habitual setting. By defining it with a random number, it is possible to prevent the player M from overlooking the setting. Further, the hall computer 90 can increase the calculation speed and prevent an infinite loop process by setting the allowable range of the calculated value in the allowable range setting field 1069 when calculating the average value of the machine discount. it can.

Then, when the calculated average value of the machine allocation reaches the target value (YES in S3795), the hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit in the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). ). Further, as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine percentage of all the machines in the calculated value display column 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 (S3808).

Next, if the employee MS does not choose to apply the correction values by age group and day of the week (NO in S3785), the hall computer 90 sets the theoretical value machine discount (at the time of complete capture) for each set value. (S3791), and the theoretical value machine discount (at the time of complete capture) is multiplied by the correction value shown in FIG. 323 to calculate for each set value (S3792). Then, the hall computer 90 calculates the set value by a random number (S3793), and obtains the average value of the machine percentages of all the machines by the set value determined by the random number value (S3794).
Further, the hall computer 90 repeats the processes of S3793 to S3794 until the target value is within the set error range, for example, the “+ -0.5” allowable range set in FIG. 325 (NO in S3795). ..
By such processing, if the setting on the store side is artificially performed, the setting may be read by the player M due to a habitual habit. Therefore, the hall computer 90 should not be a habitual setting. By defining it with a random number, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked. Further, the hall computer 90 can increase the calculation speed and prevent an infinite loop process by setting an allowable range of the calculated value when calculating the average value of the machine discount.

Then, when the calculated average value of the machine allocation reaches the target value (YES in S3795), the hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit in the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). ). Further, as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine percentage of all the machines in the calculated value display column 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 (S3808). Since the hall computer 90 displays the set values according to the hall layout, the employee MS can predict the predicted ball ejection and the stacking condition of the ball boxes while looking at the layout, and load the ball boxes. It is easy to imagine the impression given to the player M from the assumption of the state.

As described above, in this system, the employee MS can be set in a state close to the actually measured machine discount value automatically by determining only the target value of the machine discount, as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to require skill to set the set value, and the setting can be done easily. In addition, since this system does not read the habit of setting by random numbers, the employee MS can perform the setting work with peace of mind. In addition, although there was a large variation in the correction value due to the technical intervention of the player M, by calculating the average of the correction values from the distribution of the number of people according to the rank of the actual technical intervention, the machine allocation based on the prediction closer to the actual measurement value It became possible to calculate.

(A system that supports technical intervention for players who play game machines installed in the game hall)
A system for supporting technical intervention for a player who plays a game machine installed in the game hall will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 349.
<Technical intervention support unit>
The technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 335. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing the slot machine SMA and the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 331 is a perspective view showing each camera unit 1070 mounted on the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 332 is a perspective view showing a state in which each camera unit 1070 mounted on the medal lending machine CT is opened and closed. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the technical intervention support unit 1100. FIG. 334 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 335 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image processing unit 1092.

The technical intervention support unit 1100 is a unit that supports a player who pushes a desired symbol when stopping the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) of the slot machine SMA by the stop button 1102. The technical intervention support unit 1100 is mainly composed of each camera unit 1070, a technical intervention support processing unit 1090 which is application software provided in the medal lending machine CT, an image processing unit 1092, and a liquid crystal operation unit 1080.

First, a medal lending machine CT provided with a processing unit for controlling the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 334. The medal lending machine CT reads the programs of ROM 1123, RAM 1124 and HDD 1125 connected to the main CPU 1122, and controls each device. A medium such as an SD card may be used instead of the HDD 1125. The image processing unit 1092 is further equipped with a GPU or VPU (not shown) to increase the speed of image processing or video processing such as image data comparison processing.
Each device mainly includes a liquid crystal operation unit 1080, a card processing unit 807, a bill processing unit 809, each unit camera unit 1070 described later, a speaker SOU, a tip nozzle 1083, and a counting unit 1129.

The medal lending machine CT is provided with a banknote processing unit 809 in which the player M inserts banknotes of 10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 1,000 yen, etc., and processes the inserted banknotes to lend a medal CM as a game medium. ing. From the medal lending machine CT, it is possible to lend the game medium until the balance is exhausted.
The medal lending machine CT is provided with a tip nozzle 1083 extending to the medal tray 1106 of the slot machine SMA. The tip nozzle 1083 drives the medal lending drive unit 1126, and can pay out the stored medals to the medal tray 1106 of the slot machine SMA at predetermined intervals.

The medal lending machine CT includes a card processing unit 807. The card processing unit 807 includes a drive motor 811 for operating the insertion and ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 inserted from the card insertion / ejection port 811, and the number of balls held in the card by the card reader / writer 804. And the contents such as the value of the balance are being rewritten. Further, a card storage unit for the guest card is provided so that the employee MS does not have to replenish the remaining money and the balls (acquired balls) after the guest card 5 is recorded and moved.
The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a speaker 831 so that an error state and handling can be announced, and a warning sound, an operation sound, and a guidance sound are generated by a drive circuit 1132.

The medal lending machine CT is provided with a counting unit 1129 at the bottom or middle portion (not shown) capable of counting medals acquired by the player M from the slot machine SMA by the counting counter 1127. Further, the counter shutter 832 prevents erroneous counting of the medal CM to be counted.
The medal lending machine CT is provided with a liquid crystal operation unit 1080 capable of operating the medal lending machine CT in the central portion. The liquid crystal operation unit 1080 is provided with a screen that can be touch-operated.

Each camera 69F (FIG. 331) is set so that each camera (69F, U) is most focused when the player M is seated, and an individual is identified by capturing the front face or profile. are doing. Further, each of the cameras 69F and U (FIG. 331) is configured to be able to capture the movement of the player M and the liquid crystal 1105 for directing the slot machine SMA and the reel symbol 1040 by using the pan / tilt / zoom functions. Has been done. The pan / tilt / zoom function is driven by the drive unit 1076, and each camera 69F is controlled by the controller 1131 of the medal lending machine CT from the operation terminal 11 connected to the face recognition server 80 or the hall computer 90.
In addition, the mobile terminal device 40 of the employee MS can be operated while watching the image of each camera 69F (FIG. 331) via the communication server 10, and the employee MS can operate the player M even from a remote place. Can be monitored. In particular, it is effective for monitoring people who need attention.

The medal lending machine CT is connected to the player M via an IF (interface) 808 with a stand information display device K provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 that displays useful information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the slot machine SMA. There is.
Further, the medal lending machine CT transmits the data of the individual face recognition server 820 described above, the sales data of the medal lending machine CT, and the data obtained by counting the medal CM acquired by the counting unit 1129 to the hall computer 93. It is connected via IF (interface) 808.

Next, each camera unit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 333. Each camera unit 1070 connected to the medal lending machine CT is equipped with cameras 69U and F, and is installed in a state of blocking the key 1104 for opening and closing the slot machine SMA. Each unit camera unit 1070 is mainly equipped with each unit camera 69F, each unit camera 69U, support display unit 1072, sealing key 1081, speaker SOU, and microphone MIN.
As shown in FIG. 331, each camera 69F captures the front surface of the player M and captures the state of the game of the player M. Each camera 69U images the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA and the liquid crystal 1105 for production.

The support display unit 1072 is provided above each camera unit 1070, and corresponds to the arrangement of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. Each (1072L, C, R) of the support display unit 1072 corresponds to the reel symbol 1040 (1041, 1042, 1043) and the stop button 1102 (L, M, R), and each of the stop buttons 1102 (L, M, R) R) is pressed, and the timing for stopping the reel symbol 1040 set by the control described later is displayed by lighting the built-in LED or the like to notify the player M.

As shown in FIGS. 331 and 332, the rotation of the sealing key 1081 is fixed by the key MKY so that the slot machine SMA cannot be easily opened and closed. As a result, the slot machine SMA is opened and closed, and the goto act of exchanging the board or the like is prevented. Further, as shown in FIG. 333, since the rotation detection sensor 1084 is provided in each camera unit 1070, if the sealing key 1081 is illegally operated, the illegal operation processing unit provided in the medal lending machine CT is provided. The hall computer system 90 is notified by 1091. In addition, when the sealing key 1081 is forcibly rotated, it is considered to be fraudulent, and the state of the fraudulent operation is imaged or recorded by the cameras 69F and U of each unit, so that the illegal operation such as a goto act can be dealt with. It is possible.
Then, the hall computer system 90 immediately notifies the employee MS, and the employee MS can monitor or rush to the slot machine SMA.
The speaker SOU is provided on the bottom surface of each camera unit 1070 so that voice guidance of the operation can be performed when the technical intervention support unit 1100 is operated. The microphone MIN can record the sound emitted by the player M, and the music for the production and the production sound from the slot machine SMA.

Next, the configuration of the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 333. The technical intervention support unit 1100 is divided into a camera unit 1070 and a medal lending machine CT described above. Each device (microphone MIN, speaker SOU, cameras 69F, U, support display unit 1072) of each unit camera unit 1070 is controlled by the technical intervention support processing unit 1090 built in the ROM 1123 or HDD 1125 of the medal lending machine CT. ing.
Further, the technical intervention support processing unit 1090 is connected to the image processing unit 1092 and the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. As shown in FIG. 335, the image processing unit 1092 includes a face recognition processing unit 1095, a symbol determination processing unit 1093 that determines the position and rotation cycle of the reel symbol 1040, and an effect screen determination processing unit that determines an image of the effect screen. It is provided with a data storage unit 1094 for storing image data such as 1097, a reel symbol 1040 registered in advance, and a symbol for effect.
Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (B), the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 is used for setting the symbols of the reel symbols 1040 to be aligned at the time of pressing.

Next, the control process of the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 333 to 344. FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing the display of the screen of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 after recognizing the image of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 337 is a schematic view showing the display of the operation screen of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the technical intervention support process (S3810). FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination process (S3820). FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of determination of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing another determination of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing another determination of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 343 is a time chart showing the initial setting of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 344 is a time chart showing the state of the technical intervention support process S3810 of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA.

First, a method of image processing for determining a symbol will be described. In this embodiment, three symbol determination methods will be described, but any method may be adopted, and one of the three methods may be automatically or manually selected according to the symbol. Further, a plurality of methods may be combined and the two methods may be used at the same time.
A method of performing the first image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 340. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the judgment of the symbol, a total of 9 frames (mx1 to 11j) are formed by 10 boundary lines (1112a to 1112j) so as to correspond to three reels and to divide the reel symbol 1040 into three equal parts in one lateral direction. It forms mx9). The symbol appearing in this one frame is determined by image processing. For example, among the symbols extracted from the image having a frame rate of 60 fps, as shown in FIG. 315, among the symbols, the registered "7" symbol It is determined whether or not there is a symbol having the same shape as the shape.

As shown in FIG. 340 (A), the symbol determination processing unit 1093 captures a diagram in which the extracted symbol is considered to be the same as the symbol registered from each frame area (mx1 to mx9), and the captured diagram is captured. As shown in FIG. 340 (B), the grayscaled data is converted into data (1112k to 1112m) by automatically determining a threshold value and binarizing black and white. Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1112k to 1112m) to convert the shape of the symbol into data. The digitized data appears as 1112n, 1112o, 1112p, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not the data is located.

Since the number of revolutions per minute of the slot machine SMA is set to be less than 80 revolutions, 0. One cycle of most slot machines SMA is around 0.78 seconds, but the symbol determination processing unit 1093 sets the cycle in which this symbol appears on the front of the reel display (SCM) as shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 343. Is captured by each camera 69U, and cycle measurement and confirmation are performed for each cycle in which data 1112n, 1112o, 1112p (FIG. 340) of mx4, mx5, mx6 (FIG. 340) appear, and the cycle of one rotation of the reel symbol 1040 is determined. The calculated average and the like are totaled, and the data of the totaled cycle is stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for technical intervention support processing (S3810), which will be described later.

A method of performing the second image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 341. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the judgment of the symbol, a total of 9 frames (mx1 to mx9) are formed by 10 boundary lines (1113a to 1113j) so as to correspond to three reels and to divide one reel into three equal parts in the horizontal direction. Is forming. The symbol appearing in this one frame is determined by image processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 315, the strong light of the "7" symbol is emitted in the symbol extracted from the image having a frame rate of 60 fps. The transmitted shape data is registered, and it is determined whether or not there is data having the same shape as the data 1113k, 1113l, and 1113m (FIG. 341).
As shown in FIGS. 341 (A) and 341 (B), in the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA, a reel lamp 1046C is provided as a lamp for illuminating the reel from the inside in the rotating reel. The reel symbol 1040 illuminated by the reel lamp 1046C is formed so that the light of this lamp transmits only a specific symbol. Therefore, during the rotation of the reel, there is a part where a specific symbol is brightly illuminated, and the bright part makes it possible to press the button. In this way, the identification method based on the difference in brightness depending on the illuminance makes it easier to identify the position of the set symbol, especially in a dark hall.

In this way, the difference in illuminance between the light and dark illuminance illuminated by the light of the reel lamp 1046C is recognized by each camera 69U, and the figure extracted from the captured figure is grayscaled as shown in FIG. 341 (B). The grayscaled data is converted into data (1113k to 1113m) by automatically determining a threshold value and binarizing black and white. Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1113k to 1113m) to convert the shape of the symbol into data. The digitized data appears as 1113k, 1113l, and 1113m, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not the position is located. After that, as described above, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 343, the cycle was initially measured and confirmed for each cycle, and the average of one rotation of the reel symbol 1040 was calculated and tabulated. The cycle data is stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for technical intervention support processing (S3810), which will be described later.

A method of performing the third image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 342. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the judgment of the symbol, a total of 9 frames (mx1 to mx9) are formed by 10 boundary lines (1111a to 1111j) so as to correspond to three reels and to divide one reel into three equal parts in the horizontal direction. Is forming. The symbol appearing in this one frame is determined by image processing. For example, among the symbols extracted from the image having a frame rate of 60 fps, as shown in FIG. 315, among the symbols, the registered "7" symbol It is determined whether or not there is a symbol having the same shape as the data 1111q, 1111r, 1111x, 1111y1111z, and 1111ab (FIG. 342) of the portion of the shape that protrudes from the line.
As shown in FIGS. 342 (A) and 342 (B), the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA has a specific symbol having a wider width than a normal symbol and has vertical lines (1111a, 1111b, 1111c, 1111d, 1111e, 1111f). ) Is subtracted, the symbol is formed so that it can be easily identified even during the rotation of the reel symbol 1040. Therefore, the reel symbol 1040 is easy to press with the protruding portion as a mark.

In this way, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 recognizes the portion outside the vertical line (1111a, 1111b, 1111c, 1111d, 1111e, 1111f) of the reel symbol 1040 by each camera 69U, and captures the figure. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), the extracted figure is grayscaled, and the grayscaled data is converted into data (1111k to 1111m) by automatically setting a threshold value and binarizing black and white. Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1111k to 1111m) and converts the shape of the symbol into data. The digitized data appears as 1111q, 1111r, 1111x, 1111y, 1111z, 1111ab, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not the data is located. After that, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 343 as described above, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 initially measures and confirms the cycle for each cycle, and determines the cycle of one rotation of the reel symbol 1040, such as the average. Is totaled, and the data of the totaled cycle is stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for technical intervention support processing (S3810) and the like, which will be described later.

After the initial processing as described above, the technical intervention support processing (S3810) is performed based on the operation of the player M. The technical intervention support process (S3810) shown in FIG. 338 will be described below.
When the slot machine SMA hits a big hit, the player M is flagged, and as shown in FIG. 336 (A), the player M is displayed to hit the effect liquid crystal 1105 of the slot machine SMA to align the symbols. The technical intervention support unit 1100 identifies the winning symbol from the effect display of FIG. 336 (A) recognized by each camera 69U, and as shown in FIG. 336 (B), the recommended symbol of the aligned symbol is the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. To display. If the recommended symbol is acceptable, the player M presses "OK" and proceeds to the technical intervention support process (S3820). If the player M wants to select a different symbol, he / she presses "select symbol" to move to the symbol selection screen as shown in FIG. 337 (A), and the symbol corresponding to the reel symbol 1040 is displayed. Appears and selects reel symbols (1041, 1042, 1043) from the touch panel of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 as shown in FIG. 337 (B) (S3811).

Next, the player M sets the display color of the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) from the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 (FIG. 336 (B)) (S3812), and the support display unit 1072 (L, C, The illuminance of the display color of R) is set (S3813). Further, the above-mentioned symbol determination method is set in the data storage unit 1094 at the initial stage of the slot machine SMA, and the symbol determination processing unit 1093 extracts from the data storage unit 1094 during this processing (S3814), and the reel symbol 1040. Use the judgment method that suits you. When the player M starts the support for the technical intervention as described above, the player M performs the symbol determination process (S3820).

Explaining the first method as an example, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 captures an image of a frame rate of 60 fps from each camera 69U as shown in FIG. 340 (A) (S3821), and captures the image. As shown in FIG. 340 (B), the figure extracted from the above is grayscaled so that the parts other than "7" are black (S3822), and the grayscaled data automatically sets the threshold value (S3823). Black and white are binarized and converted into data (1112k to 1112m) (S3824). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing (S3825) on the binarized data (1112k to 1112m) and converts the shape of the symbol into data (S3826). The digitized data appears as 1112n, 1112o, 1112p, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not they match (S3827).

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 344, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 extracts the numerical value of the average cycle aggregated in advance, and each camera 69U compares each reel symbol 1040 (1041, 1042, 1043) with the value. ) Is measured at the position of the front surface (SCM) of the reel display (S3828). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 lights the blinking of the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) at the timing before the symbol set by the reel symbol 1040 passes at the position on the front surface (SCM) of the reel display. .. As for this timing, even if the reel symbol 1040 is pushed from the front of the four symbols, if it is a hit, the slot machine SM can control the stop in the hit arrangement (so-called pull-in range), so the timing before the four symbols (so-called pull-in range). SPO) starts the light emission of the support display unit 1072 (S3832). Therefore, when the timing (SPO) is notified, the range of timing at which the stop buttons 1102L, M, and R are pressed increases for the player, and it becomes easier for the player to press the button.
Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs lighting control until it is confirmed that the set symbol has stopped (YES in S3832). The symbol determination processing unit 1093 provides a determination period (HPO) for determining whether or not the set symbol has stopped in the next rotatable stop period (WT) after the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SM has stopped. ing. As described above, since there is a certain period during which the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA stays in the stop period (WT), image processing such as determination can be performed with high accuracy.
The time chart shown in FIG. 344 shows one reel symbol 1040 as an example, but the same applies to the other two reel symbols 1040.

Through the above processing, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 measures the cycle of each reel symbol 1040, recognizes the set reel symbol 1040 to be stopped by each camera 69U, and supports display unit 1072 (L, C, R). Light emission control is performed while synchronizing with.
The technical intervention support unit 1100 may be controlled not only by light emission control but also by sound from the speaker SOU.
In addition, when the set symbol is difficult to recognize by image processing, the technical intervention support unit 1100 determines the number of frames based on the characteristic symbol and determines the position of the symbol to be stopped. It may be a control to notify.

Next, a modified example of each camera unit 1070 (a, b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 to 348. The same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration as those described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.
345 and 346 show an example in which each camera unit 1070a is attached to the smoke separation board 1120 by a support piece 1121 bent in an L shape. The block configuration is the same as in FIGS. 333 and 334.
Each camera unit 1070a is installed on the end face of the smoke separation board 1120, and the position of imaging changes with the position of the drawer of the smoke separation board 1120, so that the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) can be easily seen and each camera 69U. , The imaging position of F can be changed.
As described above, the positions of the cameras 69U and F for each camera can be changed to pan / tilt / zoom or the like by control.

347 and 348 show an example in which each camera unit 1070b is provided near the tip of the tip nozzle 1083 from which the medal CM is rented. Each camera 69U is provided on the slot machine SMA side, and each camera 69F is provided on the player M side. Further, the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) is provided on the side of the tip nozzle 1083. As a result, the loan status of the medal MC can be recorded, and it is possible to grasp who was using the loaned medal MC.
Although the support display unit 1072 is provided in each camera unit 1070, it may be notified by the liquid crystal display of the above-mentioned unit information display device K as a notification means. Further, the stand information display device K may be provided with a support display unit 1072 that emits light.

(Game recording system)
The game recording system 1140 is a system that records a state in which a player M is playing a game of a game machine (pachinko machine P, slot machine SMA). In the present invention, the game recording system 1140 will be described on behalf of the slot machine SMA with reference to FIGS. 349 to 356.
<Configuration of game recording system>
The configuration of the game recording system 1140 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 356, the game recording system 1140 is provided with a pair of medal lending machines CT and the above-mentioned camera units 1070 for each slot machine SMA.
Further, the medal lending machine CT is provided with an image processing unit 1092 as described above, and is provided with an effect screen determination processing unit 1097 (FIG. 335). The effect screen determination processing unit 1097 (FIG. 335) records a symbol recorded from data such as a premium image stored in the data storage unit 1094 (FIG. 335), a symbol arrangement of a special reel symbol 1041, and a symbol for paying out a small winning combination. And the production is judged.

The medal lending machine CT temporarily records the recorded data captured by each camera unit 1070 in the data storage unit 1094 (FIG. 335), and the player M records the recorded data on the game recording management server 1046 after the game recording system 1140 is terminated. Is transmitted from the stand computer 93 and the island computer 91 via the switching hub 7 through the island wiring 92. The game recording management server 1046 can be operated from the application software built in the hall computer system 90.
In addition, the hall computer system 90 automatically or manually collects still image or moving image data such as premium images and symbol arrangements of reel symbols 1041 disclosed by each gaming machine manufacturer through the Internet line E by this operation application software. Is possible. These collected data are stored in the game recording management server 1046, and then the data corresponding to each slot machine SMA is stored in the data storage unit 1094 (FIG. 335) of the medal lending machine CT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 349, the game recording system 1140 is provided on the medal lending machine CT to record the operation screen of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 (FIG. 330) when the player M records the state of playing the slot machine SMA. The 1085 operates each camera unit 1070 (FIG. 330, 345, 347). The liquid crystal operation unit 1080 is driven by the main CPU 1122 (FIG. 334) and operates based on the application software program stored in the HDD 1125 (FIG. 334).

The operation screen 1085 shown in FIG. 349 (A) is a screen for operating the cameras 69F and U (FIGS. 330, 345, and 347), which are the imaging means of the camera units 1070. Specifically, the operation screen 1085 has a "recording start" button 1085a for starting recording of each camera 69, a "pause" button 1085b for pausing recording of each camera 69, and ending recording of each camera 69. There is a "recording end" button 1085c, and an "action" button 1085d for manually recording the recording state into a file during recording by each camera 69. The "action" button 1085d is pressed when recording the time of a big hit, a small hit, etc. in a file, and the "win" button 1085e, which is pressed when recording the time when a premium image appears in a file. There is a button 1085f.

Further, the "action" button 1085d optionally determines the small winning combination as to what kind of small winning combination was paid out when the small winning combination paid out from the captured image occurs, and determines the type of the small winning combination. There is an "OP" button 1085g that is pressed when recording to a file.
Further, the game recording camera (each camera 69U) 1085o moves the position where each camera 69U (FIG. 330, FIG. 345, FIG. 347) is imaged vertically and horizontally by the arrow keys of the "triangle mark", or "+". "-" Is a button for operating the zoom and pull of each camera 69U (FIG. 330, 345, 347). Further, the operation of the player recording camera (each camera 69F) 1085p for recording the player M is also the same as described above. The "switching" button 1085q is a button for switching the screen of the operation screen 1085 from FIG. 349 (A) to FIG. 349 (B) and from FIG. 349 (B) to FIG. 349 (A).

In the operation screen 1085 shown in FIG. 349 (B), the game hall mainly charges the player M by the game medium (pachinko ball Q, medal CM) according to the recording time, and uses the game recording system 1140. It is a screen to operate when doing. The game recording system 1140 is a system that rents out cameras 69F and U when used by the player M and stores the recorded recording data in the game recording management server 1046 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 months). .. Player M can use the "pay-as-you-go" button 1085h, which is a pay-as-you-go system that allows you to receive services (300 yen per hour (15 medals CM)) on an hourly basis, or a passport system that you can use for one day (all-you-can-use passport system). Select the "1day passport" button 1085i, which costs 1000 yen a day (50 medals CM). In addition, the "option" button 1085j is a button for paying and setting an additional charge for a service or the like that records a value obtained by counting the types and numbers of small winning combinations and an occurrence time in a file as described above. In this way, as for the charge such as billing, money may be put into the medal lending machine CT, or the charge for the service of the game recording system 1140 may be collected from the accumulated medals (game medium) of the membership card or guest card. .. As described above, the game recording system 1140 is a system in which the game hall can provide a new service to the player M, and the game hall can further generate profits from the player M.

The "ID" column 1085k, the "PS" column 1085l, and the "email" column 1085m of the operation screen 1085 shown in FIG. 349 (B) are data (recorded data) recorded on the game recording management server 1046, such as data and files. And the information file) is used to set a security password and ID so that the player M who has recorded the Internet line E can download it later. The "email" column 1085 m is provided to notify the player M who recorded the address of the game recording management server 1046 server in which these data are stored, and to notify the security password and ID settings. There is.
The “input key” field 1085n is a password set so that the other medal lender CT can continuously take over the same recorded data even if the slot machine SMA is moved to the other slot machine SMA. By inputting the "ID" and "input key" into the other medal lending machine CT, new recording data and reference information file data are created in the file folder stored in the game recording management server 1046. .. This password may be automatically generated or may be set individually.

<Control of game recording system>
Next, the control of the game recording system 1140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 to 355 and 357. FIG. 350 is a flowchart of the billing system processing of the game recording system 1140. FIG. 351 is a flowchart of the billing time processing of the game recording system 1140. FIG. 352 is a flowchart of the effect recording process of the game recording system 1140. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a recording screen recorded by the game recording system 1140. FIG. 354 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in a file generated by the game recording system 1140. FIG. 355 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in a file generated by the game recording system 1140. FIG. 357 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the information stored in the data storage unit 1094 in advance from the game machine maker or the like.

First, the billing system process (S3840) shown in FIG. 350 when the player M charges for using the game recording system 1140 will be described.
The player M automatically generates an ID for each player M on the operation screen 1085 shown in FIG. 349 (B), and inputs and sets an e-mail address and a password (S3841). After the input of these set values is completed (YES in S3841), the game recording system 1140 selects either a pay-as-you-go system or a 1-day passport that can record all day, and if the processing of billing by the medal CM is completed (S3842), the 1-day Set the passport flag (S3843). Further, in the case of the pay-as-you-go system, the game recording system 1140 sets the recording time and the pay-as-you-go flag according to the billing amount (S3844).
In this way, the amusement park collects a fee from the player M and provides an image pickup device and a recording device to provide a new service for capturing the production of the game machine and the state of the player playing the game and saving the recorded data. It is possible to provide and make a profit from the player M. In addition, the player M can record the production of the game machine and his / her own face playing the game machine without bringing in an imaging device or a recording device and without worrying about batteries or the like.

Next, when the setting of the 1-day passport flag or the pay-as-you-go flag is completed (S3843, S3844), the game recording system 1140 uses the game recording management server 1046 to play a game in the data area in order to save data such as recorded data and files. It is secured for each ID of the customer M (S3845).
Then, the process proceeds to the billing time processing (S3850) described later. The game recording system 1140 repeats the billing time processing (S3850) until there is a billing processing completion flag (NO in S3846). When the billing process is completed (YES in S3846), the game recording system 1140 sets an ID and password (S3847), and the game recording management server 1046 has recorded data and other reference information described later (FIGS. 354 and 355). Is saved in a file (S3848). The saved recording data and files are the data of the game recording management server 1046 at the e-mail address specified by the player M so that the recorded player M can access and download the game recording management server 1046 via the Internet E. The address where the recorded data and reference information file)) is saved is transmitted, and the billing system process (S3840) process ends.

In this way, the player M can download and save the recorded data recorded from outside the game hall and other reference information (FIGS. 354 and 355) to be described later to the player's computer, mobile phone, or the like at any time. It is possible.
The player M saves the recorded data, the above-mentioned reference information file, and the like from the USB terminal used when charging the mobile phone terminal provided in the medal lending machine CT to the USB memory or the mobile phone terminal. Recorded data or the like may be acquired.

Next, regarding the process of managing the time when the player M uses the game recording system 1140, the billing time process (S3850) will be described with reference to FIG. 351.
The game recording system 1140 determines whether or not it is a pay-as-you-go system based on the set flag (S3851), and if it is a pay-as-you-go system (YES in S3851), it determines whether or not the recording time has reached the billing time (S3551). S3852), if the recording time has reached the billing time (YES in S3852), it is determined whether or not the recording time is extended (S3853), and if there is no time extension (NO in S3853), the completion flag is set. (S3855). When setting the extension of the recording time, the player M operates the operation screen 1085, charges for the extension by the medal CM, and extends the recording time (S3856), and the game recording system 1140 will be described later. The production recording process (S3860) is continued.

Further, in the game recording system 1140, when the player selects the 1-day passport (NO in S3851), the recording ends depending on whether the player M ends the recording or the business of the game hall ends. If it is determined (YES in S3854), the completion flag is set (S3855). If the player M does not want to end the recording, the game recording system 1140 continues the effect recording process (S3860).

Next, the effect recording process (S3860) will be described with reference to FIG. 352 regarding the process when the player M records using the game recording system 1140.
The game recording system 1140 determines whether or not recording is in progress (S3861), and if it is not recording (NO in S3861), the production recording process (S3860) is completed, and if it is being recorded (YES in S3861), Each camera 69F captures the face of the player M during the game, and each camera 69U stores a moving image of the slot machine SMA's production liquid crystal 1105 and reel symbol 1040 during the game together with audio. Record in unit 1094 (S3862, S3862).
For example, the video 1141 recorded as shown in FIG. 353 is recorded by the player video unit 1142 that captures the face of the player M, the reel design 1040 of the slot machine SMA, and the production content video unit 1143 that captures the liquid crystal 1105 for production. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 353, the player moving image unit 1142 and the effect content moving image unit 1143 are recorded on one display, but they may be recorded and saved separately.

In addition, when the player M presses the "action" button 1085d on the operation screen 1085 and an action signal is generated, or when the game recording system 1140 automatically displays a premium effect or a winning image, the image processing unit 1092 An action signal is transmitted when the image is compared and recognized by the image processing of the effect design determination processing unit 1097.
Then, when there is no action signal, the effect recording process (S3860) ends (NO in S3864), and when there is an action signal (YES in S3864), the game recording system 1140 is sent to the data storage unit 1094. Information on the stored premium image and jackpot symbol is acquired (S3865), and the acquired information is compared with the image captured by the effect symbol determination processing unit 1097 (S3866). Further, the game recording system 1140 stores the time when the action signal is generated (S386 7).
In this way, since the player M can confirm the time of occurrence even afterwards, it is possible to easily perform the work of editing the moving image when posting to the moving image site.

The game recording system 1140 compared the acquired information with the image captured by the effect design determination processing unit 1097 (S3866), and when the premium image or the jackpot image was successfully identified (YES in S3868), the image was taken. An image is cut out (S3869), and as shown in FIG. 354 (A), image data 1136 (A to I.jpg) is added to a file (S3871) in the action list 1139, and this file is saved in the data storage unit 1094. (S3872). The action list 1139 is a file displaying time data 1133, jackpot type data 1134 indicating the jackpot type, the number of starts 1135 during the period in which the action signal is generated, and image data 1136. The image data 1136 can be used by the player M at the time of a big hit, a premium image, or the like as a thumbnail image, and is automatically generated, so that it can be used on the cover of a moving image site.

In the game recording system 1140, a file of a recording tom chart 1137 showing a time chart is stored in the data storage unit 1094 as reference information in addition to the action list 1139. The recording tom chart 1137 shows the occurrence time of the jackpot "BB", the occurrence time of the small hit "RB", the occurrence time of ART, the stop time zone of recording, and the occurrence time zone of ART.
Further, FIG. 355 shows the premium production determination table 1144 as reference information. In the premium effect determination table 1144, the game recording system 1140 acquires a premium image stored in the data storage unit 1094 (S3865), and compares the acquired information with the image captured by the effect symbol determination processing unit 1097 (S3866). ) It is a table showing the judgment result. This premium production judgment table 1144 shows the occurrence time 1145 when the premium production occurred, the premium generation symbol 1146 which is the role that triggered the occurrence of the premium, the premium production 1147 indicating the content of the premium production, and the probability 1148 of the premium role. Shown. Further, the premium generation symbol 1146, the premium effect 1147, and the probability 1148 are taken out from the information in the data storage unit 1094 containing the information collected in advance from the game machine maker or the like.

FIG. 357 shows a part of the information collected in advance from the game machine maker or the like stored in the data storage unit 1094 in addition to the above-mentioned premium effect image.
The setting determination effect image 1151 is used as an index for displaying the set stage among the plurality of stages of the slot machine SMA on the effect liquid crystal 1105. For example, when the item A image 1152 is displayed, the set estimated content is associated with the set estimated numerical value 1153 estimated to be the setting "4" or "5" or "6". In addition, the item B image 1152 is associated with the set estimated numerical value 1153 estimated to be the set even number, the item C image 1152 is associated with the set estimated numerical value 1153 estimated to be the set odd number, and the item D image 1152 is associated with the set estimated numerical value 1153. A set estimated value 1153 estimated to be "6" is associated.
Further, the symbol image 1154 of the reel is a combination symbol arrangement image 1155 showing an array of reel symbols 1040 that are stopped at the time of a big hit or an ART winning. The contents of the role symbol arrangement image 1155 include "interrupted cherry image" in which the cherry stops when the left reel 1041 is interrupted, "strong cherry image" in which three cherry symbols are aligned on a straight line, and "weak cherry image". There are "chance eye A image", "chance eye B image", "strong watermelon image" and "weak watermelon image".

(Technical features)
An example of the technical features of the present embodiment is shown in parentheses below, but it is not particularly limited and is illustrated, and the effects that can be considered from these features are also described.

<First feature point>
A system for a game hall provided with an imaging means (for example, mainly each camera 69U) capable of capturing an image in the vicinity of a game machine (for example, mainly a slot machine SMA).
A game recording means (for example, mainly processing of S3863, data storage unit 1094) for recording a video of a player (for example, mainly a player M) playing a game with the game machine by the imaging means.
Recording data storage means for storing recorded data by the game recording means (for example, mainly processing of S3884, data storage unit 1094, game recording management server 1046), and
Processing of recorded data acquisition means (for example, mainly game recording management server 1046, Internet line E, S3849) capable of acquiring the recorded data recorded by the player from the recorded data storage means at least after the end of the game recording means. ) And.

Based on the above features, the present invention provides a new service in which the game hall provides a player with an imaging means and a game recording means to image the effect of the game machine, and the player acquires the captured recorded data. It is possible to do. In addition, the player can record the production of the game machine without bringing in an imaging device or a recording device and without worrying about batteries or the like.

<Second feature>
The recorded data acquisition means is connected to an internet line (for example, mainly an internet line E) and can acquire the recorded data from outside the amusement park (for example, mainly a game recording management server 1046, the Internet). It is characterized by having the processing of lines E and S3894).

With the above features, the present invention allows a player to acquire recorded data from outside the amusement park at any time using a personal computer or a mobile phone.

<Third feature point>
When using the game recording means, it is characterized by being provided with a fee collecting means (for example, mainly medal lending machines CT, S3842, S3843, S3844) for collecting a fee for using the game recording means from the player. And.
Due to the above features, the game hall can make a profit from the player by collecting a fee instead of using the game recording means of the game field system from the player, so that a new service can be provided to the player. Is possible.

<Fourth feature>
The fee collecting means is provided with a game medium collecting means (for example, mainly a medal lending machine CT, a membership card, a guest card) for collecting a game medium used when playing the game machine instead of money. It is characterized by.
Due to the above characteristics, the present invention does not require the player to invest money by collecting from the stored game medium. Further, since the player can collect from the game medium acquired by the game, the player can pay as a usage fee of the device instead of exchanging the prize.

<Fifth feature point>
At least the player recording means (for example, processing of S3862, data storage unit 1094, game recording) capable of recording an image captured by an imaging means capable of capturing at least the player's face (for example, mainly each camera 69F). It is characterized by having a management server 1046).
Due to the above features, the present invention facilitates editing work for posting a state in which a player is playing when posting on a video site. Imaging and recording are possible at the same timing as the game recording means.

<Sixth feature point>
The recorded data acquisition means passes through a connection terminal (for example, a USB terminal mainly provided in the ball lending machine CT) provided in the vicinity of the game machine and used when charging the mobile phone terminal, and the recorded data. It is characterized by providing a download means capable of acquiring recorded data from a storage means to a portable storage medium (for example, mainly a USB memory or a mobile phone terminal).
Due to the above features, the present invention is convenient because the terminal that is normally used by the player to charge the mobile phone terminal can be used as it is, and the data can be immediately brought back on the spot.

<7th feature>
It is characterized by including an event occurrence time storage means (for example, mainly an action signal, processing of S3867) for recording the time when the event means related to the game occurs based on the time taken by the player.
Due to the above features, the present invention makes it easier for the player to edit the video later when posting to the video site, so that the player cares at which time in the recorded game. It is possible to make it easier to understand whether a special event has occurred.

<Eighth feature point>
In the event means, any one of the big hit, the small hit, the hit with the probability of winning combination of 1/500 or less, and the effect display of the game machine as an index for determining the setting of the game machine occurred. It is characterized by being an event.
With the above features, the present invention makes it possible for a player or a person who watches this video to easily recognize and edit at what time an event of interest to the game occurred. is there.

<Ninth feature point>
The comparative image means (for example, mainly the setting discrimination effect image 1151, the reel symbol image 1154, the premium effect 1147) stored in advance for each type of the event means, and the event means generated by the operation of the player. A determination image acquisition means (for example, mainly processing of S3865) that captures an image of the effect of the game machine or an image that determines the arrangement of the reels of the game machine, and the comparison image means and the determination image acquisition means. It is characterized in that the event determination means (for example, premium effect determination table 1144, mainly processing of S3856, processing of S3868) is provided for determining the type of the event means that has occurred.
Due to the above features, in the present invention, the player does not need to watch the moving image again when editing, and does not need to check whether the video is premium or not, and the jackpot or the like is automatically determined later. The work of editing a video becomes easy.

As shown in the above-described embodiment, the application can also be applied to a game machine of the present embodiment such as a game center or a casino, or a facility that conducts business similar to the main game machine.

1 ... playground, 2 ... management area, 3 ... game area, 5 ... wireless router (wireless communication means),
10 ... Communication server, 60 ... Surveillance camera system, 61 ... Surveillance camera (imaging means),
69 ... Each camera (imaging means), 70 ... end ball processing device (end ball processing means),
71 ... end ball server, 80 ... face recognition server,
90 ... Hall computer (game information analysis means),
440 ... Shutter (transportation means), 600 ... Captured image,
550 ... Membership card (storage medium), 551 ... Guest card (storage medium),
555, 556, 557, 559, 605, 606 ... Face image data (feature data),
800 ... Individual face recognition device (player identification means),
805, 805a, 805b, 805c ... Counting unit (counting means),
820 ... Individual face recognition server, 860 ... Night monitoring system,
965 ... Top lamp (call display means),
1050 ... Amusement park information management system (game information management means),
K, Ka, Kb, Kc, Kd ... Stand information display device (information display means / game information display device) as ancillary means related to game machines, P ... pachinko machine, SMA ... slot machine,
PT: Ball lending machine (game medium lending means) as an accessory means related to game machines,
CT: Medal lending machine (game medium lending means) as ancillary means related to game machines
JC ... Counting means (counting means) as ancillary means related to game machines, BA ... Battery (storage means),
SM ... Personal mobile terminal, TA ... Game medium storage tank TA (storage means),
S / Sa ... ball detection sensor (storage amount detection means), BR ... transport gutter (transport means).

Claims (9)

It is a system for a game hall equipped with an imaging means capable of capturing an image in the vicinity of the game machine.
A game recording means for recording a video of a player playing a game with the game machine by the imaging means, and a game recording means.
A recording data storage means for storing recorded data by the game recording means, and
A recording data acquisition means capable of acquiring the recording data recorded by the player from the recording data storage means at least after the end of the game recording means.
A system for amusement parks that is characterized by being equipped with. The system for a game hall according to claim 1, wherein the recorded data acquisition means is connected to an Internet line and includes an external connection means capable of acquiring the recorded data from outside the game hall. The invention according to any one of claims 1 and 2, wherein a fee collecting means for collecting a fee for using the game recording means from the player when the game recording means is used is provided. Amusement park system. The system for a game hall according to claim 3, wherein the fee collecting means includes a game medium collecting means for collecting a game medium used when playing the game machine instead of money. The amusement park according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein at least the player recording means capable of recording an image captured by the imaging means capable of capturing the face of the player is provided. system. The recorded data acquisition means is a download capable of acquiring recorded data from the recorded data storage means to a portable storage medium via a connection terminal provided in the vicinity of the game machine and used when charging a mobile phone. The amusement park system according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the system is provided with means. The invention according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein an event occurrence time storage means for recording the time when the event means related to the game occurs based on the time taken by the player is provided. System for the amusement park. In the event means, any one of the big hit, the small hit, the hit with the probability of winning combination of 1/500 or less, and the effect display of the game machine as an index for determining the setting of the game machine occurred. The amusement park system according to claim 7, wherein the system is an event. Comparative image means saved in advance for each type of event means and
A determination image acquisition means that captures an image of the effect of the game machine that captures the generated event means or an image that determines the reel arrangement of the game machine, triggered by the operation of the player.
The event determination means, which compares the comparison image means and the determination image means means, and determines the type of the event means that has occurred.
The system for amusement park according to claim 8, wherein the system is provided with.

Images